Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Item No. 17 - Engineering Standards, Design Manual, and Specifications Update
17)Engineering Standards, Design Manual, and Specifications Update Adopt A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE, CALIFORNIA, ADOPTING AND APPROVING THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE ENGINEERING STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION – 2024 EDITION. Page 1 of 2 REPORT TO CITY COUNCIL To:Honorable Mayor and Members of the City Council From:Jason Simpson, City Manager Prepared by:Remon Habib, City Engineer Date:September 24, 2024 Subject:Engineering Standards, Design Manual, and Specifications Update Recommendation Adopt A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE, CALIFORNIA, ADOPTING AND APPROVING THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE ENGINEERING STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION – 2024 EDITION. Background The City of Lake Elsinore Engineering Standard Plans and Desing Manual (Engineering Standards) were last revised in 2009 and 2018, respectively. Since then, many industry standards and best practices have evolved to provide safer, more durable public improvements. The purpose of these Engineering Standards is to provide policies and design and construction guidelines. Design professionals, private developers, and contractors use these guidelines for residential and commercial development and public works projects to ensure public welfare, preserve the community aesthetic, and promote efficient development within the City. Engineering Standards are used in connection with design, bidding, and construction of all public works projects by or for the City. Engineering Standards Update Page 2 of 2 Discussion Engineering Standards include various design criteria, technical specifications and standard construction details that are minimum requirements for design and construction of public improvements. Any improvements installed in the City right of way that do not meet the Engineering Standards without prior exceptions issued by the City Engineer shall be removed and reinstalled at the owner or contractor’s expense to ensure public safety and uniformity of infrastructure with the City. The adoption of Engineering Standards will include the following: Standard Plans, Design Manual, Streetlight Manual, and Technical Specifications. The updated Engineering Standards may impact the cost of future City or private development projects. All new standards attached to this staff report are being presented as ”DRAFT” until formally approved by the Council. Upon Council approval, the City Engineer will remove ”DRAFT” watermarks and enforce them as current Engineering Standards. Engineering Standards will be maintained as a living document, which will be revised to reflect current industry standards and uphold minimum acceptable standards for quality design and construction work in the City. Any revisions to the adopted edition shall become effective immediately upon approval by the City Engineer without the need for adoption by the City Council. Fiscal Impact There is no fiscal impact with adopting the Engineering Standards. Attachments Attachment 1 - Resolution Attachment 2 - Engineering Standard Plans Attachment 3 - Engineering Design Manual Attachment 4 - Street Light Manual Attachment 5 - Special Provisions Attachment 6 - Traffic Signal Specifications Engineering RESOLUTION NO. 2024-___ A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE, CALIFORNIA, ADOPTING AND APPROVING THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE ENGINEERING STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION – 2024 EDITION Whereas, the City of Lake Elsinore Engineering Standards and Specifications (Engineering Standards) provide policies, design and construction guidelines, which include various design criteria, technical specifications and standard construction details which are considered minimum requirements for design and construction of public improvements; and Whereas, the City’s Engineering Department have developed a comprehensive set of Engineering Standards and Specifications that encompass design, construction, and improvement of public infrastructure among other subjects; and Whereas, the City Council recognizes that the design uniformity is in the best interest of the local community; and Whereas, the City’s Engineering Standards represent the current views of the public works officials, eliminating conflicts and confusion; and Whereas, the City’s Engineering Standards must be periodically updated to account for the changes in construction practices and for the protection of public health and safety. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE, DOES HEREBY RESOLVE, DETERMINE AND ORDER AS FOLLOWS: Section 1. That the foregoing recitals are true and correct. Section 2. The Council approve the Engineering Standards which contain the following: •Engineering Standard Plans •Engineering Design Manual •Engineering Street Light Manual •Engineering Special Provisions •Engineering Traffic Signal Specifications. Section 3. The Council adopt the following Standards: •The “Greenbook” (Latest Edition) – Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction •California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devises (CA MUTCD) – latest edition Section 4. The City Engineer of the City of Lake Elsinore is authorized and empowered to sign all necessary elements to implement and carry out the purpose specified in this Resolution. Section 5. The City Engineer is authorized to make periodic changes and modifications to the Engineering Standards and Specifications as necessary to comply with current public works standards, materials, and methods of construction. Resolution No. 2024-___ Page 2 of 2 3 7 8 3 1 Section 6. Engineering Standard shall govern over any conflicts with the Ordinances that cover design standard, guidelines, and policies. Section 7. This Resolution takes effect and is in force immediately upon passage. Passed and Adopted at a regular meeting of the City Council of the City of Lake Elsinore, California, this 10th day of September 2024. . Steve Manos Mayor Attest: Candice Alvarez, MMC City Clerk STATE OF CALIFORNIA ) COUNTY OF RIVERSIDE ) ss. CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE ) I, Candice Alvarez, MMC, City Clerk of the City of Lake Elsinore, California, do hereby certify that Resolution No. 2024- ______ was adopted by the City Council of the City of Lake Elsinore, California, at the regular meeting of September 10, 2024, and that the same was adopted by the following vote: AYES: NOES: ABSENT: ABSTAIN: Candice Alvarez, MMC City Clerk DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB MIN 2'3'DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB Casino Dr 00000 Casino PRIVATE Casino Cas i n o DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB SECONDARY ##000SECONDARY##000 PRIMARYPRIMARY##999##999PRIMARYPRIMARY##000##000SECONDARYSECONDARY ##999##999Æ ) Å DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB ‐ ‐‐ ‐DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB LINE DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT DESIGN MANUAL & Plan Preparation Engineering Department 130 South Main Street Lake Elsinore, California 92530 (951) 674-3124 August 2024 DRAFT TABLE OF CONTENTS Section I General Information ................................................................................. 1 Section II Parcel and Subdivision Maps ................................................................. 5 Section III Grading Plans ......................................................................................... 26 Section IV Improvement Plans ............................................................................... 57 Section V Traffic Plans ........................................................................................... 87 Section VI Miscellaneous Items .............................................................................. 98 Appendix .................................................................................................................... 100 DRAFT SECTION I GENERAL INFORMATION Introduction This Design Manual has been prepared to assist subdividers, developers, civil engineers, and land surveyors in the processing of maps and the design of improvement plans in the City of Lake Elsinore. This Manual is intended as a guide in providing important and necessary information for preparing and processing these documents. It is not the intent of this manual to anticipate all possible situations that may arise during the development process. Therefore, the standards and criteria developed within this Manual will not address every situation, but it is anticipated that the standards and criteria put forth in this Manual will apply in the majority of cases. This Manual is divided into six (6) major sections plus the Appendix. These sections are entitled General Information, Tract and Parcel Maps, Grading Plans, Improvement Plans, Traffic, and Miscellaneous Items. Each section outlines the basic requirements and information that should be included as part of the plan set prior to submittal for City review. Checklists are included within each section to aid the user in plan preparation. All improvement projects, whether public or private, shall be designed in accordance with this Design Manual. This information has been compiled to assist users in processing all plan checks efficiently, quickly, and accurately through the City. Failure to submit the minimum requirements will result in delays in the plan checking process. Controlling Documents The following documents have been used as the basis of the information provided within this Manual. The user should reference these documents whenever additional information is needed in the preparation of plans or calculations. 1. Subdivision Map Act: The current Subdivision Map Act takes precedence over all other documents and ordinances relative to the subdivision of land. 2. Subdivision Ordinance: The City Code expands, delineates, and regulates those items that the Subdivision Map Act allows the local jurisdiction to regulate. 3. Grading Ordinance: City of Lake Elsinore Ordinances 801, 882, 1021, and this manual shall govern grading, erosion control, and plan preparation of grading plans. 4. City of Lake Elsinore Standard Plans, including latest revisions. 5. Riverside County Hydrology Manual: All hydrologic calculations done in the City of Lake Elsinore should be done using the methods outlined in this Hydrology Manual. Computer programs may be used to assist the user in preparation of calculation runoffs and hydraulic data for submittal. 6. Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District Design Manual Standard Drawings: All flood control devices should be referenced to the standards and information within these drawings. 7. Other documents referred to within this Manual include the following: · Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Latest Edition) DRAFT · State of California, Department of Transportation, Standard Plans and Standard Specifications (Latest Edition) · California Building Code (Latest Edition) · International Building Code (Latest Edition) · California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD) (Latest Edition) · Federal MUTCD (latest Edition) Definitions The definitions listed in this section are in addition to those listed in the Subdivision Map Act and the Subdivision Ordinance. 1. Legal Lot: Is a parcel established or set forth by one of the following means: a. A deed describing the property recorded prior to March 4, 1972. b. A recorded subdivision map or parcel map. c. Either of the above combined with a City approved and recorded boundary adjustment plat. NOTE: A parcel is not necessarily a legal parcel just because there is an Assessor’s parcel number assigned to it. 2. Tentative Map: The tentative subdivision or parcel map is an official submittal depicting the overall development contemplated. Upon approval by the City, the tentative subdivision (parcel) map constitutes an agreement between the developer and the City. 3. Final Map: Is a map that delineates the boundary of the subdivision by bearings and distances, indicating the procedure of survey, and establishes the boundary of each lot within the subdivision. Plan Submittal Check Lists The following sections include check lists that should be used in verifying that the submittal is a complete package in order to avoid delays in the checking procedure. Reminder: Failure to submit the minimum requirements will result in delays in the plan checking process. DRAFT SECTION II PARCEL AND SUBDIVISION MAPS Parcel Maps A parcel map procedure is used to create a division or consolidation of land under the provisions of the Subdivision Map Act and the Subdivision Ordinance. Both a tentative parcel map and a final parcel map are required. However, under some circumstances, the requirements for a tentative parcel map may be waived by the Planning Manager and the City Engineer, who have joint responsibility for the processing and approval of tentative parcel maps. A tentative map shows existing topography, boundaries, and improvements (100 ft. beyond the project boundary including driveways, etc., located across the street from the project) plus any proposed changes. An example of when the requirement to submit a tentative parcel map might be waived would be when all public improvements have already been installed, no grading is proposed, and the only changes proposed are changes to lot line or boundaries. The City Engineer shall determine if a tentative parcel map will be waived. If waived, a letter from the City Engineer placing conditions on the subdivision will be sent to the subdivider in the same manner as if conditionally approving a tentative parcel map. The following shall apply to all Parcel Maps: 1. Parcels. All parcels created or divided by parcel maps shall conform to City standards and no existing building or structure shall be made non- conforming with respect to yard or other zoning requirements by the process. 2. Easements. No existing easement in favor of the public shall be rendered impractical by the creation of a parcel on any parcel map. 3. Improvements. The design and construction of required improvements shall conform to the criteria and standards contained in this Manual and dictated by local ordinance. 4. Improvement Agreement/Security Instruments. A parcel map improvement agreement similar to a subdivision improvement agreement may be required for improvements in conjunction with parcel maps. Said agreements, along with security instruments, shall be fully executed prior to recordation of parcel map. 5. Final parcel maps shall be prepared either by a registered Civil Engineer with a license number of 33965 or less or a licensed land surveyor. Tentative Parcel Maps The following checklist provides an outline of the information required on the tentative parcel map. Checklist for Tentative Parcel Maps A. GENERAL 1. Fees deposited 2. Reproducible and copies submitted per Submittal Sheet in Section I, along with copies of current Grand Deeds 3. Drawn on linen, polyester base film, or vellum with black waterproof drawing ink or pencil. Lettering or type to be a minimum of 1/8 inch in height DRAFT 4. All sheets should be 18” x 26” (minimum) to 24” x 36” (maximum) with one-inch margins 5. Scale: 1” = 100’ minimum (shown graphically) with North Arrow 6. Notification List and associated items B. MARGINAL INFORMATION 1. Title: “Tentative Parcel Map” 2. Legal description sufficient to define boundaries – division of or consolidation of property 3. Tax Assessor’s Parcel Number(s) 4. Owner’s name, address, telephone number and signature 5. Applicant’s name, address, telephone number (if other than owner) 6. Civil engineer’s or land surveyor’s name, address, telephone number and registration or license number 7. Source of water supply 8. Method of sewage disposal 9. Zoning – existing and proposed, including all adjacent parcels 10. Proposed usage of each parcel, including all adjacent parcels 11. Gross area (acres and square feet) 12. Reference to topographic source and date 13. Grading – statement if no grading proposed 14. Date of preparation and number, and dates of any revision 15. Vicinity map with north arrow and scale indicated C. MAP INFORMATION 1. North arrow with graphic scale shown (1” = 100’ minimum) 2. Boundaries a. Fully dimensioned (approximations) b. Proposed as solid line, existing as dashed lines c. City – County boundaries identified d. Curve information (approximate) including deltas, radii, and lengths 3. Inundation lines for design flood 4. The following “existing” information shall be shown within the parcel(s) boundaries and within at least 100 feet of the boundaries thereof: a. Highways, streets, roads – names, grades, widths (all private roads shall be designated and labeled as such) b. Sidewalks, pavement, curbs and gutters, street light, driveways DRAFT c. Utilities: 1) Sewer lines – location, size, type, depth, manholes 2) Water lines – location, size, type 3) Gas lines – location, size 4) Electrical, telephone, and cable TV lines – location, size, type, poles, overhead or underground d. Water Courses – widths, direction of flows e. Buildings/structures – location with respect to lot lines f. Trees – groves, orchards, and trees of trunk diameter 4” or more g. Contours – maximum 5’ interval h. Easements – location, purpose, size, public or private 5. The following “proposed” information shall be shown within the parcel(s) boundaries: a. Highways, streets, roads –names, grades widths (all private roads shall be designated and labeled as such) b. Sidewalks, pavement, curbs and gutters, street lights, driveways. c. Sewers – location, size, type, manhole locations d. Drainage facilities e. Removal or relocation of existing buildings and location of any proposed buildings f. Removal of existing trees of trunk diameter 4” or more g. Grading – degree of slope, benches, retaining walls, pad elevations h. Easements – location, purpose, size, public or private i. Parcel: 1) Approximate dimensions 2) Numbered in consecutive order 3) Net area of each parcel (acres or square feet) 4) Gross area of each parcel (acres or square feet) Parcel Maps The parcel map is the formalization of the approved tentative parcel map. Upon recordation, it officially and legally divides or consolidates parcels. The checklist provided below outlines the information required on the final parcel map. Checklist for Parcel Maps A. GENERAL 1. Fees deposited 2. Original and prints submitted per Submittal Sheet in Section I 3. Drawn on linen, polyester base film, or vellum with black, waterproof drawing ink or pencil. Lettering or typing to be a minimum of 1/8 inch in height. DRAFT 4. All sheets shall be 18” x 26” with one-inch margins 5. Proof of Ownership – deed and title report submitted 6. Copies of easements submitted 7. Copies of traverses and closures submitted 8. Reference maps submitted 9. Marginal line – medium heavy, 1” inside trim line B. MARGINAL INFORMATION/FORMAT 1. “Parcel Map No. ____” boldly shown at upper top of sheet 2. Scale: 1” = 100’ minimum (shown graphically) with North arrow 3. Vicinity map with North arrow and scale indicated 4. “Sheet ___ of ___sheet(s)” shown 5. Parcel map – division of consolidation of land, legal description and map referenced 6. Basis of bearings indicated 7. City Engineer’s Certificate shown 8. City Surveyor’s Certificate shown (as appropriate) 9. Surveyor’s Certificate shown with appropriate signature and seal or Engineer’s signature and seal shown 10. Recorder’s Certificate C. MAP DATA 1. Boundary around parcel(s) – heavy solid black line three (3) times thicker than interior parcel lines 2. Each parcel numbered 3. City and County boundary lines adjoining (or in vicinity) shown 4. Existing streets – names, widths, side lines shown as solid lines 5. Recorded maps identified by map name, number and with lots and blocks shown in “phantom letters” 6. Adjacent lot or block lines shown in dashed lines 7. Section, ¼ sections, or portions thereof identified in “phantom letters” 8. References in legal description fully identified on map 9. Mathematical data a. Traverses include exterior boundaries, each parcel, streets and easements. b. All bearings, distances, radii and deltas of traverses shown on map c. Traverses close (1’:10,000’ if boundary) d. Sum of parts of any line or curve must equal total length e. Area calculations furnished where required DRAFT 10. Record bearings, distances, and references in parentheses for: a. Latest record map in disagreement with survey b. Any deed data in disagreement with survey 11. Lines intersecting curves identified by bearing and whether (radial) or (not- radial) 12. Easements: a. Identified as to private or proposed, width and purpose b. Side lines shown as light dash lines c. Recorded easements identified by document number and date of recordation d. Fully dimensioned to include sufficient ties to locate e. Drainage easements should include the note: “Drainage Easements will be kept clear of all obstructions. No buildings or walls should be placed within easement limits. Temporary improvements are subject to removal at the owner’s expense.” 13. Previously vacated streets or easements shown as light dash lines with recorded vacation data 14. Additional notes shown on map: a. To clarify survey or explain discrepancies b. To reference non-recorded information such as City ties, road surveys, State Highway maps, etc. c. Improvement Certificate 15. Legend: a. All abbreviations used on map defined b. Monumentation symbols 16. Monumentation a. Monuments per legend or fully described as to type, size, disc and engineer’s or surveyor’s registration number b. Labeled as “No Record” or referenced to record map c. If controlling location not of record: “No Record – Accepted Hereon As (describe callout location)” d. Monuments tied into survey by bearing and distance, or “Used For Line Only”. No floating monuments. 17. Inundation/seismic lines shown and identified 18. Ensure that Parcel map complies with: a. General Plan b. Zoning requirements c. Tentative parcel map d. All conditions imposed for parcel map approval D. SEPARATE DEEDS, EASEMENTS: DRAFT 1. Prepared, signed and submitted 2. Recording fees submitted 3. Approved by City Council 4. Recorded with County Recorder DRAFT SUBDIVISION MAPS Tentative Maps The tentative subdivision map is made for the purpose of depicting the overall development contemplated. While not precise in detail, such as pavement structural section, it is specific in those items which can be predetermined such as street dimensions and right-of-way. Upon approval by the City, the tentative subdivision map constitutes an agreement between the developer and the City relative to approximate subdivision design to include its grading, zoning, and public improvements. All subsequent work by the developer and his engineer is based on the understanding reached at the tentative map stage. The tentative map should be as complete and specific as reasonably possible. The tentative map is filed with the Planning Department and reviewed by both the Planning Commission and the City Council. The Commission acts in the capacity of an advisory body to the Council. The following checklist provides an outline of the information required on the tentative map. All fees specified by the current fee schedule shall be paid at the time of filing a tentative map. Checklist for Tentative Maps A. GENERAL 1. Fees deposited 2. Reproducible and copies submitted per Submittal Sheet in Section I 3. Drawn on linen, polyester base film, or vellum with black waterproof drawing ink or pencil. Lettering or type to be a minimum of 1/8 inch in height 4. All sheets shall be 18” x 26” (minimum) to 36” x 60” (maximum) with one-inch margins 5. Associated maps, Reports, Statements and Exhibits a. Preliminary Title Report (2 copies) b. Preliminary Soils Report (2 copies) c. Geological Report (1 copy), if required* d. Scenic Highways Proposal (1 copy), if required* e. Development Standards (1 copy), if required* f. Affirmative Fair Marketing Plan (1 copy) for developments of 50 or more lots/units* g. Preliminary hydrology study h. Condominium conversions: 1) Landscape concept plan (1 copy), also see (a) below DRAFT 2) Building elevations (1 copy), also see (a) and (b) below 3) Site plan (1 copy), also see (a) and (b) below 4) Floor plans (1 copy), also see (b) below 5) Statement on utilities and meters (1 copy) 6) CC&Rs (1 copy) 7) Stamped self-addressed envelope of each tenant (3 sets) 8) Evidence of notification of intent to convert given to tenants 60 days prior to filing of tentative map *Not required for condominium conversions Plus one colored copy Plus one copy reduced to 8-1/2” x 11” or other approved reduction B. MARGINAL INFORMATION 1. Title: “Tentative Map for (subdivision name)” (Use Unit numbers when applicable) 2. Legal description sufficient to define boundaries – division of or consolidation of property 3. Tax Assessor’s Parcel Number(s) 4. Owner’s name, address, telephone number and signature 5. Subdivider’s name, address, telephone number 6. Civil engineer’s name, address, telephone number and registration or license number 7. Source of water supply 8. Method of sewage disposal 9. Gross area (acres or square feet) 10. Total number of lots 11. Total number of each type of lot (Residential, Open Space, etc.) 12. Area devoted to each proposed use 13. Minimum, Maximum and Average lot size 14. Present and Proposed Zoning 15. Present and Proposed Use(s) 16. Date of preparation and number and dates of any revision DRAFT 17. Drainage and Flood Control Measures 18. Vicinity map with north arrow and scale indicated C. MAP INFORMATION 1. North arrow with graphic scale shown (1” = 100’ minimum) 2. Boundaries a. Fully dimensioned (approximations) b. Proposed as solid line, existing as dashed lines c. City – County boundaries identified d. Adjacent lands owned, leased, or under option by the subdivider shown e. References to Adjacent Recorded maps by Name, Type and Number 3. The following “existing” information shall be shown within the parcel(s) boundaries and within at least 100 feet of the boundaries thereof: a. Contours: Maximum Two (2) foot intervals to extend 100 feet beyond Subdivision boundaries and to include total ownership b. Highways, streets, roads – names, grades, widths (all private roads shall be designated and labeled as such) c. Sidewalks, pavement, curbs and gutters, street light, driveways d. Utilities: 1) Sewer lines – location, size, type, manholes with invert and rim elevations shown 2) Water lines – location, size, type 3) Gas lines – location, size 4) Electrical, telephone, and cable TV lines – location, size, type, poles, overhead or underground a. Water Courses – widths, direction of flows b. Buildings/structures – location or relocation with respect to lot lines, size, and shape (to scale) c. Trees – groves, orchards, and trees of trunk diameter 4” or more DRAFT d. Easements – locations, purpose, size, public or private e. Drainage Improvements – locations, size and type f. Inundation line for the design storm 4. The following “proposed” information shall be shown within the tentative tract boundaries: a. Highways, streets, roads – names, grades, widths (all private roads shall be designated and labeled as such) along with typical cross section of each street. All curve data, cul-de-sac radii, and connections to existing streets shall be included b. Sidewalks, pavement, curbs and gutters, street light, driveways, bicycle paths, riding and hiking trails, and pedestrian way (as applicable) c. Sewers – location, size, type, manholes numbered, invert and rim elevations shown and access to all manholes d. Drainage improvements – location, type and size e. Removal or relocation of existing buildings and location of any proposed buildings f. Removal of existing trees of trunk diameter 4” or larger g. Grading – degree of slope, benches, retaining walls, brown ditches, pad elevations including Off-Site (slope rights must be obtained from the effected property owner) h. Easements – locations, purpose, size, public or private Final Subdivision Maps Final subdivision maps are processed by the Engineering Department which is responsible for distribution to other departments. Final maps are not reviewed by the Planning Commission. Time limitations for submissions and processing are contained in the Subdivision Map Act. A. The items below shall be submitted along with the Final Map. The final subdivision map shall not be considered until all documents and plans supporting the subdivision have been submitted and the required fees have been paid. These documents include (but are not limited to) the following: 1. Proof of Ownership (Title Report, dated within 60 days of map approval) 2. Copies of deeds, deed restrictions, and easements 3. Traverse and closure sheets 4. Hydraulic and hydrology computations 5. Soils Report DRAFT 6. Grading Plans (if required) 7. Design data and/or calculations of special structures 8. Engineer’s Estimate based on City’s cost rates 9. Improvement Plans (if required) 10. Other items as specified by City Council in approval of tentative map 11. Reference Maps. Copy of Approved Tentative Map and Conditions of Approval. B. Additional submissions required prior to Council consideration. At least twenty-one (21) days in advance of the date scheduled for Council consideration of the final map, all required fees and assessments shall be paid and the following documents shall be filed by the subdivider with the City Engineer. All such documents shall be reviewed and approved by the City Engineer, fully executed and complete in all respects, at the time of filing. 1. Improvement Agreement(s), City signatures not required 2. Bonds or request for delayed bonding procedure 3. Easements for all off-site improvements 4. Any other required deeds and/or easements 5. Signatures required prior to Council consideration – Title Sheet. At least twenty-one (21) days in advance of the date scheduled for Council consideration, the title sheet shall be fully executed except for certificates by the City Clerk, City Engineer, and County Recorder. The following checklist provides an outline of the information required on the subdivision map. All fees specified by the current fee schedule shall be paid at the time of filing a subdivision map. Checklist for Final Subdivision Maps A. GENERAL 1. Map Check deposited 2. Reproducible and copies submitted per Submittal Sheet in Section I 3. Supporting documents submitted: a. Proof of Ownership b. Traverse sheets 4. Improvement and grading plans submitted 5. Drafting requirements – all sheets DRAFT a. Size: 18” x 26” b. Drawn with black waterproof drawing ink c. Drawn on polyester base film. All lettering or type to be a minimum of 1/8 inch in height d. 1” margin with medium-heavy marginal line e. “Tract (or Parcel as applicable) Map No. _____” at top of sheet f. “Sheet _____ of _____ sheets” inside upper right hand margin g. “Reversion to Acreage” or “Amended,” if applicable h. Unit number, if applicable B. TITLE SHEET – CERTIFICATES (SHEET 1) 1. Legal description 2. Number of lots. Each type and total 3. Gross acreage 4. Certificates, as appropriate a. The certificate for those signers requiring embossing seals such as the City Clerk b. The description of what is offered for dedication or as easements in the Owner’s Certificate shall agree with what is accepted (or rejected) in the ‘City Clerk’s Certificate c. All signatures must be signed in black waterproof ink and dated within authorized time periods C. PROCEDURE OF SURVEY AND INDEX SHEET 1. Marginal information a. Vicinity map with north arrow and scale indicated b. Civil engineer or land surveyor’s certificate with signature and seal c. Other certificates which would not fit on Sheet 1 d. Legend with all symbols identified e. Basis of Bearings f. General Notes: DRAFT 1) Total number of lots 2) Gross area in square feet or acres 2. Procedure of Survey a. Scale: 1” = 200’ or as required b. North arrow shown c. Legend: 1) Sheet coverage/Index 2) Identify sheet numbers 3) Show subdivision, City-County boundaries, etc. d. All monuments identified e. All lots shown and numbered f. All streets shown and identified g. Record maps, section, ¼ sections identified h. References to legal description fully identified i. Bearings, distances, radii, and deltas shown for subdivision boundaries and ties j. Record bearings, distances and references shown in parenthesis for: 1) Latest record map in disagreement with survey, and 2) Any deed data in disagreement with survey k. Tied to California Coordinate System, Zone VI, if pertinent D. MAP SHEETS 1. Scale: 1” = 100’ (minimum) with graphical scale shown, or as required to show all details 2. North arrow 3. Subdivision boundary – heavy solid line approximately 1/16 inch wide with coincident blue boundary on reverse side 4. Each lot numbered 5. Each block numbered or lettered DRAFT 6. City-County boundaries shown and identified 7. Adjacent lot or block lines shown in dashed lines 8. Existing streets – names, widths, side lines shown as solid lines 9. Recorded maps identified by map name, number and with lots and blocks shown in “phantom letters” 10. Adjacent lot or block lines shown in dashed lines 11. Sections, ¼ sections, or portions thereof identified in “phantom letters” 12. Record bearings, distances and reference in parenthesis for: a. Latest record map in disagreement with survey b. Any deed data in disagreement with survey 13. Lines intersecting curves identified by bearing and whether (radial) or (not- radial) 14. Easements: a. Identified as to private or proposed, width and purpose b. Side lines shown as light dashed lines c. Recorded easements identified by document number and date of recordation 15. Previously vacated streets or easements shown as light dashed lines with recorded vacation data 16. Inundation/seismic lines shown and identified 17. Tree planting and maintenance easements shown on dedicated streets 18. Areas “Not A Part of Subdivision” clearly delineated 19. Lettered lots: a. Lots reserved for parks and open space b. Lots reserved for utility facilities 20. Abutter’s rights of access relinquished shown as required 21. Mathematical data: a. Traverses include exterior boundaries, each parcel and streets and easements b. All bearings, distances, radii, and deltas of traverses shown on map DRAFT c. Traverses close (1’ = 10,000 of perimeter) d. Sum of parts of any line or curve must equal total length e. Area calculations furnished, where required 22. All abbreviations used on map defined in Legend 23. Monumentation: a. Monuments per legend or fully described as to type, size, disc and engineer’s or surveyor’s number b. Labeled as “No Record” or referenced to record map c. If location not of record: “No Record – Accepted Hereon as (describe callout location)” d. Monuments tied into survey by bearing and distance, or “Used for Line Only.” No floating monuments. 24. Additional notes shown on map a. To clarify survey or explain discrepancies b. To reference non-recorded information such as City ties, road surveys, state highway maps, etc. 25. Map complies with: a. General Plan b. Zoning requirements c. Tentative Map d. All conditions imposed for tentative map approval 26. Separate deeds, easements: a. Prepared, signed and submitted b. Recording fees submitted c. Approved by City Council d. Recorded with County Recorder DRAFT SECTION III GRADING PLANS General All grading improvements shall be done in accordance with the City of Lake Elsinore Grading Ordinance No. 636, Ordinance No. 801, Ordinance No. 882, Ordinance No. 1271, and the standards outlined within this section of the Design Manual. Note: Grading Ordinances referenced Uniform Building Code (U.B.C.) which since have been replaced with the latest edition of the California Building Code (C.B.C.) and International Building Code (I.B.C.). Plans submitted for checking shall be complete sets and include all supporting documentation and calculations to enable a thorough review to be done. All plans and calculations shall be stamped and signed by a registered engineer. Incomplete submittals will be returned to the engineer unchecked. Documentation shall include all necessary easement documents; offsite letters of acceptance and copies of adjoining tract plans wherever necessary to ensure compatibility. Calculations shall include hydrology (existing and proposed) along with hydraulic calculation showing the adequacy of proposed drainage facilities to safely and effectively control runoff. A complete set of erosion control plans shall be submitted showing all necessary devices needed to control erosion of the graded site during construction. Plan Preparation In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of the plan, the following criteria shall apply to all plans submitted: 1. The maximum plan size shall be 24” x 36”, ink on mylar and minimum scale 1” = 40’. All lettering shall be 1/8” minimum. 2. Use County Benchmarks, give elevations, location, benchmark number and adjustment date. 3. Show property address. 4. Indicate the Tentative Tract or Parcel Map file numbers and Site Plan numbers. Indicate site address. Indicate purpose of grading in title block (e.g., rough, precise). 5. Show vicinity map or other data adequately indicating the site location. 6. Show name, address and telephone number of owner, design engineer (or architect), soils engineer and geologist. 7. Show key map indicating sheet coverage. 8. Show yardage of cut, fill, over excavation and backfill, export and import on plan. 9. Add “Engineer’s Notice” to title sheet. (Refer to Appendix) DRAFT 10. Show construction notes and quantities for on-site development. 11. Add “Soil Engineer’s Certificate” to title sheet. (Refer to Appendix) 12. A Registered Civil Engineer must sign each sheet of plans and indicate a state license number, prior to submittal. Unsigned plans will not be accepted for plan checking. 13. Show and label property lines of the property on which the work is to be performed. 14. Show North arrow, scale, legend and symbols. 15. Show precise location of all existing buildings, structures, trees, cesspools, septic tank and wells on the property where the work is to be performed. Also show the location of any buildings or structures on the land of adjacent property owners that are within fifteen (15) feet. 16. Indicate all existing and proposed easements for drainage devices, roadways and utilities. 17. Show accurate contours (minimum 5’ intervals) or spot elevations indicating the topography of the existing ground. Sufficient contours or spot elevations must be shown fifteen (15) feet minimum beyond the property line of the site being graded to indicate existing drainage patterns. 18. Show finish grades by contours and spot elevations indicating proposed drainage patterns and grading. Show finish grade elevations at corners of all structures, B.C., E.C., BVC, EVC and grade breaks. For precise grading plans, show pad and finished floor elevations. 19. Show daylight lines of all cuts and fills. Make them continuous and obvious. 20. Indicate where excess dirt (cut or import) is to be placed. 21. Provide berms at the tops of all slopes. Show detail (minimum 12 inches high and 4 feet wide). No sheet flow will be allowed over slopes greater than 5 to 1. 22. Show all applicable Standard Grading and Paving Notes on the plans. 23. Show building or structure setbacks as per approved site plan. 24. Provide complete hydrology and hydraulic report as required. Refer to Section IV for storm drainage requirements. 25. Show complete details of all drainage structures. 26. Show details of typical lot drainage. 27. Show location and complete details of de-silting basins. 28. Show top and toe of all cut and fill slopes. DRAFT 29. Show details of typical slope. 30. Show details of typical slope benching for fill placement. 31. Show sub-drainage systems on plans. 32. Indicate City Grading Permit Number on first sheet of grading plans. 33. Provide right of entry for any grading on adjacent properties. Permission must be in letter form signed and notarized by adjacent property owner. 34. Show quantity estimate of all items to be constructed per the grading plan and requiring inspection, i.e., drainage devices, retaining walls, etc. 35. All existing drainage courses on the project site must continue to function, especially during storm conditions. Protective measures and temporary drainage provisions must be used to protect adjoining properties during grading operations. 36. The WDID number will be shown in the bottom right corner of the title sheet and a copy of the letter shall be provided. 37. If storm drain system is required, those plans will be referenced and if necessary, the following note shall be added to the title sheet: “The storm drains shown hereon must be built concurrently with grading operations. The storm drain details are shown on the plans. The storm drains shown thereon should be considered as part of these plans.” 38. Pay particular attention to setback requirements as outlined in the C.B.C., Section J108. 39. Certificate of approval of the City of Lake Elsinore Engineer shall appear on all sheets in the following form: “These plans have been reviewed for compliance with the appropriate conditions of development and/or city and state laws, and a permit may be issued.” City Engineer RCE# Expiration Date Soil Report A soil engineering report shall be prepared for each grading project by a licensed soils engineer. The soil engineering report shall include data regarding the nature, distribution and strength of existing soils, conclusions and recommendations for grading procedures and design criteria for corrective measures when necessary, and opinions and recommendations covering adequacy of sites to be developed by the proposed grading. The report should include compaction recommendations regarding fills, base materials beneath DRAFT pavements, sidewalks, and in trenches. The report should also provide a recommendation of all the required pavement sections. Should the project require cast-in-place pipe, the report must address design issues associated with this type of pipe. DRAFT Design Criteria Drainage 1. Minimum gradients for residential sites: Dirt, grass, etc. ............................................................. 1.0% Fine graded residential lot – dirt ................................... 2.0% sheet flow away from building pad for minimum of three (3) feet Asphalt concrete .......................................................... 1.0% Concrete ...................................................................... 0.5% Concrete gutter in paved area ..................................... 1.0% Hillside single family residential subdivision rear yard .................................................... 2.0% Rough graded hillside lots............................................ 2.0% Terrace drains .............................................................. 6.0% Interceptor drains ......................................................... 2.0% 2. Minimum gradients for flat land industrial sites: Earth at rough grade stage .......................................... 0.5% Earth fine grade ........................................................... 1.0% Asphalt pavement (sheet flow) .................................... 1.0% Concrete drain in earth area ........................................ 0.5% Concrete gutter in paved area ..................................... 0.5% Maximum gradient for sheet flow ................................. 20.0% Maximum gradient for concentrated water on developed lots ............................................... 4.0% 3. Design to carry water to nearest practical street, storm drain or natural watercourse. Concentrated flows will not be allowed over curbs. 4. All concentrated flows shall be contained within a concrete drainage device. 5. Provide velocity reducers at storm drain outlets. (Refer to City Standard Plan No. 305 for Rip Rap Energy Dissipater.) 6. Provide cut-off walls at inlet end of paved drains. DRAFT 7. Design and show locations of interceptor drains. 8. Drainage shall not flow over the top edge of any slope. 9. For residential lots, swales shall be three (3) feet minimum horizontal distance from pad. 10. Drainage of reciprocal side yard lots shall not cross over fence lines. Slopes Provide setbacks outlined in Grading Code and shown on approved site plan. Note permit area boundary and C.B.C. setbacks. Cut and fill slopes to be no greater than 2 horizontal and 1 vertical. Drainage shall be directed away from the faces of cut and fill slopes or into approved drainage structures. The faces of cut and fill slopes shall also be manufactured to control against erosion. This control may consist of stepping or other surface protection, as approved by the City Engineer. The protection for the slopes shall be installed within fifteen (15) days after completion of the rough grading. Provide terrace drains and down drains for cut and fill slopes as outlined in the Grading Code. Drains shall be constructed of three (3) inch minimum thickness concrete reinforced with 6” x 6” #10 welded wire mesh (W.W.M) or approved equal. The surface of all cut slopes more than seven (7) feet in height, except those cut slopes adequately stabilized from erosion by stepping or other physical surface protection per item (2) above, and fill slopes more than three (3) feet in height shall be permanently protected against damage by erosion by planting with grass or ground-cover plants. It is required to install such vegetation upon completion of the rough grading in conjunction with the installation of temporary soil stabilization measures as specified above. Final approval of work shall be made after growth is established on the slopes. Slopes exceeding fifteen (15) feet in vertical height shall (as a minimum), also be planted with a seed and/or young plant mix containing grass, ground-cover plants, shrubs and/or trees that permanently protects the slope from erosion. Native and other plants selected, and planting methods used shall be suitable for the soil and climatic conditions of the site. Rationale for determination of seeding or planting rates and density and species selection shall be provided. Slopes required to be planted shall be provided with an approved system of irrigation, designed to cover all portions of the slope, and plans therefore shall be submitted and approved prior to installation. A functional test of the system shall be required. All irrigation systems where required shall be designed on an individual lot basis unless commonly maintained in an approved manner. Recommendations in the soils report and the City Grading Ordinance shall be incorporated into the design of any slope. The following standard “Grading Notes” (as applicable) shall be placed on the plans: GRADING NOTES 1. All work shall be done in accordance with the City of Lake Elsinore Municipal Code, Chapter 15.72 and applicable standards and specifications and the latest edition of the California Building Code (C.B.C.), Section J108. DRAFT 2. A permit shall be obtained from the Engineering Department, City of Lake Elsinore, prior to any operations. 3. The developer and/or the contractor shall notify all utility companies and U.S.A. ALERT (1-800-422-4133) forty-eight (48) hours prior to grading. 4. The contractor shall notify the City Engineering Department at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of beginning grading operations. 5. Dust shall be controlled by watering or other methods approved by the City Engineer. 6. Cut slopes shall be no steeper than 2 horizontal to 1 vertical, unless otherwise approved, and shall be shown on the plan. 7. Fill slopes shall be no steeper than 2 horizontal to 1 vertical, unless otherwise approved, shall be shown on plan, and shall not have less than 90% relative compaction out to the finished surface. 8. Fills shall be compacted throughout to 90% density as determined by the modified three (3) layer A.S.T.M. D-1557-70 test method. 9. Fill areas shall be cleaned of all vegetation and debris, scarified, and inspected by the grading inspector and approved soils testing agency prior to the placing of fill. 10. All fill material shall be clean earth. No fill shall be placed until preparation of ground is approved by the soils engineer. 11. Finish grade shall be sloped away from all exterior walls at not less than ½” per foot for a minimum of three (3) feet, then 1% (minimum) to flow line of earth swale. 12. Minimum building pad and drainage swale slope shall be 1% if cut or fill slope is less than ten feet (10’), and 2% if cut or fill is greater than ten feet (10’). Drainage swales shall be a minimum of 0.5’ deep and constructed a minimum of two feet (2’) from the top of cut or fill slopes. 13. Provide 4’ wide by 1’ high berm or equivalent along the top of all fill slopes over 5’ high 14. Provide a brow ditch, designed to handle one hundred (100) year storm flows along the top of cut slopes. 15. No obstruction of flood plains or natural water courses shall be permitted. 16. A soils engineer shall be retained by the developer, to supervise grading and provide a final soils report which includes foundation requirements (subdivisions) and expansive characteristics of the soil. 17. Grading certification by the developer’s civil engineer and a final DRAFT compaction report by a soils engineer shall be submitted to the building and engineering departments prior to issuance of building permits. 18. The soils engineering investigation dated ____________ prepared by (engineer consultant) and the engineering geologic investigation dated ____________ prepared by (geologic consultant), shall be considered a part of this grading plan and shall be complied with. 19. A registered civil engineer or licensed land surveyor shall submit certification of building pad elevation. Where specific elevations are required, the elevation (with respect to mean sea level) shall be given. If an elevation with respect to adjacent ground surface is required, the actual distance above the adjacent ground shall be given. 20. All property corners shall be clearly delineated in the field prior to commencement of any construction/grading. 21. Stability calculations with a safety factor of at least 1.5 shall be submitted by a soils engineer to the Building and Engineering Departments for cut and fill slopes over thirty feet (30’) in vertical height. 22. A final compaction report will be required for all fills greater than one (1) foot. 23. If steep sloping terrain occurs upon which fill is to be placed, it must be cleared, keyed and benched into firm natural soil for full support. Preparation shall be approved by a registered soils engineer prior to placement of fill material. Slopes greater than 5:1 are required to be keyed and benched. 24. The soils engineer should inspect the construction in the following stages: a. Upon completion of clearing and during excavation and before backfill of alluvial, colluvial and terraced areas and any substructures. b. During all rough grading and operations including pre-compaction, benching and filling operations. c. During installation of buttress and canyon sub-drains and filter material. d. When any unusual grading conditions are encountered during construction. 25. Erosion Control: All graded slopes equal to or greater than 3 feet in vertical height shall be planted with rosea ice plant or another approved drought tolerant ground cover, at twelve inches (12”) on center. Slopes over fifteen feet (15’) in vertical height, in addition to ground cover, shall be planted with approved trees, shrubs or combination thereof. Shrubs shall be planted at ten feet (10’) on center; trees at twenty feet (20’) on center; combinations, fifteen feet (15’) on center. Slopes over three feet (3’) in vertical height shall have permanent irrigation systems with backflow prevention devices per C.B.C. DRAFT 26. Approved protective measures and temporary drainage provisions must be used to protect adjoining properties during the grading project. 27. Approved erosion preventive devices shall be provided and maintained during the rainy season and shall be in place at the end of each day’s work. 28. All work shall conform to the City and State construction safety orders. 29. The location and protection of all utilities is the responsibility of the permittee. 30. An approved set of grading plans shall be on the job site at all time. 31. Sanitary facilities shall be maintained on the site from beginning to completion of grading operation. 32. All slopes shall be planted, and irrigation facilities shall be provided for all slopes in excess of three (3) feet vertical height within ninety (90) days after completion of rough grading and shall be in accordance with City of Lake Elsinore Grading Ordinance No. 882 prior to the approval of final inspection. 33. Any contractor performing work on this project shall familiarize himself with the site and be solely responsible for any damage to existing facilities resulting directly or indirectly from his operations, whether or not such facilities are shown on these plans. 34. The design engineer shall provide a minimum of one (1) blue top per finished pad, prior to rough grade approval. 35. Approximate date of: Beginning operation: Completion: 36. No rock or other irreducible material with a maximum dimension greater than three inches (3”) will be placed in fills within roadbed areas or three feet (3’) of finish grades, unless the location, materials, and disposal methods are specifically approved by the soils engineer. 37. The engineer must set grade stakes for all drainage devices and obtain inspection before approval. 38. Grading plans will not be approved until all retaining walls are approved by the Building Department. 39. This site has obtained a National Pollution Prevention Elimination System (NPDES) permit to regulate municipal and industrial storm water discharges. NPDES WDID # DATE PERMIT ISSUED: 40. Drainage easements will be kept clear of all obstructions. No buildings or DRAFT walls shall be placed within easement limits. Temporary improvements are subject to removal at the owner’s expense. DRAFT Erosion Control Notes All erosion control plans shall be in accordance with City of Lake Elsinore Ordinance Nos.1237, 772, 529, 1004, construction site Best Management Practices (BMP’s) and standards outlined within the Lake Elsinore Design Manual. No grading permit shall be issued without an erosion control plan approved by the City Engineer. The erosion control plan shall include details of protective measures, including desilting basins or other temporary drainage or control measures, or both, as may be necessary to protect the water quality of receiving water bodies or to protect adjoining public and private property from damage from erosion, flooding or the deposition of mud or debris which may originate from the site or result from such grading operations. . The following Erosion Control and NPDES notes as worded with blanks filled in, shall be placed on the plans: 1. All erosion control plans shall be in accordance with City of Lake Elsinore Ordinance Nos. 529, 772, 1237, 1004, construction site Best Management Practices (BMP’s), and standards outlined within the Lake Elsinore Design Manual. 2. The developer/contractor is responsible for any discharges by subcontractors. 3. In case of emergency, call (responsible person) at (24-hour phone number). 4. Devices to reduce erosion damage shall not be placed, moved or modified without the approval of the Qualified SWPPP Developer, City Engineer, or in an emergency, by the person responsible for grading operations. 5. Areas that are cleared and graded shall be limited to only the portion of the site that is necessary for construction. The construction site shall be managed to minimize the exposure time of disturbed soil areas through phasing and scheduling of grading and the use of temporary and permanent soil stabilization. 6. Once disturbed, graded slopes exceeding a 3:1 ratio and/or ten (10) feet in height (temporary or permanent) shall be stabilized if they will not be worked within 7 days. During the storm season, all slopes shall be stabilized 24 hours prior to a predicted storm event. Construction sites shall be revegetated as early as feasible after soil disturbance and within 7-days of completion. 7. Fill slopes at the tract perimeter must drain away from the top of the slope at the conclusion of each working day. 8. The contractor shall be responsible and have signs posted on the site to warn against public trespassing into areas where water is impounded. 9. Dust shall be controlled by watering or other methods approved by the City Engineer. 10. Placement of devices to reduce erosion damage within the development shall be shown on the approved plan. DRAFT 11. Desilting facilities at all drainage inlets for the graded site shall be designed for a twenty-five (25) year, six (6) hour storm intensity. They must be detailed on the plans. Design and specific recommendations shall be submitted for the following: a. Desilting basin volume based on gradient and nature of soils. b. The extent of all graded areas and identification of any temporary soil stabilization measures. c. Size of desilting basin outlet pipe and overflow. d. Dike requirements. Show minimum wall width, slope of walls, percent compaction, etc. e. Outlet conditions from the desilting basin shall not exceed downstream limitations, with the exception of overflow, which is to be designed to provide capacity of 1.5 times the maximum design flow. 12. Necessary materials shall be available on-site and at convenient locations to facilitate rapid construction of temporary devices or to repair any damaged erosion control measures when a 50% chance or greater of rain within a 48-hour period is forecast for Lake Elsinore by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Agency (NOAA). 13. BMPs shall be maintained and inspected daily to minimize and/or prevent the entrainment of soil in runoff from disturbed soil areas on Construction Sites. All removable protective erosion control devices shown shall be in place at the end of each working day when the four (4) day rain probability forecast exceeds forty percent (40%). 14. After a rainstorm, all project generated silt and debris shall be removed from check berms, onsite public drains and pipes, drains and pipes of adjacent properties and desilting basins and the basins pumped dry. Any graded slope BMP’s damaged during a rainstorm shall also be immediately repaired. Failure to provide effective maintenance may result in penalties. 15. Discharging of contaminated soil via surface erosion is prohibited. 16. Construction access points shall be stabilized with a combination of rock and shaker plates year-round to prevent track-out. Routine street sweeping shall be performed on all paved streets where tracking is observed. Vacuum sweepers shall be used when street sweeping becomes ineffective. NPDES / Storm Water Pollution Notes 1. For projects that require coverage under the General Construction Permit, the property owner is responsible for ensuring that a Qualified SWPPP Practitioner (QSP) and Qualified SWPPP Developer (QSD) implement and maintain the SWPPP-approved, pre-qualified BMP’s from the California Storm water Quality Association (CASQA) handbook / website for construction to retain sediments and pollutants of concern from areas disturbed onsite to the maximum extent practicable during ANY phase of DRAFT construction operations. For all other projects, the property owner is responsible for ensuring that BMPs for construction are implemented to retain sediments and pollutants of concern from areas disturbed onsite to the maximum extent practicable. The erosion control measures include those shown on this plan as well as any additional erosion control measures dictated by field conditions to prevent erosion and/or the introduction of pollutants into existing public streets and/or onto adjacent properties during ANY phase of construction. 2. For projects that require coverage under the General Construction Permit, the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) shall be kept on-site and made available upon request of a representative of the Regional Water Quality Control Board (RWQCB) - Santa Ana Region and/or the City of Lake Elsinore. 3. Construction sites shall be maintained in such a condition that an anticipated storm does not carry wastes or pollutants off the site. Discharges of material other than storm water (non-storm water) are prohibited except as authorized by an individual NPDES permit under the statewide General Permit – Construction Activity. 4. Potential pollutants include but are not limited to: solid or liquid chemical spills; wastes from paints, stains, sealants, solvents, detergents, glues, lime, pesticides, herbicides, fertilizers, wood preservatives, and asbestos fibers, paint flakes or stucco fragments; fuels, oils lubricants, and hydraulic, radiator or battery fluids; concrete and related cutting or curing residues; floatable wastes; wastes from engine/equipment steam cleaning or chemical degreasing; wastes from street cleaning; and super- chlorinated potable water from line flushing and testing. During construction, disposal of such materials should occur in a specified and controlled temporary area on-site physically separated from potential storm water runoff, with ultimate disposal in accordance with local, state and federal requirements. 5. Runoff from equipment and vehicle washing shall be contained at construction site and must not be discharged to receiving waters or the local storm drain system. 6. Appropriate BMPs for construction-related materials, wastes, spills or residues shall be implemented to eliminate or reduce transport from the site to streets, drainage facilities, or adjoining properties by wind or runoff. 7. Material storage and staging areas shall be established. Fuel tank, portable toilets, liquids, gels and powders shall have secondary containment and be stored away from all private / public storm water conveyance systems, sidewalks, rights-of-ways and flow lines. 8. All portable mixers shall have plastic liners underneath with gravel bags placed on the down-hill side of the liners to contain discharges. 9. Controlled street washing will only be allowed prior to the application of asphalt seal coats and only when all pertinent drainage inlets are protected. DRAFT 10. All construction contractors and subcontractor personnel are to be made aware of the required BMPs and good housekeeping measures for the project site and any associated construction staging areas. 11. Discharging contaminated groundwater produced by dewatering groundwater that has infiltrated into the construction site is prohibited. Discharging non- contaminated groundwater produced by dewatering activities may require a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit from the Regional Water Quality Control Board. 12. Storm water runoff shall not be directed over any slopes without permanent down drains installed. Erosion and sediment controls including maintenance are required on all exposed slopes until sufficient permanent landscaping has been established. 100% slope protection must be in place prior to the issuance of the final certificate of occupancy. 13. Vegetation clearing and brushing activities shall not be initiated during the wet season on any sites which are not adequately protected with desilting basins or other temporary drainage or control measures. 14. Stockpiles of soil shall be properly secured with BMPs to eliminate or reduce sediment transport from the site to streets, drainage facilities or adjacent properties. 15. Stockpiles of soil shall be properly contained to eliminate or reduce sediment transport from the site to streets, drainage facilities or adjacent properties via runoff, vehicle tracking or wind. Inactive for a period of 14 days or more shall be covered; active stockpiles shall be covered prior to a forecasted rain. 16. For project requiring coverage under the Construction General Permit, special attention shall be given to preparation and installation of the Rain Event Action Plan (REAP) as required based on site Risk Level or as mandated by the Santa Ana Regional Board NPDES Permit, General Permit – Construction Activities. 17. At the end of each day of construction activity, all construction debris and waste materials shall be collected and properly disposed of in covered trash or covered recycle bins. 18. This site has obtained a National Pollution Prevention Elimination System (NPDES) permit to regulate municipal and industrial storm water discharges. NPDES WDID # ___________________ DATE WDID ISSUED: 19. The undersigned civil engineer, a qualified QSP and/or QSD will review placement of erosion control and insure that work is in accordance with the approved plans. _________________________________________________________ (Signature) (RCE No.) (Exp) (Date) DRAFT DRAFT TYPICAL SANDBAG DETAILS DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT TABLE A SPACING OF ROWS OF SANDBAGS Slope of Street Paved Street Unpaved Street 10% or more 25 ft 25 ft 3 courses 18 in. high min. 9.9% to 8% 50 ft 35 ft 3 courses 18 in. high min. 7.9% to 6% 75 ft 50 ft 1 ft high min. 5.9% to 4% 100 ft 74 ft 1 ft high min. 3.9% or less 100 ft 100 ft 1 ft high min. DRAFT DEBRIS BASIN DETAIL DRAFT DRAFT DEBRIS BASIN RISER DETAIL DRAFT DRAFT Checklist for Grading Plans A. GENERAL 1. Fees 2. Blue line prints submitted 3. Supporting data/calculations submitted a. Soils report(s) b. Drainage calculations c. Structural calculations d. Geology report(s), if applicable e. Seismic report(s), if applicable f. Landscape plan g. Irrigation plan h. Application for Land Development Permit i. Letters of permission/easements j. Engineer’s estimate 4. Drafting requirements (each sheet): a. Prepare on 24” x 36” mylar sheets b. Sheet format – See Sheet A-1 of Appendix c. Drawn with black waterproof drawing ink d. All lettering to be a minimum of 1/8” in height e. Sheets numbered consecutively with total number of sheets indicated f. Civil engineer’s signature and registration number on each sheet g. Title block on each sheet to contain: 1) Title: Grading Plan 2) Designation of subdivision, if applicable 3) Location or extent of grading h. Benchmark description DRAFT B. COVER SHEET 1. Vicinity map with north arrow and scale indicated 2. Key map a. North arrow b. Scale: 1” = 200’ c. Shows general plan of subdivision with subdivision boundary, streets and lots identified d. Show each adjacent subdivisions and connecting streets e. Show each sheet coverage f. Legend identifies all symbols used g. Drainage facilities h. Direction of drainage flow 3. Work to be done (general notes, notification notes, grading/landscaping notes) and Soils Engineer’s Certificate 4. Street cross-sections: a. Each street represented b. Dimensions – right-of-way, sidewalks, medians, easements, etc. c. Rough grade line shown with width and depth of grading d. Side slopes (2:1 minimum cut, 2:1 minimum fill) 5. Legend identifies all symbols used 6. Details shown as necessary 7. Approvals by other agencies, as applicable a. WDID number b. SWPPP reference 8. Amounts of excavation, fill, cut, waste, import in cubic yards. 9. Show typical lot drainage. (Precise Grading Only.) 10. Certification of approval of the City of Lake Elsinore Engineer, shall appear on all sheets in the following form: DRAFT “These plans have been reviewed for compliance with the appropriate conditions of development and/or City and State laws, and a permit can be issued.” ___________________________________________ City Engineer RCE # Expiration Date C. GRADING SHEETS 1. Boundary lines shown: a. City-County boundaries b. Subdivision boundaries c. Right-of-way lines d. Lot lines dimensioned e. Lot lines of adjacent properties f. Utility easements g. Tree planting and maintenance easements 2. Contours (extend at least fifty feet (50’) beyond limits of grading) a. Existing contours shown b. Finish grade contours shown 3. Lots a. Numbered b. Building pads shown with pad elevations c. Parking areas shown d. Sufficient elevations flagged to show slope of lots and portions of lots e. Driveway slopes (precise grade) f. Centerline station and width of driveway 4. Grading a. Slopes: 1) Cut slopes – 2:1 maximum DRAFT 2) Fill slopes – 2:1 maximum (shaded) 3) Slope ratios shown 4) Daylight line(s) shown 5) Off-site grading shown with reference to authority (letters of permission, etc.) b. Setbacks (per C.B.C. requirements) 5. Drainage: a. Existing drainage facilities shown b. Future drainage facilities (not a part of grading) c. Drainage facilities to be built with grading plans, show: 1) Location 2) Type, size, gauge (strength) 3) Details as necessary 4) Elevations, grades, direction of flow 5) Easements 6) Streets, show: A) Names and dimensions B) Direction of street drainage C) Percent of slope D) Elevations at intersections 6. Typical Sections a. Brow ditches b. Berms or swale at top of slopes c. Terrace drains when H>30’ should be 6’ wide and 5% minimum slope 7. Storm Drains a. Show size and locations of all pipes and inlets. b. Reference plan set (if not part of grading plans) where storm drain information can be found. Refer to Plan Preparation note 37 in this section. DRAFT D. LANDSCAPE/SLOPE PLANTING AND IRRIGATION PLANS 1. Landscaping plans a. Prepared by State licensed landscape architect or professional landscape designer b. Show location, size and quantities of all plantings c. Give botanical and common names d. Specific soil amendments and fertilizer requirements per 1,000 s.f. e. Type, amount and spacing of living ground cover f. Tree staking details: 1) 2 redwood stakes (2” x 2” x 8’) per tree 2) 3 ties per tree g. Tree planting details: 1) Tree hold to be two (2) times the diameter of container 2) Backfill one (1) part soil amendment to two (2) parts existing soil 3) Tree planted 1”-2” higher in ground than in container 4) Bands around all trees and shrubs 5) Fifteen (15) gallon (minimum) trees in parkways 6) Five (5) gallon (minimum) shrubs adjacent to streets 2. Irrigation plans to include: a. Meter location b. Points of connection c. Size and type of atmospheric vacuum breaker (6” above highest irrigation line) d. Size and location of valves e. Location of automatic control station, if applicable f. Irrigation lines: 1) Size, location, type of pipe 2) Pressure line under AC pavement: PVC schedule: 40 or equal 3) Minimum pressure line depth = 18” DRAFT 4) Minimum irrigation line depth = 12” 5) Static water pressure indicated 6) Irrigation heads identified by type, manufacturer, model, psi, gpm DRAFT SECTION IV IMPROVEMENT PLANS General All improvements are to be constructed in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, special provisions and the appropriate standard plan or other approved agency standard drawings. Each sheet of the improvement plans submitted for approval shall be signed and sealed by a Registered Civil Engineer. Plans submitted for checking shall be complete in all phases of design. Incomplete plans will not be accepted for checking purposes. Any named travel way shall be a street. If developers desire a street to have a name, it must be constructed to City standards. Private streets are discouraged and will only be allowed when approved in advance by the Planning Commission and the City Engineer. Private streets shall be constructed to City standards for private streets. Sewer Improvements All sewer lines within the City of Lake Elsinore are the responsibility of the Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District and all plans should be consistent with their standards and specifications. All sewer improvements shall be submitted through the Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District for plan check and approval. Plans should be approved by the City Engineer prior to issuance of encroachment permit. Water Improvements All water lines within the City of Lake Elsinore are the responsibility of either the Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District or the Elsinore Water District and all plans should be consistent with their standards and specifications. All water improvements shall be submitted through the District providing service to the proposed site for plan check and approval. Plans shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to issuance of encroachment permit. DRAFT Plan Preparation In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of plans, the following criteria shall apply to all plans submitted. A. All sheets must be mylar, 24” x 36” overall size, with a ½” margin on all sides except that the left margin to be 1-1/2”. Pre-printed sheets are available through local blueprint companies. B. All sheets must be numbered consecutively, “Sheet of ,” in the lower right corner. C. All plans shall be drawn to a scale of 1” = 40’ or 1” = 20’. D. All lettering shall be 1/8 inch minimum. E. North arrows shall point to the top or left of the sheet, if possible. F. All stationing shall refer to the centerline of the street unless otherwise indicated on the plan and shall read from left to right, and shall increase from south to north or west to east. No negative stationing will be allowed. 1. Right end of one sheet joins the left end of the next. 2. Stationing has preference over north arrow. 3. All streets shall have continuous stationing. Title Sheet – The first sheet shall be a Title Sheet and include: A. Location map showing the following: 1. Project location 2. Major cross streets 3. City limit lines if contiguous to tract 4. North arrow 5. Scale B. Index map showing the following: 1. Street configuration within tract 2. Lot configurations 3. Tract boundaries 4. Street names 5. Index of sheets DRAFT 6. City limit lines, if contiguous to tract 7. North arrow 8. Scale 9. Street lights 10. Sewer, water and storm drain improvements (existing and proposed) C. Basis of bearings – shall be the same as the tract map. D. Benchmark – number description, date (year of adjustment), and elevation to three (3) decimal places. E. Engineering firm name, address, telephone number, date of plan preparation, signature and number of Registered Civil Engineer. F. Title block containing tract number and tentative tract number, if applicable; street name and limits of improvements. G. Certification of approval of the City of Lake Elsinore Engineer shall appear on all sheets in the following form: “These plans have been reviewed for compliance with the appropriate conditions of development and/or City and State laws, and a permit can be issued.” City Engineer RCE # Expiration Date H. Developer name, address and telephone number. I. Soils Engineer or Engineering Geologist name, address, telephone number, and date of report. J. Acceptance block for signature and date for all other agencies, as necessary. K. Revision block with revision number, date, initials of design engineer, description of plan change, and spaces for City approval and date. L. Plan legend and symbols. M. The following standard “General Notes” shall be placed on the plans: GENERAL NOTES 1. Note to Contractors: The existence and location of any underground utility pipes or structures shown on these plans were obtained by a search of available records. Approval of these plans by the City of Lake Elsinore does not constitute a representation as to the accuracy DRAFT or completeness of the location, nor the existence or non-existence of any underground utility, pipe or structure within the limits of the project. The Contractor is required to take all due precautionary measures for the protection of all utilities, pipes or structures, whether shown on these plans or not. Any utility(ies) damaged during the performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the governing agency by the Contractor, at his expense. 2. All work shall conform to City Codes, Standard Specifications for Public Works (Latest Edition), and Standard Drawing of the City of Lake Elsinore. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to be familiar with these standards and codes at all times. 3. The Contractor shall notify the City Engineering Inspector, forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning any work. Call for inspection at (951) 674- 3124, between the hours of 9:00 am and 4:00 pm, Monday through Thursday. 4. Contractor shall maintain traffic control in accordance with Caltrans Traffic Manual and Watch Manual at all times during construction, as approved by the City Engineer or his representative. Failure to do so shall require immediate work stoppage. 5. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to have a dependable representative at the job site, at all times during construction. 6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange for the necessary relocation of any utilities. The contractor shall notify all utility companies involved at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work. The Contractor shall also contact Underground Service Alert (U.S.A.) at 1-800- 422-4133, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work. 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for the clearing of the proposed work area and relocation and cost of all existing utilities. Subdivider must inform the City of Lake Elsinore of construction schedule, prior to beginning construction. 8. All underground facilities and laterals including but not limited to sewer, water, telephone, electricity, gas and drainage facilities, shall be in place prior to paving the street section. 9. All street sections are tentative. Additional soil tests will be taken after rough grading, to determine the exact section required. Section thick- nesses shown are for bonding purposes only. 10. All existing underground utilities and structures must be potholed, and elevations verified prior to construction. The engineer of record shall be notified of any necessary revisions to the approved plans. The revisions shall be in the form of “AS BUILT” plans submitted to the City Engineer for approval prior to the final acceptance of the project. 11. All existing monumentation disturbed or destroyed during construction DRAFT shall be replaced to City standards, as approved by the City Engineer. Centerline ties are to be furnished to the City Engineer upon completion of the project and before acceptance is granted. 12. An Encroachment Permit shall be required for all construction work done within Public Rights-of-way. Before issuance of said permit, the Contractor/Developer must provide the City Engineer with Certificate of Insurance and required bonding for public improvements. The encroachment permit must be present at the job site during the total time of the project construction along with an approved set of improvement plans. 13. If an Encroachment Permit is required through the District No. 8 office of Caltrans, please make reference to this fact in the “General Notes” section of the improvement plans. Detail Sheet – The second sheet shall be the detail sheet and shall include: A. Typical sections showing: 1. Each geometric street variation. A minimum street section is 4” AC over 6” AB. 2. Existing pavement to be joined or removed. 3. Paving, curb and gutter to be constructed, and details which join to existing pavement. 4. All necessary geometric dimensions including but not limited to: a. Sidewalk width and location. b. Centerline to curb face, including pavement crossfall. c. Centerline to right-of-way. d. Level line relationship between centerline (crown) and top of curb with vertical dimension B. Interim conditions 1. Structural section: thickness dimensions should be omitted until recommendations of the soils report are approved. 2. References to appropriate agency standard drawings. C. Overall construction notes. D. Construction details not included in approved agency standard drawings. E. Sheet title block including items (E), (F), and (G) as listed on page 60. Plan and Profile Sheets DRAFT A. Profile shall be the top half of the sheet and include: 1. Centerline profile. 2. Existing ground profiles at centerline and right-of-way. 3. Top of curb profiles including elevations at ¼ deltas for curb return construction. 4. All rates of grade. Negative grades shall be indicated. 5. Elevation at grade breaks, at street intersections, and as necessary to provide vertical control. 6. Stationing, increasing from left to right. 7. Scale (horizontal and vertical). 8. Vertical curve data including tangent rates of grade, length of vertical curve, P.I.V.C. elevation, stations and elevations at maximum intervals of 25 feet and at points of control. 9. Identification of all storm drain lines. 10. Sewer profile. 11. All utility line crossings and sub-structures which could interfere with road or other underground construction. B. Plan view shall include: 1. North arrow and scale. 2. Existing improvements shown dashed. 3. Improvements to be constructed, including all joins. 4. Street names. 5. Centerline stationing at all intersections. 6. Stationing shall match stationing established by earlier plans. 7. Stationing shall be marked on all construction centerlines and aligned with profile. 8. Centerline bearings and distances for all streets. 9. All proposed and existing utilities. 10. Tract number, boundary and lot lines for each adjacent parcel. 11. Applicable construction notes on each sheet. 12. Match lines clearly shown and referenced. DRAFT 13. Curve data for all curves. 14. Identification of all storm drain lines. DRAFT Street Design Criteria 1. General The guidelines, criteria, and standards listed in Table B should be considered to be the minimum design standards for street improvements. Minimum horizontal curves are per Caltrans sight distance requirements. a. Vertical curve design requirements are: 1) Wherever the grade break exceeds 0.5% 2) Vertical curves shall have the following minimum lengths i. Local Street – 50 feet ii. Collectors – 100 feet iii. Major Arterials – 200 feet Exceptions can be considered if dictated by adverse topographic or environmental conditions. Exceptions shall be approved by the City Engineer. 2. Miscellaneous Design Criteria a. When a raised median with landscaping is required, the design will indicate all proposed median openings and turning pockets and shall also be approved by the Traffic Engineer. b. General criteria for lengths of left turn pockets: 1) Estimate the peak hour left turn movements. 2) Design pockets shall provide for a minimum of twenty feet (20’) length for each car desiring to turn left during peak hour or the minimum length shall be three hundred feet (300’) for major or urban arterial roads, two hundred fifty feet (250’) of secondary or collector streets, and one hundred fifty feet (150’) for all local streets. 3) If left turn movements are unknown or cannot be accurately predicted, the following guidelines may be used: (1) Pocket lengths should be increased if there is known to be greater than “average” truck traffic; (2) Turning volumes exceeding fifteen (15) cars per cycle should be accommodated by multiple left turn lanes; (3) Physical obstructions in the roadway should be designated with turning radius to accommodate larger vehicles. 4) Pavement widening and tapers will be required as determined by the Traffic Engineer. These may occur when the tract development does not require ultimate improvements to an adjacent arterial, but the traffic generated by the tract could cause significant congestion on the arterial. In these cases, pavement widening may be required for acceleration or deceleration or for left turn lanes. DRAFT For narrowing the travel lanes, the minimum transition rate should be 40 to 1. For widening the pavement, the transition should be approximately 10 to 1. Any proposed pavement widening and tapers should be reviewed by the Traffic Engineer. c. Permanent barricades will be used whenever a street dead ends without a cul-de-sac. 3. General criteria for the location of access points. a. Refer to Intersection Intervals of City Standard Plan No. 100A of Roadway Design Requirements. b. The tentative map review should show all existing and proposed access within the tract limits and in some cases an area access plan may be required by the Traffic Engineer. c. Access points should be selected at points with the best possible sight distance and all access points shall provide adequate sight distance. d. If it is determined that a signal will be necessary to service the development, the location to be signalized shall be at least ¼ mile from adjacent signals. The Traffic Engineer should review and approve the signal location. e. Adjacent intersections along the same arterial shall be spaced sufficiently apart to provide for left turn pockets for both streets. This usually requires a minimum of 660 feet. f. Extreme care is needed in locating driveways to avoid possible left turn conflicts where no raised medians exist. g. Adjacent intersections along the arterial, but on opposite sides and offset in a direction in which left turns will not be in conflict, should be avoided. h. Standard cul-de-sacs are required for all permanent dead-end streets and may be required for temporary dead-end streets if future development seems remote. The maximum lengths of cul-de-sacs shall not exceed 660 feet. i. Private Streets. 1) Definition: (a) Private streets are those streets which are privately owned and maintained and are not offered for dedication to the City. They are allowed only if adequate justification is provided. (b) Design standards for private streets are considered to be the same as public streets regarding volume capacities and geometric design features and shall be designed to the same criteria. The absence of such standards will prohibit future dedication to the City for ownership or maintenance. j. Driveways. 1) Driveways which exceed centerline measurement of thirty feet (30’) in length measured from the location of the face of curb, shall be provided ahead of each DRAFT garage, a parking space shall extend a minimum of twenty feet (20’) out from the face of the garage and shall be at least the width for the garage opening with a minimum of ten feet (10’), shall have longitudinal and transverse slope gradients not exceeding plus or minus five percent (5% +/-) and shall be designed to prevent surface waters from draining into garage. 2) Driveways which do not exceed thirty feet (30’) in length measured along the centerline shall have a maximum gradient of eight percent (8%) for the portion of the driveway located within twenty feet (20’) of the garage entrance; 3) Maximum longitudinal driveway gradients shall be fifteen percent (15%); minimum crown or cross slope shall be one percent (1%); and maximum crown or cross slope shall be five percent (5%). 4) Vertical transitions shall prevent contact of any portion of the car with surface of driveway by use of the following criteria: (a) Vertical transition shall be made with not less than four feet parabolic curve. (b) When the driveway exceeds ten percent (10%), the vertical transition shall be an eight foot (8’) parabolic curve. DRAFT TABLE B CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STREET DESIGN CRITERIA Design Criteria Urban Arterial Major Arterial Secondary Arterial Collector Streets Estimated Ultimate ADT 50,000 – 60,000 32,000 – 42,000 20,000 – 32,000 10,000 – 15,000 Design Speed ** 65 mph 60 mph 55 mph 45 mph Right-of-Way *120 ft *100 ft 90 ft 68 ft Curb-to-Curb Distance * 96 ft 14 ft median (raised) * 80 ft 14 ft median (raised) 70 ft 14 ft median 48 ft Minimum Traffic Index 10 10 10 7-9 Minimum Structural Section (inches) 6 AC 12 AB 6 AC 12 AB 6 AC 12 AB 4 AC 6 AB Stopping Sight Distance** 660 ft 580 ft 500 ft 360 ft Corner Sight Distance** 715 ft 660 ft 605 ft 495 ft Minimum Horizontal Radius** 2000 ft 2000 ft 1600 ft 850 ft Maximum Grade 9% 9% 9% 12% Minimum Grade 1.0% 1.0% 1.0% 1.0% Minimum Tangent between reversing curves 300 ft 220 ft 200 ft 160 ft * where double left turn lanes are required, an additional ten feet (10’) of right-of-way and roadway width will be required. ** flat terrain DRAFT FUNCTIONAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT Storm Drainage Drainage design requirements shall be in accordance with the Riverside County Hydrology Manual, the Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District Design Manual and Standard Drawings, and this Design Manual. All hydrologic and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted along with proper documentation as noted. All storm drains greater than 36" shall be reviewed for acceptance and maintenance by Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District. Contact them for more information on the process. Although the storm drainage improvements are typically included with the street improvement plan submittal, it is often necessary to construct the drainage improvement plans concurrently with the grading. In such a case, hydrology, hydraulics and the storm drainage improvement plans will be submitted along with the grading plans for review. Hydrology Criteria utilized for the hydrology study shall be as stated in the Hydrology Manual published by the Riverside County Flood Control District, current edition. Frequency of design shall be as stated in the Hydrology Manual or as specified by the Engineering Department. The hydrology map, grading improvement plans, and improvement plans shall agree as to the grades, drainage areas, and other information found on those plans. 1. Hydrology Map a. The hydrology map shall be on a topographic map of sufficient scale to show drainage patterns and quantities of runoff. b. The site must be shown on the hydrology map including on-site and off-site topography to the entire tributary drainage area. c. Show all Q’s (with the time of concentration) flowing in the streets. Designate Q10 and Q25. If one side of a street carries more Q than the other side, show it. d. Show all cross-over Q’s and flow splits where they occur. e. Show all street flow confluences and their calculations. f. Show all Q’s approaching, entering and carried over from catch basins. g. Identify all catch basins by numbers or letter. h. Show lengths of all catch basins. i. Identify all critical street flow locations. j. Show the locations where street capacity and momentum calculations were made in Item “i” above. k. Show and verify with legible contours or other adequate means all Q’s entering the DRAFT project. If previous studies were used, reference them and submit copies. l. Show all Q’s leaving the project. Include their time of concentration. m. Show north arrow and scale. n. Show names or some other designation for all streets in the project vicinity. o. Show tract numbers of all properties (as applicable). p. Show name and telephone number of the Engineer who prepared and signed the hydrology study. q. Show and identify all storm drains (use same designations as on improvement plans and show the Master Plan of Drainage facility number, if applicable), their sizes, line No.’s, line designation, Q’s and times of concentration. Distinguish between Q10 and Q100. r. If the project contains more than one soil group (A, B, C or D), delineate each group. s. The drainage areas shall close and the acreage shall be shown. Areas should close at all points of confluence and at pickup points. t. All off-site drainage areas must be shown with a reasonable analysis of the interim and ultimate Q’s from those tributary areas. Include the necessary supporting calculations or reference previously accepted studies and submit copies. u. Initial areas should be limited to 10 acres with a maximum flow path of 1,000 feet. 2. Hydrology calculations – General formula to be used is Q=CIA. a. Time of travel. (1) Overland – use valley chart or representative sample section of natural channel. (2) Streets – Refer to street capacity and inlet design aids manual. Use Q est./S on chart to find A. Use A in Q est./A to find V. Use V in L (Vx60) to find t. (T=L/Vx60). (3) Pipes – for pipes flowing full, use Q/A to find V. For pipes flowing open, calculate A and V. Use V in L/(Vx60) to find t. (4) Travel times at points of confluence can be adjusted in accordance with the Riverside County Flood Control District Hydrology Manual. (5) Street hydraulics shall be provided in the hydrology study. b. Rainfall intensity – obtain from Riverside County Flood Control District Hydrology Manual. c. Coefficient of runoff – obtain from Riverside County Flood Control District Manual, plate No. D-5. DRAFT d. Check typical critical sections for flow splits, i.e., where flow exceeds crown. Use the street capacity charts per Drainage Design Criteria and Aides. e. Check “W” width of ponding on arterial for possible flooding of the required “dry lane.” f. Street sections should not transverse or be super elevated away from catch basins. Warping of street sections can either increase or reduce the capacity of the pickup and in some cases may create a ride-ability problem, particularly at “T” intersection. g. Check the Qs in pipes (option – tc may be adjusted at points of confluence or pickup after entering basins). NOTE: Q100 must be used until the sump condition is relieved by a downstream catch basin providing an alternate path for the water. Hydraulics Criteria utilized for the hydraulic study shall be as stated in this Manual. 1. The use of underground storm drain systems shall be required: a. When flooding or street overflow will cause serious damage, b. When future upstream development will cause drainage problems, c. If less than one – twelve-foot (12’) travel lane in each direction is dry on arterial highways. d. To eliminate the need for cross gutters, e. To eliminate nuisance water in residential areas (surface flow maximum – 1,000 linear feet), f. When median drainage is required, g. To insure building protection from 100-year frequency design flows. Finish floor to be one (1) foot above top of curb elevation. 2. The use of grate type catch basins is discouraged on public and private streets. They should only be considered on streets with slopes greater than 5%. To be used, they must receive prior approval. 3. The use of parkway culverts is discouraged. To be used, they must receive prior approval. The design shall incorporate adequate slope and maintenance access. Hydraulic Calculations 1. Identify all calculations by referring to the storm drain line number and its location. 2. Begin all hydraulic grade line calculations at the downstream end of a system and proceed upstream to the catch basin or other inlet facility. DRAFT 3. Calculations must proceed from point to point in a logical, easy to follow, analysis. Start with a controlling water surface which has been verified and add losses in a systematic manner as they accrue along the pipeline. Sum the losses and provide the hydraulic grade line and energy grade line elevations at all critical points. 4. The minimum free board in catch basins shall be 0.5 feet below the flowline at the catch basin opening. 5. When using Thompson’s Y equation for junction losses, write your equation first and then insert the variables. Numbers alone will not suffice. The minimum loss in a basin is 1.2V2/2g. Check Thompson’s Y for catch basins in a series. 6. At all junctions, show a detail including angles between the mainline storm drain and incoming laterals. 7. All trash racks or grate calculations must account for 50% debris clogging. 8. When required to bulk flows to account for burned areas, assume a 5-year growth. Catch Basin Calculations 1. On calculation sheets, identify each catch basin by number or letter and give its location. 2. Show all required information including type of curb, the half width street section, crossfall, slope, etc. (The half width street location is the distance from crown line to front face of curb.) 3. Using Riverside County Design Charts, check for continuous grade catch basins and local sumps where secondary flow exists. Also, check for sump catch basins where true sump exists (no secondary outlet). 4. Continuous grade catch basins at intersections shall be designed to intercept a minimum of 85% of the flow. 5. Check for true maximum ponding elevation (not necessarily at the basin top of curb). Street grades may allow flow to escape at lower elevations. 6. Permanent debris basins should: a. Have a 6’ high chain link fence b. Provide calculations showing how the basin empties within 24 hours c. Provide an emergency route for overflows d. Show volumes that include water and debris together Plan Preparation A. Storm Drains DRAFT 1. Show the hydraulic grade line plot on originals. Show all water surface elevations and the top of curb elevations at catch basins. Stationing shall be based on all storm drain centerlines. 2. Regarding “1” above, show all hydraulic elements, including Q’s, Vn, slopes, pipe sizes, F.L. elevations and pertinent stationing. Show TC elevation at CB centerline. B. Catch Basins 1. Show sizes including “L” and “V”. 2. Show type. 3. Show centerline street stationing at catch basin centerline. 4. Provide details of any local depressions. Design Criteria A. Pipes 1. D-loads shall be in conformance with the Los Angeles County Flood Control Manual. 2. A bedding detail is required for all types of pipe. 3. A minimum pipe size of 18 inches shall be used for all public storm drains and private storm drains within streets. 4. Use a factor of n=0.013 for R.C.P. and 0.015 for cast-in-place pipe. Cast-in-place pipe is not permitted longitudinally in arterial highways. 5. Concrete collars shall be used as required per Riverside County Flood Control District Standard Drawing no. M803. 6. A minimum radius of 22-1/2 feet shall be used for any horizontal bend and the need for beveled end pipes should be called out. 7. Slope anchors shall be constructed at 7 feet vertical intervals on all slopes of 5 to 1 or steeper. 8. Thick wall R.C.P. with 1-1/2 inch minimum cover inside shall be used when the flow velocity exceeds 20 feet per second. B. Cast-In-Place Pipe 1. Cast-In-Place concrete pipe (48” and larger) shall only be used where shown on the drawings and approved by the agency responsible for the maintenance of the project as an alternate construction. 2. A geotechnical investigation report shall be prepared and transmitted to the approving agency at the time the drawings are initially submitted for review. The report shall be DRAFT prepared by a licensed civil or geotechnical engineer registered in the State of California, and shall address, but not necessarily be limited to the following issues: a) Trench wall stability. A trench stability analysis shall be prepared. Sloughing and overall trench stability as it pertains to the construction if CIPP shall be addressed. b) Existence of groundwater. If groundwater is present, the report shall specify appropriate mitigation measures. c) Existence of expansive soils. CIPP shall not be used if expansive soils are present. d) Corrosion potential. A chemical analysis of the soil samples shall be made to determine sulfate concentrations. A recommendation with respect to cement “Type” shall be made. e) Overall feasibility of constructing CIPP 3. For structural design purposes, the pipe shall be designed to flow no more than just full unless structural calculations are submitted showing that the pipe can safely sustain the proposed hydrostatic head. 4. Design flow velocities greater than 20 ft/sec. will not be allowed unless an exception is granted by the Engineer. 5. A minimum 6 sack per cubic yard design mix shall be used and the compressive strength of the concrete (fc) at 28 days shall be at least 4000 psi; the modulus of rupture shall be at least 550 psi. For velocities greater than 10 ft/sec. but not greater than 20 ft/sec. the compressive strength shall be 5000 psi. Compressive strengths shall be noted on the drawings. 6. Pipe wall thickness for flows having velocities equal to or less than 10 ft/sec. shall comply with the requirements as set forth in the Standard Specifications. For velocities greater than 10 ft/sec. but not more than 20 ft/sec. a 140-degree segment of invert shall be thickened 2 inches in wall thickness as “sacrificial concrete”. Increases in standard wall thickness shall be noted on the drawings. 7. The minimum finished cover over the pipe shall be three (3) feet. 8. The minimum pipe slope shall be 0.005. 9. Cast-in-place concrete pipe, which is to be maintained by the County or District, shall not be placed except in the presence of the Engineer. 10. When CIPP is specified as an alternative to RCP, a note shall be added to the construction drawings stating that Transition Structure No. 3 shall replace Junction Structure No. 2 when CIPP is used. No changes need be made for Junction Structures No. 4. 11. Cast-in-Place pipe shall not have curve radii less than shown below: PIPE SIZE RADIUS DRAFT 24 in 45 ft 36 in 45 ft 42 in 45 ft 48 in 60 ft 54 in 60 ft 60 in 60 ft 66 in 60 ft 72 in 60 ft 78 in 90 ft 84 in 120 ft 96 in 150 ft 120 in 160 ft 12. Construction of the C.I.P.P. shall conform to the provisions of ACI Standard 346-70 and Title No. 66-22. The trench to accept C.I.P.P. shall be dug in undisturbed soil and continuous inspection will be required. An in-place loading test may be required at the discretion of the City Engineer, prior to the acceptance of any C.I.P.P. storm drain. Such test shall be in conformance with Section 9.4 of the above referenced ACI Standard 346-70 and performed solely at the expense of the contractor. 13. The following Cast-In-Place notes shall be added to the title sheet of the plans: a) Construction materials and method shall conform to the latest edition of the Standard Specification for Public Works Construction, the City’s Special Provisions and these plans. b) Cast-in-Place concrete pipe shall not be used unless it is shown as an alternate on the drawings approved by the City Engineer. c) Concrete mix designs shall be submitted by the contractor for approval prior to start of construction. d) Trenching and backfilling shall be performed only in the presence of the soils engineer. e) The minimum cover over the pipe shall be three (3) feet, measured from the top of the pipe. f) Backfilling of the pipe shall not be done until the concrete has developed 80 percent of its design strength. No traffic shall be permitted on top of the pipe until the concrete has attained its design strength. g) Water densification methods for backfilling the pipe will not be permitted. Mechanical compaction will be required. An 8-inch lift of loose backfill “shading” over the pipe will be permitted 24 hours after initial placement, provided the forms are still in place at the time of shading. h) A minimum 6 sack per cubic yard design mix shall be used and the compressive strength of the concrete (fc) at 28 days shall be at least 4000 psi; the modulus of rupture shall be at least 550 psi. For velocities greater than 10 ft/sec, but not greater than 20 ft/sec, the compressive strength shall be 5000 psi, and a 140-degree DRAFT segment of the invert shall be thickened by 2 additional inches; for velocities greater than 20 ft/sec, the 140 degree segment of the invert shall be thickened by an additional 4 inches. Compressive strengths shall be noted on the drawings. i) The consistency of the concrete shall be such as to allow it to be worked into place without segregation. The concrete for the cast-in-place concrete pipe shall have a slump of 2” plus or minus 1”. j) Fly ash, meeting ASTM C 618, may be used to substitute for cement (up to 15 percent of cement by weight). When fly ash is used, water reducing agents meeting ASTM Designation C 494 will be permitted in amounts recommended by the supplier and approved by the City Engineer. k) At the end of all pours and the end of each working day, the Contractor shall install No. 4 dowels, 24 inches long, 12-inch centers around circumference of cast-in- place pipe. l) The maximum earth cover shall be 20 feet from the top of pipe. m) Cast-in-place concrete pipe, which is to be maintained by the County or City, shall not be placed except in the presence of the appropriate agency inspector. The inspection for the CIPP smaller than 39” in diameter shall be performed by video camera and core just prior to the final acceptance of the system. n) Type V cement shall be used if the sulfate content in the soil is greater than 2,000 ppm. o) Continuous inspection and testing if CIPP placement is required. p) Contractor shall allow inspector into pipe while under construction and rod for wall thickness at a minimum of 25 cubic yards of the pour. C. Open P.C.C. Lined Channels 1. Require prior approval from City Engineer. 2. Structural calculations will be required. 3. Structural details shall be shown on the plans. 4. Are not allowed in the street right-of-way. D. Manholes 1. Manholes are required at the following locations: a) Beginning or ending of curves. b) Pipe size changes. c) Angle points and as required at junctions. d) Maximum 500 feet intervals (300 feet maximum for pipe less than 24-inch DRAFT diameter). e) As required for maintenance. 2. Manholes shall be restricted to, in order of preference: a) Parking lane. b) Parkway. c) Center of travel lane nearest right curb. d) Center of travel lane to the left of the travel lane nearest right curb. E. Easements 1. Public drainage devices shall be centered within an easement. 2. Easements parallel to lot lines are preferred to be on one lot only. 3. Surface structures shall not surcharge storm drain facilities. F. Abandonment of Underground Facilities 1. If existing culverts, pipes or other facilities are abandoned or removed, provisions must be made for drainage. 2. If facilities are abandoned, it will be necessary to either back fill with sand or cement slurry and seal the ends with brick and mortar or crush in place. These necessary requirements shall comply with state laws and municipal codes. G. Surface Drainage Transitions 1. If it is necessary to grade to drain, the grade on the ditch shall be shown on the plan. 2. The length of ditch construction shall be shown on the plan. 3. A letter of consent will be required where grading or drainage involves adjacent private property. 4. Keep mud and debris out of drainage by grading around improvements. 5. Provide AC swales or aprons to protect improvements. 6. The need for grading 50 feet to 100 feet upstream from the proposed improvements must be checked. 7. Ensure ponding does not occur upstream. 8. Ensure water quality and erosion control. DRAFT Street Lighting General All street lights will be owned by the City of Lake Elsinore unless designated otherwise by separate agreement. Street light locations shall be submitted through the City for approval. Street lighting design shall conform and follow City of Lake Elsinore Street Light Manual – Design Criteria and Standards, and City Standard Plan Numbers 501 to 509. The following standard “General Notes” shall be placed on the plans: GENERAL NOTES 1. Note to Contractors: The existence and location of any underground utility pipes or structures shown on these plans were obtained by a search of available records. Approval of these plans by the City of Lake Elsinore does not constitute a representation as to the accuracy or completeness of the location, nor the existence or non-existence of any underground utility, pipe or structure within the limits of the project. The Contractor is required to take all due precautionary measures for the protection of all utilities, pipes or structures, whether shown on these plans or not. Any utility(ies) damaged during the performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the governing agency by the Contractor, at his expense. 2. All work shall conform to the most current requirement of City of Lake Elsinore’s current improvement standards and specification and as indicated in this manual. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to be familiar with these standards and codes at all times. 3. The Contractor shall notify the City Engineering Inspector, forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning any work. Call for inspection at (951) 674-3124, between the hours of 9:00 am and 4:00 pm, Monday through Thursday. 4. Contractor shall maintain traffic control in accordance with Caltrans Traffic Manual and Watch Manual at all times during construction, as approved by the City Engineer or his representative. Failure to do so shall require immediate work stoppage. 5. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to have a dependable representative at the job site, at all times during construction. 6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange for the necessary relocation of any utilities. The contractor shall notify all utility companies involved, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work. The Contractor shall also contact Underground Service Alert (U.S.A.) at 1-800- 422-4133, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work. 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for the clearing of the proposed work area and relocation and cost of all existing utilities. DRAFT 8. An Encroachment Permit shall be required for all construction work done within Public Rights-of-way. Before issuance of said permit, the Contractor/Developer must provide the City Engineer with Certificate of Insurance and required bonding for public improvements. The encroachment permit must be present at the job site during the total time of the project construction along with an approved set of improvement plans. 9. If an Encroachment Permit is required through the District No. 8 office of Caltrans, please make reference to this fact in the “General Notes” section of the improvement plans. 10. The Service point is subject to revision by final SCE plans, it shall be the developer’s responsibility to provide the proper service to the street lights shown on this plan. 11. The developer shall be responsible for providing conduit and conductors from the street lights to approved service point furnished by SCE. 12. It shall be the responsibility of the developer or contractor to apply for an encroachment permit for work performed within the City right-of-way. SCE Service planner ___________, Work order number ____________ Energy charges paid by _________ (Developer, LMD, OTHER). DRAFT SECTION V TRAFFIC PLANS Signing and Striping In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of plans, the following criteria shall apply to all plans submitted. A. All plans shall be prepared on 24”x36” mylars with a ½” margin on all sides except the left side which will be 1 ½”. B. All plans shall be 1”=40’ scale or 1”=20’. C. North arrows should point to the top or right of sheet if possible. D. All sheets shall be numbered consecutively, “Sheet of ,” in the lower right of the plan. E. All lettering shall be 1/8” minimum height. F. Plan shall include engineering firm name, address, telephone number, date plans prepared, signature, number and expiration date of Registered Civil or Traffic Engineer. G. All stationing shall refer to the centerline of street unless otherwise noted and shall read from left to right. H. All plans shall include the City of Lake Elsinore signing and striping general notes. Construction notes and a legend shall also be included. I. All curbs, raised medians, edge of pavement, driveways, alleys, sidewalks, access ramps and right-of-way shall be shown and labeled. J. All existing regulatory, warning, guide and any special signs shall be shown. This includes parking prohibitions signs, advance street name signs, bus stop signs etc. All existing sign locations shall be field verified. K. All existing striping, pavement markings and curb markings shall be shown and labeled, including bike lanes, parking layouts, and crosswalks and limit lines. All existing striping shall be shown as a thin line and all proposed striping as a thick solid line. The locations and types of existing striping and pavement markings shall be field verified. L. Jurisdictional boundaries, street names, centerlines and stations shall be shown. M. Match lines shall be clearly shown and referenced on the plan. N. The following standard “General Notes” shall be placed on the plans: GENERAL NOTES 1. All lines and markings shall conform to the California Manual on Traffic Control Devices (CA DRAFT MUTCD) and Caltrans Standard Plans and Specifications (latest editions). 2. Lane widths shall be measured between center lines of each adjacent single or double stripe or top of curb, as appropriate. 3. The Contractor shall notify underground service alert, (800) 422-4133, and all concerned utility companies at least two working days in advance of excavation. 4. All traffic stripes, pavement markings, and signs shall be reflectorized and in standard sizes. All striping and marking details shall match Caltrans standard plans details. Stencils for pavement marking shall match Caltrans standard plans. All signs shall have prismatic reflective sheeting conforming to ASTM D4956 for Type IX and XI. 5. The Contractor shall remove all conflicting stripes, pavement markings, and raised pavement markers in accordance with the plans and as directed by the engineer. Word or symbol pavement markings shall be removed by sandblasting a rectangular area covering the whole marking. Grinding shall only be done upon approval by the City Engineer. 6. All crosswalks shall have 10 feet between the 12-inch white or yellow stripes. 7. All double yellow stripes shall have 3-inch painted black line separating the yellow stripes. 8. The Contractor shall apply traffic lines, and pavement markings including crosswalks, limit lines, stop bars, and detail 40 lines using thermoplastic material. 9. The Contractor shall furnish and install raised pavement markers (RPMS) within seven working days of roadway striping. All existing RPMS within the project area shall be replaced in kind or removed in accordance with the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. Remnant adhesive material from removed RPMS shall be removed. 10. The Contractor shall install standard size panel on 2" square perforated steel tube post with two-piece anchor and sleeve, fastened with 3 /8" rivets with stainless steel washers, unless otherwise noted. The exact location of all signs shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 11. The Contractor shall remove signs in accordance with the plans and as directed by the Engineer. All removed signs shall be salvaged to the City Yard unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 12. The Contractor shall layout (cat-track) the proposed signing, striping, and markings in accordance with the plans within three days of final paving. Contact the City E ngineering Inspector at ( 951) 674-3124 to obtain approval of layout prior to actual installation. 13. The Contractor shall coordinate all signing and striping works through the Engineer prior to opening new roadways and/or existing roadways to new signing and striping in accordance with the plans. 14. The Contractor shall install blue reflective pavement markers across from all fire hydrants per CA MUTCD. DRAFT Traffic Control In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of plans, the following criteria shall apply to all plans submitted. A. All plans shall be prepared on 24”x36” overall size with a ½” margin on all sides except the left side which shall be 1 ½”. B. All plans shall be drawn to a scale of 1”=40’ scale. C. North arrows should point to the top or left of the sheet. D. All sheets shall be numbered consecutively, “Sheet of ,” in the lower right of the plan. E. All lettering shall be 1/8” minimum height. F. Plan shall include engineering firm name, address, telephone number, date plans prepared, signature, and number of Registered Civil or Traffic Engineer. G. All stationing shall be based upon record centerline information and refer to centerline of street unless otherwise noted and shall read from left to right. H. All plans shall include the City of Lake Elsinore traffic control general notes, Construction notes and a legend shall also be included. I. All existing regulatory, warning, guide and any special signs shall be shown. This includes parking prohibition signs, advance street name signs, bus stop signs etc. All existing sign locations shall be field verified. Signs to be temporarily covered (bagged) or removed and reinstalled shall be identified. J. All existing striping, pavement markings and curb markings shall be shown, including bike lanes, parking layouts, crosswalks and limit lines. The locations and types of existing striping and pavement markings shall be field verified. K. All streets within the project limits shall be identified with proper street names to ensure proper orientation. A vicinity map and location map shall be included on the title sheet. L. All traffic signals within the project area shall be identified on the plan. Construction related temporary traffic signal modifications shall be shown on a separate traffic signal plan, prepared according to the latest edition of the City of Lake Elsinore Traffic Signals design criteria located in City of Elsinore Plan Preparation and Design Manual. M. Posted speed shall be shown at all approaches to the work area. N. Road closures, trail closures, detours, bore and jack operations, weekend work and/or night work require prior written permission from the City. Lane dimensions shall be shown at 300-foot intervals and at each end of lane or pavement transitions, match lines and join locations. Also, show length of turn lanes, flares, reverse tapers. O. Jurisdictional boundaries, street names, curb, driveways, centerlines and stations, alleys, raised medians shall be shown. DRAFT P. A minimum of 500 feet of roadway with striping details beyond project limits (showing join points) shall be shown. Q. All proposed sign locations shall be dimensioned. R. The following standard “General Notes” shall be placed on the plans: GENERAL NOTES 1. All traffic control devices shall conform to the latest editions of the California manual of uniform traffic control devices (CA MUTCD), the Caltrans Specification and Standard Plans, and the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. 2. The City reserves the right to observe these traffic control plans in use and make the necessary changes as field conditions warrant. Any changes shall supersede these plans and shall be done solely at the Contractor's expense. 3. It is the responsibility of the Contractor performing work on a public street to install and maintain traffic control devices as shown hereon, as well as any such additional devices as may be required to ensure the safe movement of traffic and pedestrians through or around the work area. All traffic control devices shall be kept in their proper position at all times, and shall be repaired, replaced, or cleaned as necessary to preserve their appearance and continuity. 4. The Contractor shall maintain all traffic control devices 24 hours per day and 7 days per week. 5. All tubular delineators shall be removed from view when not in use. 6. All traffic control devices shall be removed from view when not in use. 7. Recessed steel plates shall be maintained for open excavations during non- working hours. “steel plates ahead” signs shall be provided at all times. 8. Work hours shall be restricted to between 8:30 a.m. to 3:30 p.m. unless approved otherwise. 9. Any pavement markings and striping damaged during construction shall be restored to the original condition and/or location at the end of each construction period for each stage. 10. Contractor shall remove or cover all conflicting signs including signs on the traffic signal mast arms. 11. The Contractor shall provide trained flaggers as deemed necessary by the Engineer. 12. All workers shall be equipped with an orange vest (or a reflective vest at night). All flaggers shall also be equipped with a hard hat. 13. Access to driveways will be maintained at all times unless other arrangements DRAFT are made. 14. A minimum of twelve (12) foot travel lanes must be maintained unless otherwise approved by the department of public work s. 15. The Contractor shall notify nearby businesses and residences at least five working days in advance, in writing, regarding work to be done, hours of work, any closures, and any required detours. 16. The Contractor shall coordinate the relocation of the bus routes and bus stops with the riverside transit agency three weeks in advance of construction activity affecting bus stops. 17. Temporary “No Parking “signs are to be posted 24 hours prior to commencing work. 18. Any work that disturbs normal traffic signal operations shall be coordinated with the City Engineering Inspection, 48 hours prior to beginning construction. 19. Temporary video detection system shall be installed at the Contractor’s expense if vehicle loop detectors are to be damaged during the course of construction, video detection systems shall be removed by the contractor only after new loops are installed and verified operational by the City. DRAFT Traffic Signal Traffic signal design shall conform and follow the City of Lake Elsinore Traffic Signal Specifications. In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of plans, the following criteria shall apply to all plans submitted. A. All plans shall be prepared on 24”x36” overall size with a ½” margin on all sides except the left side which shall be 1 ½”. B. All signal plans shall be drawn to a scale of 1”=20’. C. North arrows should point to the top or left of the sheet. D. All sheets shall be numbered consecutively, “Sheet of ,” in the lower right of the plan. E. All lettering shall be 1/8” minimum height. F. Plan shall include engineering firm name, address, telephone number, date plans prepared, signature, and number of Registered Civil or Traffic Engineer. G. All plans shall include the City of Lake Elsinore traffic signal general notes, Construction notes and a legend shall also be included. H. All existing striping, pavement markings and curb markings shall be shown, including bike lanes, parking layouts, crosswalks and limit lines. The locations and types of existing striping and pavement markings shall be field verified. I. All streets within the project limits shall be identified with proper street names to ensure proper orientation. A vicinity map and location map shall be included on the title sheet. J. Traffic signal plans shall include new and existing curb and gutter, access ramps, right of way, maintenance easements showing all existing utilities, all traffic signal interconnect cable, and City boundary lines. All widths shall be clearly labeled and dimensioned to the centerline. K. Squares shall be used to designate construction notes. L. Triangles and clouding shall be used to indicate plan revisions. M. All existing conditions shall be screened to appear lighter than the rest of the drawing. N. Include signal pole schedule. O. Include conductor schedule. P. Include controller cabinet – solid state traffic actuated controller units and cabinets shall conform to the provisions in Section 86-3, “Controller Assemblies” of the State Standard Specifications and this Manual. DRAFT Q. The preferred location for cabinet placement shall be on the far-side corner of the main arterial, in the direction of the primary flow of traffic. A minimum of 48 inches of concrete pad shall be provided at the front and rear of the signal cabinet and electrical service/BBS. The police panel side of the signal cabinet may abut the ROW providing there are no physical barriers preventing access to the panel. Where sufficient ROW exists, up to 24 inches of clearance shall be provided on the police panel side of the signal cabinet. Clearances shall be unobstructed by any above ground facilities. A retaining wall shall be installed where required. The Engineer must approve any variance from the preferred location. R. Front side of traffic signal controller cabinet should open toward the intersection where possible. Electrical meter shall be facing the street. S. Nearest practical Southern California Edison service vault and service handhole shall be shown on plan. T. Utilize N.E.M.A. phasing conforming to the California MUTCD. U. Symbols shown shall conform to State of California Standard Plans ES-1A and ES-1B. V. Pole identification numbering shall increase clockwise around the intersection, with the No. 1 being the first pole away from the controller corner. W. All traffic signal plans shall indicate required traffic signal pole locations as referenced from BCR, ECR, and curb face. X. Conduit run identification numbering shall start at the conduit crossing farthest from the controller corner and increase sequentially toward the home run pull box on the controller corner. The final home run conduits shall have the highest identification numbers. Y. Unless otherwise physically required, an exclusive/split phase shall not be used in the phase sequence. Z. Traffic signal modifications requiring the installation of video detection cabling shall require all conductors to be removed from the conduit before pulling new cable. “Slipping” is not allowed. AA. Traffic signal modifications requiring the installation of ADA compliant Push Button Assembly cabling will require all conductors to be removed from the conduit before pulling new cable. “Slipping” is not allowed. BB. Traffic signal modifications shall match installed equipment by make and model. If the system cannot be matched, the entire system shall be replaced. CC. Maximum allowable conduit fill is 26% for new installation and 40% for existing/ modified installations. DD. Intersections approaches with a minimum of three through lanes or a distance greater than 36-feet from the lane line between the through and the left turn lanes to the far right most curb and gutter in the direction of travel will require two video detection cameras unless one camera is sufficient as determined by the Engineer. DRAFT EE. Advance detection shall be provided on streets where the approach speeds are 25 mph or greater. Separate loops shall be placed in each through lane. Advance loop setback requirements from intersections, based on approach speeds, are shown below. Radar detection zones may be used in place of advance loops. Advance Detector Loop Setback MUTCD Table 4D-101 Approach Speed (mph) Setback (feet from limit line) 25 105’ 30 140’ 35 185’ 40 230’ 45 285’ 50 345’ 55 405’ 60 475’ FF. Prepare equipment schedule. Refer to State Traffic Manual, Figure 9-23 for examples of these schedules and as directed by the City Traffic Engineer. GG. Emergency Vehicle Preempt A complete, functioning 3M Opticom™ IR and GPS emergency vehicle preemption system, or approved equal, shall be furnished and installed as directed by the City Traffic Engineer. The system shall be designed to prevent simultaneous preemption by two or more emergency vehicles on separate approaches to the intersection. The optical detector shall be mounted on the indicated signal mast by drilling and tapping and a detail of this shall be placed on the plan. HH. Existing and Proposed Utilities All existing and proposed overhead and underground utilities shall be shown on the plans. The design engineer shall be responsible for acquiring the necessary utility maps and plans to properly show the utilities on the plans. II. The following standard “General Notes” shall be placed on the plans: GENERAL NOTES 1. All work, material, and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the California Dept. of Transportation, Standard Plans and Standard Specifications DRAFT (latest edition), The Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD) (latest edition), County of Riverside Standards and Specifications, and the special provisions for this project. 2. Utilities shown on these plans are correct and accurate to the extent of available records and knowledge. The Contractor, however, is required to ascertain the exact location of underground facilities prior to doing work that may damage such facilities or interfere with their service. The Contractor shall bear the total expense of repair or replacement of any underground facilities damaged by his operation. Phone underground service alert (USA) a minimum 48 hours in advance. 3. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and notify all utility companies and underground service alert a minimum of 48 hours prior to the start of construction. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all phases of construction with the various utility companies involved. 4. All traffic signal equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor unless otherwise specified. 5. All new red, yellow, and green signal indications, ped indications, and I.I.S.N.S. shall be a light emitting diode (LED). Signal lenses shall be 12" with metal housing, visors, and louvered backplates with 2” yellow retroreflective borders. 6. The location of signal poles shown on the plan is approximate. The exact location shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 7. Street name signs shall be retroreflective, white letters on the blue background with City logo and "City of Lake Elsinore" below street name. 8. Pedestrian signal faces shall be type "A" pedestrian countdown head with LED uniform incandescent look countdown module. 9. Pedestrian push buttons shall be 2" dia. (min.) ADA compliant, vibratory/audible, APS buttons with international symbol sign plate per Caltrans sign specifications R62D. Accessible pedestrian signal (POLARA APS) system shall be installed per California MUTCD Sections 4E.09, 4E.10, 4E.11 and 4E.12. 10. All new conduit shall be 3" PVC unless otherwise shown. 11. Contractor shall place conduit by jacking or drilling unless otherwise approved by City engineer or his representative. 12. All traffic signal detection, signing, pavement markings, and striping shall be completed prior to traffic signal activation. 13. Conductor schedule is furnished as an installation guideline only. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide the correct conductors required for the intended operation. 14. All wiring and equipment shall be marked (tagged) within the controller cabinet DRAFT for phase identification. 15. Underground signal light conductors shall not be spliced. 16. See Caltrans Std. Plan ES-1A and ES-1B for the symbol abbreviation legend. 17. All salvaged equipment not reused shall be delivered to the City of Lake Elsinore yard. 18. Video detection cameras shall be mounted on signal mast arms with six-foot extension poles with astro brackets. Final location shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. Units with radar capabilities shall be mounted on the mast arm per manufacturer specifications. 19. Signal interconnect pullbox spacing shall be 500' apart maximum. DRAFT SECTION VI MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS Revisions to Approved Plans Revisions to approved improvement plans are subject to approval by the City Engineer and shall only be made by an engineer from the firm that prepared the original plan. When another engineering firm has a need to make revisions on the plan, permission must be obtained in writing from the original engineering firm. The engineering firm needs to contact the City for bluelines of approved plans. Proposed revisions should be drawn by hand in red pencil on bluelines of the approved plan(s). Two sets of these bluelines are then to be submitted to the Engineering Department for review and approval. Once the blueline has been reviewed and approval is given, a copy of the original may be checked out of the Engineering Department and changed by the Engineer. Revisions shall be called out with a delta number wherever they occur on the plan. The revision box on the title sheet and the revision box on the sheet where the revision appears should show the delta number and revision description. Upon approval, the City Engineer will sign and date in the revision box on the title sheet. DRAFT Appendix DRAFT SOILS ENGINEER’S CERTIFICATE: THESE GRADING PLANS HVE BEEN REVIEWED BY THE UNDERSIGNED AND FOUND TO BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE RECOMMENDATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS OUTLINED IN THE SOILS AND GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE REPORT PREPARED FOR THIS DEVELOPMENT. ____________________________________________________ (Signature) (RCE NO.) (Date) ____________________________________________________ (Signature) (RCE NO.) (Date) Soils Certificate for Grading Plans DRAFT ENGINEER’S NOTICE 1. CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE SHALL ASSUME SOLE AND COMPLETE RESPONSIBILITY FOR JOB SITE CONDITIONS DURING THE COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING SAFETY OF ALL PERSONS AND PROPERTY. THIS REQUIREMENT SHALL APPLY CONTINUOUSLY AND NOT BE LIMITED TO NORMAL WORKING HOURS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE OWNER AND ENGINEER HARLESS FROM ANY AND AL LIABILITY, REAL OR ALLEGED, IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF WORK ON THIS PROJECT EXCEPTING FOR LIABILITY ARISING FROM THE SOLE NEGLIGENCE OF THE OWNER OR ENGINEER. 2. ALL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES, REPORTED OR FOUND ON PUBLIC RECORDS, ARE INDICATED WITH THEIR APPROXIMATE LOCATION AND EXTENT. THE OWNER, BY ACCEPTING THESE PLANS OR PROCEEDING WITH THE IMPROVEMENTS HEREON, AGREES TO ASSUME LIABILITY AND HOLD THE ENGINEERE HARMLESS FOR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE EXISTNECE OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES NOT REPORTED OR INDICATED ON PUBLIC RECORDS, OR THOSE CONSTRUCTED AT VARIANCE WITH REPORTED OR RECORD LOCATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO TAKE DUE PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES TO PROTECT THE UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES SHOWN AND ANY OTHER FOUND AT THE STIE. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY TO NOTIFY THE OWNERS OF ALL UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES CONCERNED BEFORE STARTING WORK. 3. THE ENGINEER PREPARING THESE PLANS WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR, OR LIABLE FOR UNAUTHORIZED CHANGES TO OR USES OF THESE PLANS. ALL CHANGES TO THESE PLANS MUST BE IN WRITING AND MUST BE APPROVED BY THE PREPARER OF THESE PLANS. 4. QUANTITIES SHOWN HEREON ARE PROVIDED FOR BONDING PURPOSES ONLY. CONTRACTORS SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING ALL THE QUANTITIES PRIOR TO BIDDING FOR CONSTRUCTION. Engineers Notice for Grading Plans DRAFT STREET LIGHT MANUAL DESIGN CRITERIA AND STANDARDS ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT _________________ ___________ Remon Habib Date City Engineer DRAFT 2 TABLE OF CONTENT Introduction --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 Street lights Requires -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 Street lights NOT Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5 Temporary Lighting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 Wireless Telecommunication Facilities (WTF) ------------------------------------------------------ 6 Utility Company Authorization --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 City of Lake Elsinore Authorization -------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 Developer’s Responsibility ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 Developer’s Checklist ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 Pedestrian Pathways and Parking Lot Lighting------------------------------------------------------ 11 Street light Design Guidelines --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 Industry Standards -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 Design Deviations --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 Street light Location and Spacings ------------------------------------------------------------ 12 Poles -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12-13 Poles Identifications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 Poles Foundation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13 Mast Arms ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14 City Approved Luminaires ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 14-15 Luminaires Specifications------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15 Optical Distribution Method & Configuration -------------------------------------- 15 Luminaire Housing ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 15-16 Driver & Driver Specifications --------------------------------------------------------- 16-17 Illuminance Lighting Level Methods ---------------------------------------------------------- 17-20 Decorative Lights ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20-21 Solar Lights ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21-24 Pull Boxes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 24-25 Conduits -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25 Conductors ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26 Splicing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 Fuse and Fuse Holders ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 Photoelectrical Control Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 Connection to Service Point -------------------------------------------------------------------- 28 Service Cabinet ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28 Street light Plan Submittals ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29 Plan Preparation and Requirement -------------------------------------------------------------------- 29-31 General Notes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31-32 Street light Authorization, Construction and Acceptance Processes -------------------------- 33 Street Light Design Process -------------------------------------------------------------------- 33-34 Street Light Construction Process-------------------------------------------------------------- 34 3 Street Light Acceptance Process---------------------------------------------------------------- 35 Street light Construction ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36 Quality Assurance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36 Delivery, Storage, and Handling--------------------------------------------------------------- 36 Pre-Installation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36 Installation and Inspections -------------------------------------------------------------------- 37 Acceptance and Energizing -------------------------------------------------------------------- 37-38 As-Built and Warranties ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38-39 Standard Drawings ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40 Std. No. 501 (Street light Placement – Intersections) ------------------------------------ 41 Std. No. 502 (Street light Placement – T-Intersection., Cul-de-Sac & Elbows) ---- 42 Std. No. 503 (Street light Placement – Minor, Local & Collector Streets) ----------- 43 Std. No. 504 (Street light Placement – Secondary & Major Streets) ----------------- 44 Std. No. 505 (Street light Placement – Urban Arterial) ---------------------------------- 45 Std. No. 506 (Street light Pole, Pole ID, Mast Arm & Luminaire) --------------------- 46 Std. No. 507 (Street light Foundation Details) --------------------------------------------- 47 Std. No. 508 (Pull Box and Conduit Installation) -------------------------------------------- 48 Std. No. 509 (Service Cabinet) ---------------------------------------------------------------- 49 Forms and Applications------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50 Street light Authorization Form ---------------------------------------------------------------- 51 Street light Acceptance Form ------------------------------------------------------------------ 52 Street light Transfer of Utility Service Form ------------------------------------------------ 53 SCE SLA (Street light Authorization) -------------------------------------------------------- 54 SCE CSD272 (Contract for Electrical Service) ------------------------------------------- 55 SCE C 503 (Notice of Lamp Changes) ----------------------------------------------------- 56 4 INTRODUCTION This Street Light Manual for the City of Lake Elsinore has been prepared to establish guidelines for City standards and criterions for the design and installation of all new or relocated street lights located within the City right of way and boundaries. This document shall be used for all street lights on public streets in the City of Lake Elsinore. Deviations from these standards shall require specific approval of the City Engineer. This Street Light Manual provides for forms, standard drawings, checklists and processes to create a streamline process and a guideline on what to expect from planning to construction and final acceptance of public street lights by the City of Lake Elsinore. This document is not intended or designed as, nor does it establish, a legal standard for lighting. The standards and criterions within this manual do not preclude the use of higher standards. Note: The term developer in this document is inclusive term and includes, but is not limited to developers, engineers, contractors and/or subcontractors concerning services and responsibilities addressed throughout this manual. Title 24 of California Code of Regulation institutes a statewide lighting zone system. However, Title 24 alone does not restrict residential lighting or street lights. Riverside County is one of the first governing bodies to restrict outdoor lighting to preserve the dark night sky and to adhere to the American Medical Association (AMA) recommendations on Light-emitting diode (LED). This Street Light Manual will show compliance with dark night sky zones and AMA recommendations. 5 STREET LIGHTS REQUIRED Street lights shall be required for all lots and parcels being developed or constructed. In addition, street lights may be required for lots and parcels containing existing structures which are being improved or altered, depending on the nature and extent of work. STREET LIGHTS NOT REQUIRED Developers shall be required to obtain a written approval from City Engineer prior to designing for the below scenarios where street lights are not required. Street lights may not be required for single family residential subdivisions having an average lot street frontage of more than 125 feet, and will not be required to install a street light system along the streets, but shall as a minimum, be required to install street lights at all intersections, cul-de-sacs, and other locations deemed by the City Engineer to be essential. (e.g. pedestrian tunnel, pedestrians over-crossing, bridges, curves, etc.) Street lights shall not be required for planned developments, residential, commercial, and industrial developments where the internal streets are not offered for dedication, a street lighting system will not be required for the internal non-dedicated streets, but shall be provided by the developer on the external public street frontage. TEMPORARY LIGHTING: Alternate roadway lighting shall be provided during construction and the temporary street lighting system must be in operation prior to removing the existing street lighting system. If a project is constructed in phases the developer may need to complete a temporary lighting plan. This must meet the current lighting standards. Temporary lighting systems are required for all public rights-of-way (roadways, sidewalks, walkways, underpasses, overpasses, detour roads, etc.) where existing street lighting systems are being replaced or new street lighting systems are being constructed. The second condition refers to areas with no existing lighting before construction begins – Utilitarian lighting is not considered a lighting system. - The temporary street lighting system shall be in operation prior to removing the existing street lighting system or constructing the new street lighting system. - The temporary street lighting system shall provide an average illumination and uniformity ratio (ave./min.). See Illumination Lighting Level method of this manual for minimum lighting values. - The Contractor shall make arrangements with power utility company for service or shall provide an alternate power supply. - The temporary street lighting system must be in operation from dusk to dawn. - The contractor is responsible for restoring street lights out of service within 24 hours. - The contractor shall be responsible (including all related costs) for the installation, operation, maintenance, removal, and liability of the temporary street lighting system (equipment). 6 WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION FACILITIES (WTF) City of Lake Elsinore Municipal Code (LEMC) Chapter 17.415.140 established in order to enhance the ability of wireless communications service providers to effectively and efficiently provide new wireless communications services in the City; encourage the design and placement of wireless communications facilities in a way that minimizes their impact to the visual character, health, economic vitality and biological resources of the City; encourage and maximize the use of existing and approved wireless communications facilities, buildings and other structures while taking into account the use of concealment technology in order to reduce the number of facilities needed to serve businesses and residents in the City; ensure continuous maintenance of new and existing wireless communications facilities; and ensure the timely removal of any unused or outdated wireless communications facilities. The City preferences for wireless telecommunication facilities to be located on City-owned street light poles within the Public Right-of-Way. Any proposed WTF installed on a street light poles will comply with all the Federal, State and City’s requirements and standards. When the street light is being installed for the purposes of telecommunication use, all telecommunication equipment electrical power shall be separated from street light connections. Separate circuits will be provided and any necessary pull box will be installed, to provide a point of connection. Electrical connections will be metered separately from Public Street Lights. Wireless telecommunication facilities must utilize SCE wireless metering. If SCE wireless metering is not feasible, metering must be contained within available equipment enclosures. Only one wireless installation will be allowed per street light pole, however, more than one carrier may be allowed to share the equipment of a neutral host provided. Priority to install on public street light poles will be given on a “first-come first-served basis”. Public street light poles not in compliance with the City’s standards must be upgraded prior to the installation of the wireless telecommunications facility. Signage on the pole base shall comply with all relevant provisions of ANSI C95.2, and must identify the owner of the attached equipment, equipment, equipment ID, and provide a 24 hour contact number to its network operations and center, and such telephone number shall be able to reach a live person who can exert transmitter power-down control over this site as required by the FCC. 7 UTILITY COMPANY AUTHORIZATION Southern California Edison (SCE) is the electrical service provider in the City of Lake Elsinore. There are three (3) types of rate schedules or plans that SCE and City of Lake Elsinore will accept. These 3 rate schedules will establish design and construction, funding, ownership and operation and maintenance responsibilities. The developer should become familiar with the SCE schedules in order to expedite approval of plans. The developer must work with the City and get prior approval before moving forward with any of the three SCE rate schedules below. Schedule LS-1 – This rate applies to un-metered street, highway, and public parking lot lighting that is owned, operated, and maintained by SCE. The City does not encourage this rate schedule for street lights that are within the public right of way or easement. Schedule LS-2 – This rate applies to un-metered street, highway, road, and public parking lot lighting that City will own, operate, and maintain. Applicant may elect this schedule with prior approval from the City for both new and relocated street lights. Schedule LS-3 – This rate applies to metered street, highway, road, and public parking lot lighting that City will own, operate, and maintain. Applicant may elect this schedule with prior approval from the City for both new and relocated street lights. The Southern California Edition (SCE) rates and tables are available online, it shall be the responsibility of the developer to ensure the most current SCE applications and requirements are completed and complied with. New street lights installation in the City maintained roadways may require the developers to install a meter street light electrical service. The use of metered vs. flat rate electrical billing shall be determined by the Developer’s Engineer in consultation with SCE prior to submittal to the City. A written notice from the serving utility company, stating that line clearance and service have been checked and are adequate, shall be submitted to the City Engineer for all developments requiring street lighting. 8 CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE AUTHORIZATION Developer shall review the “Street Light Authorization, Design, Construction and Acceptance Process” of this manual for complete street light authorization process. The City has acquired almost all of its street lights from SCE and are currently, maintained and operated by the City or its contractors. All the street lights that were purchased from SCE are in the SCE Schedule LS-2, that is these lights are all un-metered street lights. Since most of the current City street lights are under the SCE Schedule LS-2 system, the City prefers all new street lights be design for LS-2 systems if possible and practical for the proposed development. The City understands that SCE Schedule LS-2 may be not be practical for certain developments or utility provider, as such, Street light Authorization Form was developed to ensure the street light designs and SCE LS Schedule is determined early in the design phase to avoid any unnecessary design changes as the project progresses. Street light Authorization Form via City Engineer approval will initially determine if the project is required to provide for street lights, further, it will determine which SCE Schedule LS-1, LS-2 or LS-3 are appropriate for each specific development. Once the street lights SCE Schedules are approved for the proposed development, the developer shall comply with the requirements and processes as described in the “Street Light Authorization, Design, Construction and Acceptance” section of this manual. It is important to note, there are at minimum three stakeholders in the design and construction of the street lights. It is recommended and highly advisable for all developers to have a separate or coordinated discussion with both the City and SCE at the initial stages of design. Starting the discussion with both agencies is highly recommended to ensure the projects move forward with all parties having equivalent understanding and expectations. 9 DEVELOPER’S RESPONSIBILITY This document is subject to updates; therefore, developers and other interested parties contemplating any action or construction governed by this manual should ensure they are using the most recent revisions. In addition to this manual, all applicable industry standards and rules and regulations of federal, state, and local governmental agencies are in effect. This manual should not be construed to change or modify the intent of other applicable codes or standards by any other governmental or utility agency serving the project area. Any and all questions regarding “areas of conflict” shall be decided in favor of the more stringent of the various rules and regulations in conflict. All deviations and modifications from this manual must be approved by the City Engineer. No work may proceed which deviates from the requirements of this manual without written authorization from the City Engineer. Existing street lights which must be relocated or repositioned as a result of the construction of new streets or driveways into a development shall be the responsibility of the developer. Where a development abuts a collector street, primary residential street, or minor residential street, assume that street lights will be installed on alternate side of the street, and where the property on the opposite side of the street has developed without street lights, the City Engineer may require the developer to install additional street lights on the frontage of the development to maintain proper street light spacing. A new service can with a step-down transformer, required as a result of the modification, replacement or relocation of an existing utility service pedestal shall be the responsibility of the developer. The developer shall also be responsible to ensure that power shall remain to existing street lights during the period of any such modification, replacement or relocation of an existing utility service pedestal. It shall be the responsibility of the developer to ensure that the power shall remain to the existing street light system until the new street light system is completed and functioning correctly. See below “Developer’s Checklist”, certain items shown in the list may not be required of the developer depending on the City approved SCE LS Schedule. Developer is advised to retain copies of all relevant and applicable items shown below to expedite the transfer of street lights for ownership, maintenance and operations post construction. 10 Developer’s Checklist Checklist – City of Lake Elsinore ____ Obtain copy of City of Lake Elsinore Street light Manual ____ Retain professional engineer of appropriate discipline ____ Acquire Street light Authorization Form Approval ____ Acquire SCE approval ____ Developer prepares street light plans for City review and approval ____ Developer acquire Services Point Address from City Building Department ____ Developer Submit SCE approved design to City ____ Approved plans submitted for distribution to stakeholders ____ Developer complies with and meets all the project conditions required prior to construction ____ Developer obtains construction permits ____ Developer calls for inspections ____ Developer installs street lights ____ City authorizes SCE to energize lighting ____ Contractor warranty material and workmanship provided to City ____ Developer complies with and meets all the project conditions required post construction ____ Developer requests for transfer of street light ownership, operation and maintenance to City ____ City accepts new street lights and transfers utility billing to City Note: The items shown above is not a complete list of items that may be required for all projects. Certain projects depending on the type SCE LS Schedule may require more or less items as the project progresses. See “Street light Authorization, Design, Construction and Acceptance Processes” section of this manual for more information. 11 PEDESTRIAN PATHWAYS, TRAILS AND PARKING LOT LIGHTING The City of Lake Elsinore has not standardized lighting for Pedestrian Pathways, Trails, Parking Lots and other areas requiring lighting where standard lighting is not practical due to spacing and height irregularities. Per direction by the City Engineer, the minimum lighting for such areas shall be govern by the Illuminance Lighting Level Methods section of this manual. Developer will be required to provide City the complete system design, layout and photometric plan. Other system components such as pole types and pole foundation, LED luminaries and photoelectrical control unit, pull boxes, services cabinets and etc. may also require by City and when applicable and shall comply with the requirements of this manual. STREET LIGHT DESIGN GUIDELINES Street lighting shall be designed in conformance with this manual, the current edition of the Greenbook and “American National Standard Practice for Roadway Lighting” of the American Standards Institute. Data and calculations supporting the satisfaction of the above requirements shall be submitted for review, or the predetermined design standards included herein shall apply. Industry Standards LED street light luminaires shall meet the applicable requirements of the following industry standards: - ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2011-Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid-State Lighting (SSL) Products - IES LM-79-08 – Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products. - IESNA LM-80-08 – Approved Method measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED chips/Fixture Manufacturer must provide extrapolation for Lumen Maintenance derived from In-Situ testing upon request. - IEEE C62.42.2-2002-IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low- Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits. - IESNA TM-15-11 & Addendum A (replaces TM-15-07 and TM-15-07 Addendum A) – Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaire; Backlight, Uplight, and Glare (BUG) Ratings. - ANSI/UL 1598-Poles & luminaires; UL - ANSI/UL 8750: Additional requirements for LED luminaires as well as drivers and LED arrays Test data that establishes compliance with the requirements of ANSI/UL 1598 and the other industry standards listed above shall be provided upon request. 12 Design Deviations New or relocated street lights located within City R/W or City easement are required to include light emitting diode (LED) luminaires and shall be constructed per City Standards, Per Plan, and field inspected and approved prior to requesting energizing or acceptance. Deviations from these specifications shall be requested from the City Engineer for Approval prior to commencement of work. Street light Location and Spacings See Standard Drawings 501 to 505 for Typical Street Light Location and Spacings. Street lights shall be located as follows: - vertical curves (crest and sag locations) - Intersections – Intersections shall have at least one street light. Intersection street light locations and the number require shall conform to the Standard Drawing 501 and 502. - If the project is conditioned for a signals and there is an existing street light at the intersection the plan has to call for its removal. - Cul-de-Sacs and Stub-End Streets – All cul-de-sacs and stub-end streets exceeding 125 feet in length, measured from the street light location at the intersection to the right-of-way line at the end of the cul-de-sac or street, shall have a street light within the bulb, or in the case of a stub-end street, at the end of street barricade. Location shall conform to the Standard Drawings 502. - Spacing – Maximum street light spacing, measured along the street centerline, shall conform to Standard Drawings 503 to 505, except on arterial streets with a 1,000-foot or smaller radius horizontal curve, in which case the maximum spacing is 170 feet. The actual constructed street type and right-of-way width shall be the controlling factor for determination of street light spacing rather than the street classifications (arterial, collector, etc.). - Street light locations shall be adjusted to miss driveways, existing utility poles, and other obstructions by at least five feet. Poles See Standard Drawing 506. When telecom facilities are to be placed on a pole, the pole to be used will comply with the corresponding “telecom” pole standard as indicated by location adjacent to functional classification. All poles shall be provided with a clear, factory applied Amershield Anti-Graffiti coating. For Minor, Local and Collector streets where the Right of Way is between 50’ to 68’ Use - Ameron 1C123 POLE 13 For Residential Cul-de-Sacs and Stub End Street Use - Ameron 1C123 POLE For Secondary and Major where the Right of Way is between 90’ to 100’ Use – Ameron 1C125 POLE For Urban Arterial where the Right of Way is between 120’ to 142’ Use - Ameron 1C128 POLE (Note: Use 8’ arms on poles located adjacent to the sidewalk on residential, collector and arterial streets) Concrete poles shall be tapered, centrifugally cast and pre‐stressed. Poles shall be black and white marble aggregate or natural exposed aggregate. Pole shape and color shall be uniform for any one project. Replacement poles shall match existing. Hand hole cover plates shall be aluminum and securing bolts shall be stainless steel tamper‐proof bolts of the type installed with a pent‐head wrench. Anti‐seize shall be used. The ultimate strength of a pole shall be calculated in accordance with the latest revision of American Concrete Institute (A.C.I.) standard 318. Under working loads (including wind loading, as specified in the latest edition of AASHTO standards), the pole must not be stressed beyond the cracking strength. The pole and mast arm must be capable of handling the EPA and weight of the luminaire. Poles Identifications Pole Identification Tags must be provided for all City owned street lights. The Pole Identifications are City specific; it is further specific to the five-voting district with the City of Lake Elsinore. See Standard Drawing 506 for details. These Pole Tag shall be mounted by the Contractor and at the time of transfer to the City for ownership. Poles Foundation See Standard Drawing 507 For nonstandard street lights the foundation shall be cast-in-place Portland Cement Concrete, the Concrete shall be 560-C-3250. Unless otherwise shown on the drawing, all street lights to be relocated shall be provided with new foundations and anchor bolts of the proper type and size. Foundations for street light poles shall be designed for one-hundred-mile-per-hour (100-mph) winds 14 with gusts to one hundred-thirty-miles-per-hour (130 mph) in conformance with requirements of the AASHTO design criteria. Mast Arm See Standard Drawing 506 Mast arms shall be minimum two‐inch (2”) I.P.S. galvanized steel or aluminum and shall be self‐ supporting without braces, scrolls or rods. Mounting shall be perpendicular to the street centerline unless otherwise directed by the City Engineer. They shall have a minimum of six inches (6”) of horizontal straight section at the end of the arm to mount to a I.P.S. slip fitter type luminaire mount. Mast arms shall be eight feet (8’) long for all luminaires unless otherwise specified in the plans and shall be capable of handling the EPA and weight of the luminaire. Steel arms shall conform to ASTM A 120. Aluminum arms shall be corrosion resistant alloys such as Aluminum Association wrought alloys 6061 or 6062 or cast alloys 319 or 356. All exposed hardware shall be stainless steel. All protected hardware not visible after installation shall be cast aluminum and / or stainless steel, hot‐dipped galvanized. Anti‐seize shall be used. City Approved Luminaires See Standard Drawing 506. Fixtures shall be LED, dimmable, and one of the following or as approved by City Engineer: For Residential Cul-de-Sacs and Stub End Street Use – GE Evolve Catalog #: ERL1-0-03-D5-27-A-GRAY-L For Minor, Local and Collector streets where the Right of Way is between 50’ to 68’ Use – GE Evolve Catalog #: ERL1-0-05-B5-30-A-GRAY-L For Secondary and Major where the Right of Way is between 90’ to 100’ Use – GE Evolve Catalog #: ERL1-0-09-C5-30-A-GRAY-L For Urban Arterial where the Right of Way is between 120’ to 142’ Use – GE Evolve Catalog #: ERL1-0-09-B5-30-A-GRAY-L For Intersection Safety Lights Use – GE Evolve Catalog #: ERL1-0-13-D5-40-A-GRAY-L 15 Light Emitting Diode Luminaires – All new street light installations shall utilize Light Emitting Diode (LED) luminaires. The luminaire wattages shown on Standard Drawings 506 and above are nominal wattages; system wattages, which include the electronic driver. Each LED luminaire shall have the manufacturer’s name, trademark, model number, serial number, date of manufacture (month-year), and lot number as identification permanently marked inside each unit and the outside of each packaging box. The operation characteristics such as rated voltage and rated power in watts and Volt-Ampere shall be permanently marked inside each LED luminaire unit. General description of LED Street light – Standard fixture utilizes terminal block for power input suitable for #6 - #14 AWG wire operates at 700mA. Drive current is not field switchable. A three-pole terminal block capable of accepting #14 to #10 AWG shall be mounted to the housing inside the electrical compartment. Luminaire shall be provided with capability for optional backlight control. Complete assembly weight shall not exceed 45lbs. Fixture is designed to mount on a schedule 40, 2” nominal pipe size (NPS) horizontal tenon (minimum 8” in length) and is adjustable +/-5 degrees to allow for fixture leveling (includes two axis T-level to aid in this process). Fixture, including the LEDs, drivers and electrical components, shall carry a limited ten-year warranty and housing paint and finish shall carry a ten-year warranty. Luminaires Specifications Optical Distribution Method & Configuration Optical configurations shall meet the following criteria: 1. Close contact refractors to be employed for optical distribution. 2. Refractors are to be polymeric material rated 5VA, f1 rating 3. Lumen maintenance at 50,000 hours of life to be no less than 88% of initial lumen output 4. Shall have 95% survival rate at 50,000 hours 5. Integral 10K surge suppressor for diode and entire system protection Luminaire Housing Luminaire housing shall be furnished with an optical assembly, be powder-coated silver, include a level bubble to facilitate installation, allow for tool-less entry and shall include an integral twist-lock type receptacle for photoelectric cell control in accordance with the latest EEI-NEMA standards which is adjustable with respect to north and prewired to the terminal board. Photocell control shall be for a 7-pin receptacle per ANSI C136.41. Luminaire external housing shall have a minimum rating of IP66 as specified in IEC 60529, with the ability to shed water from inside the housing (i.e. weep holes). 16 The LED luminaire shall be designed for horizontal mounting. The LED assembly shall have a slip‐ fitted mounting bracket capable of attaching to a two‐inch (2”) pipe without the need for special mounting parts. They shall be installed in a horizontal position with leveling and clamping to the mast arm pipe accomplished by tightening mounting bolts, which are externally or internally accessible. Bolts shall be minimum 5/8” x2” size and stainless steel. Luminaire circuitry shall include quick connect / disconnects to allow easy separation and removal of driver and power door. Grounding requirements: ANSI/UL Standards and NFPA 70. The luminaire power unit assembly shall consist of an integral driver, capacitor, 10K surge suppressor, and heavy‐duty terminal block. The power unit assembly shall be mounted on a separate component of the luminaire to facilitate replacement. The luminaire optical chamber shall have a minimum rating of IP66 as specified in IEC 60529. The luminaire housing cooling system shall consist of a passive heat sink with no fans, pumps, or liquids and shall be designed and constructed to accept a standard plug type, locking, three‐pole, three‐wire, street light photocontrol. The fixture and finish endurance tested to withstand 5,000 hours of elevated ambient salt fog conditions as defined in ASTM Standard B 117. All fasteners shall be stainless steel and all polycarbonate components shall be UV stabilized. An easily‐viewable nameplate shall be permanently affixed to the inside of each luminaire housing. The nameplate shall contain the following information: manufacturer’s name manufacturer’s catalog number, date of manufacture (month and year), plant location, input power consumption, driver output current, IEC IP Rating, correlated color temperature (CCT), IES light distribution type, IESNA TM‐15 BUG ratings, and serial number. Utility approved luminescent name plate with light source and wattage shall be permanently affixed on the exterior of the Luminaire to be visible from the ground. The driver assembly shall be enclosed in a separate compartment from the optical assembly. The entire fixture shall be “wet listed” with the optical assembly compartment being rated at IP66. The LED Luminaire shall be constructed to provide the required light distribution with the lower edge of the Luminaire housing below the entire light source close contact refractors. The Luminaire must be Dark Sky Compliant with U0 bug rating. Driver & Driver Specifications Driver: Light Emitting Diode (LED) drivers shall be component‐type consisting of precision wound coils and welded magnetic steel laminations assembled together and impregnated with baked‐on, insulating, weatherproof varnish; and metal‐cased, hermetically‐sealed capacitor, suitable for use on 17 multiple distribution circuits with 60Hz, 120 or 240-Volt rating. The operating sound pressure noise level shall not exceed the ambient noise level by more than five (5) decibels at 30‐feet when measured by a sound level meter conforming to the American Standards for Sound Level Meters. Where the ambient noise level is less, a minimum of 40 decibels shall be assumed. Power supply / driver shall be field replaceable by means quick‐disconnect connectors and easy access mounting hardware. Power supply / driver shall be wet‐listed in the US and Canada, UL, ROHS compliant, meet Caltrans 611 vibration testing and GR‐63‐CORE section 4.4.1/5.4.2 earthquake zone 4. Driver Specifications: Electronic; voltage range = universal 120 – 277 v +/‐ 10%; frequency = 50/60 Hz; power factor > 90% @ full load; THD < 20% @ full load; output ripple < 10%; output shall be isolated; case temperature rated for 6‐40 to 60C; fully encased and potted; overheat protection, self‐ limited short circuit protection, and overload protected – minimum integral 10k surge protection tested in accordance with IEEE C62.41 and ANSI standard 62.41.2; Driver Life Rating not less than 100,000 hours. Illuminance Lighting Level Methods Illuminance lighting level methods maybe used in certain cases for Street lights with prior approval from the City Engineer. The design values for Illuminance from AASHTO Roadway Lighting Design Guide shall be used for non-street lights and pedestrian areas such as sidewalks, pathway, bikeways and parking lots. Note: Parking Lot illuminance design values shall meet values similar to the value in the table for pedestrian ways. Illuminance is a measurement of the amount of light that hits the pavement or pathway surface. Illuminance is measured in foot-candles. Illuminance layouts may be designed with lighting design software or with illuminance templates. The illuminance at any point will be the sum of illuminance from one or several contributing sources. The level and uniformity of illuminance along a typical roadway, pedestrian paths, sidewalks, parks and parking lot depends on several factors, including the lumen output or the lights source, luminaire distribution, mounting height, luminaire position, pavement reflectance, and pole spacing and arrangement. The same average level can be obtained by different installation arrangement, such as a few high-output light sources or a greater number of low-output sources. The proper light loss factor (LLF) should be used in all lighting calculations. LLF is depreciation factor applied to the calculated initial average illuminance. The recommended lighting levels for continuous lighting are in the table below. These values are based on Table 3-5a from the AASHTO Roadway Lighting Design Guide. 18 The table below contains the recommended illuminance value for continuous lighting of roadways based on roadway type and general land use for the City of Lake Elsinore. Illuminance Design Values Roadway and Walkway Classification Area Classifications/ General Land Use Average Maintained Illuminance (Eavg) Minimum Illuminance (Emin) Illuminance Uniformity Ratio (Eavg/Emin) (foot-candles) (min) (foot - candles) avg/min (max) Interstate and other freeways Commercial 0.6 to 1.1 0.2 3:1 or 4:1 Intermediate 0.6 to 0.9 0.2 3:1 or 4:1 Residential 0.6 to 0.8 0.2 3:1 or 4:1 Urban Arterial Commercial 1.6 3:01 Intermediate 1.2 As 3:01 Residential 0.8 uniformity 3:01 Secondary and Major Commercial 1.4 ratio allows 4:01 Intermediate 1 4:01 Residential 0.7 4:01 Collector Commercial 1.1 4:01 Intermediate 0.8 4:01 Residential 0.6 4:01 Local, Residential Commercial 0.8 6:01 Intermediate 0.7 6:01 Residential 0.4 6:01 Alleys Commercial 0.6 6:01 Intermediate 0.4 6:01 Residential 0.3 6:01 Sidewalks, Parking Lots Commercial 1.3 3:01 Intermediate 0.8 4:01 Residential 0.4 6:01 Pedestrian Path, Bike Ways and Parking Lots All 2 3:01 Illumination for Intersections - The recommended lighting levels for intersections of continuously lit roadway are in the table below. They are based on the functional classifications the intersecting roadways and level of pedestrian use. The values are taken from Table in ANSI/IES RP-8-14, Roadway lighting. The functional classifications of roadways are based on the Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) Guidelines for Residential Subdivision Street Design: 19 Major - over 3,500 average daily traffic (ADT) Collector - 1,500 to 3,500 ADT Local - 100 to 1,500 ADT Illumination for Intersections Functional Classification Average Maintained Illumination at Pavement by Pedestrian Area Classification in fc Uniformity Eavg/Emin High Medium Low Major/Major 3.4 2.6 1.8 3 Major/Collector 2.9 2.2 1.5 3 Major/Local 2.6 2 1.3 3 Collector/Collector 2.4 1.8 1.5 4 Collector/Local 2.1 1.6 1 4 Local/Local 1.8 1.4 0.8 6 Safety Lighting - Safety lighting includes lighting rural and urban interchanges, railroad crossings, pedestrian conflict areas, and other points of nighttime hazard. Lighting of Isolated Interactions and Interchanges - The recommended lighting levels for isolated intersections are shown in the table below. These values are based Table 9 from ANSI/IES RP-8-14, Roadway Lighting. For roadway intersections and interchanges the road classifications with highest light level should be used. Roadway classifications in this table are defined the same as in the Illuminance Design Values table displayed earlier in this section. Illumination of Isolated Intersections Road Classification Average Illuminance (fc) Uniformity Ratio (Eavg/Emin) Arterial 0.9 3 Collector 0.6 4 Local 0.4 6 Pedestrian Area – Lighting for pedestrian areas should be designed using both horizontal and vertical illuminance. Horizontal illuminance levels help the pedestrian to see the walkway. Vertical 20 illuminance level helps the pedestrian to see and recognize other pedestrians in the walkway. The below contains the recommended value for pedestrian areas. The table is based on Tables 4, 5, 6, and 7 from ANSI/IES RP-8-14, Roadway Lighting. Illumination for Pedestrian Areas Maintained Illuminance Values for Walkways Area Classification Description E avg (fc) EV min (fc) E avg/Emin* High Pedestrian Conflict Areas Mixed Vehicle and Pedestrian 2 1 4 Pedestrian Only 1 0.5 4 Medium Pedestrian Conflict Areas Pedestrian Areas 0.5 0.2 4 Low Pedestrian Conflict Areas Rural/Semi-Rural Areas 0.2 0.06 10 Low Density Residential (2 or fewer dwelling units per acre) 0.3 0.08 6 Medium Density Residential (2.1 to 6.0 dwelling units per acre) 0.4 0.1 4 Pedestrian Portion of Pedestrian/Vehicular Underpasses Day 10 5 4 Night 4 2 3 Decorative Lights The City Engineer may approve the use of Decorative poles and luminaires if warranted by the character of the surrounding neighborhood. Decorative street lights of a post-top design with luminaires having a vertically mounted non cut-off light source will be discouraged. Street light luminaires of a full-cut off design mounted on a mast arm are preferred. 1. The developer shall submit design calculations for the pole spacing, including photometric calculations and plots from an appropriate computer program. 2. Decorative street light luminaires shall be fitted with house-side shields, if necessary, to prevent glare and light trespass on adjacent residential properties. 3. The materials and specifications used in the manufacture of the Decorative street lights must be approved by the City Engineer. Street light components manufactured of Aluminum alloys containing Silicon or Copper will not be permitted. Powder-coat finishes that cannot be refreshed by cleaning and painting in the field at a future date will not be permitted. A certification from the manufacturer that the above criteria are met may be required by the City Engineer prior to approval. 4. Decorative street light poles and decorative bases having a paint or powder-coat finish must be galvanized inside and out, then painted equipment must be factory finished and delivered 21 wrapped in a protective layer that will prevent damage to the paint or powder-coat finish during shipping and handling. 5. Decorative street light equipment having a paint or powder-coat finish must be raised at least nine-inches above finished grade on a concrete pedestal. The developer shall supply street light foundation and pedestal details for approval by the City Engineer. 6. Installation details and equipment specifications for Decorative street lights, including the equipment manufacturer’s name, model and paint numbers, shall be included on the street light plan sheets. The information shall include details for the foundation and pedestal construction and a note indicating the requirement for spare as detailed above. Solar Lights Solar powered LED street lights have brought very promising opportunities for applications in street lighting with recent advances in LED and Battery technology. It is feasible in the future that the City will adopt standalone solar photovoltaic street lighting system for new and retro-fitted street lights. Since many manufacturers have come up with various luminaire styles, color temperature, wattages and other parameters, the City will accept Solar Street lights, Solar Parking Lot Lights and Solar Pathway Lighting on case by case basis and with prior approval from City Engineer. Solar powered street light benefits include: - No Line voltage, trenching, or metering; - No power outages; - Able to employ new battery backup for cloudy or rainy days - No single point of failure - Possible federal and state and utility incentives - Reduced emissions from electricity production - Contains daylight sensors or hour preset, no running or maintenance cost - Safe 12 Volt/24volt circuit with little to no risk of electric shock. Solar power street light on the other hand become inoperable should low-sun conditions persist beyond the storage capacity of the street light batteries. Due to the continued advances both in the LED and Batteries to power the Solar Luminaires, City will not adopt and make Solar street lights mainstream standards until Solar street lights are more reliable, efficient and standardized. A basic solar powered LED street light system component are: - Solar Panel - LED Luminaire - Battery - Controller - Pole and Foundation 22 Developers proposing Solar Lighting shall provide the following component information to City of Lake Elsinore prior to approving solar lighting for applicable projects, in addition, photometric plan will be required. Solar Panel Manufacturer Name Brand/Model PV module Type Rating Power Maximum Power Voltage Maximum Power Current Open Circuit Voltage Short Circuit Current Frame Size Weight Test Temperature Junction Box Warranty LED Luminaires Manufacturer Name Brand/Model LED Type Luminaire input Voltage Power consumption Lumen Output Color temperature IES lighting type Material Lens Operation temperature CRI Warranty Battery 23 Manufacturer Name Brand/Model Battery Type Operating Voltage Battery Efficiency Battery Life Cycle Capacity Max. discharge current Operating temperature range Self-discharge Dimensions Weight Warranty The following minimum information must be included on the label of the battery and label of battery must be fixed firmly on screen printed on the battery casing: 1. Brand and name of manufacturer 2. Model and type 3. Rated capacity in Ampere-hours 4. Nominal Voltage Controller Manufacturer Name Brand/Model System Voltage Max. charge/load current Adjustment range: Evening/morning hours Night/day detection Type of Protection Pole and Foundation Height Diameter Thickness Material Finishing 24 The Pole foundation design shall be per pole manufacturer specifications, or at minimum per City Standard No. 507. The foundation design and details must be signed by a Professional Civil or Structural Engineer licensed in the state of California. The foundation shall be cast-in-place Portland Cement Concrete, the Concrete shall be 560-C-3250. Unless otherwise shown on the drawing, all street lights to be relocated shall be provided with new foundations and anchor bolts of the proper type and size. Foundations for street light poles shall be designed for one-hundred-mile-per-hour (100-mph) winds with gusts to one hundred-thirty-miles-per-hour (130 mph) in conformance with requirements of the AASHTO design criteria. Solar Light General Notes: 1. All necessary Spare parts/Tools have to be provided by the contractor. 2. The complete set of materials shall be warranted by the contractor against any installation defects for a minimum period of 1 years from the date of installation. 3. After completion of the proposed work, clearances of all temporary works/ materials shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor and this shall be removed immediate after the requirement of such temporary work is completed. 4. The contractor will conduct on-site training of the City or it’s contractor staff regarding the assembly, start-up, operation, maintenance and repairs of the materials. Pull Boxes See Standard Drawing 508 Pull Boxes shall be per Caltrans Standard ES-8, Pull Box No. 3-1/2. All pull boxes, including the size and type, shall be shown and identified on the street light plans. Pull boxes shall be installed at all locations as follows: - Located within five feet (5’) of each street light - Where more than two conduit runs intersect - where conduit runs are more than 200 feet long - Located at the end of the conduit run - at critical angle points - and at such locations ordered by City Engineer The pull box that feeds into SCE service point shall be a #5 pull box and be within 5’ of the service pedestal. The bottom of the pull box shall rest firmly on a six-inch (6”) thick bed of three-quarter-inch (3/4”) crushed rock extending six inches (6”) beyond the outside edges of the box. Pull boxes shall be installed within the sidewalk, if possible, behind sidewalk or five feet (5’) behind the face of curb or dike and, where practical, shall be installed with the short side parallel to the curb and near the street 25 light. They shall not be installed in any part of a driveway or other traveled way. Pull box covers shall be inscribed “STREET LIGHTING” and shall be secured with bolts, cap screws or studs and nuts made of brass, stainless steel or non-corroding materials. Pull boxes shall be tamper resistant and utilize a special key tool for opening. Anti‐seize shall be used. Conduits: All conduit runs, including the size and type shall be shown and identified in the plans. see City of Lake Elsinore Standard Drawing 508 as a guideline for typical conduit layouts. For a system designed using the 3-wire system, only 2 circuits (one set of 3 wires) shall be allowed in any conduit. Circuits based on the 2-wire system and the 3-wire system shall be mixed in any conduit. All circuits may, however, be mixed in the same conduit from the service enclosure to the first pull box. The Design may include more than two circuits in a conduit if the conductors for each circuit (2 wire) or set of circuit (3-wire) are identified by conductor insulation which is a solid color or a basic color with a permanent colored striped. The identification stripe shall be continuous over the entire length of the conductor. New development shall install minimum 2-inch conduit, or larger as required, with one No. 10 AWG stranded pull wire from the last light on each end of the system to the adjacent property line, where the adjacent property has no existing street lighting system. - Conduit shall be two-inch (2”) UL approved heavy wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, Schedule 80. - Larger conduit may be used, at the contractor’s expense, provided the larger size is used for the entire run between pull boxes. Reducing coupling will not be allowed. - Conduit shall be encased in a minimum of three inches (3”) of sand on all sides. - Conduit will have a minimum of 3” clearance horizontally from trench wall. - Conduit shall be laid to a depth of not less than thirty inches (30”) unless placed under sidewalk in which case only eighteen inches (18”) shall be required - Location tape shall be installed above the sand layer along the length of the conduit trench - The minimum sweep radii shall be twenty-four inches (24”). - Conduit runs shall have a maximum length of 200 feet Conduit laid in open trench shall not be covered nor shall trench or inspection hole be backfilled until accepted by the City Engineer or his designated representative. 26 Conductors: All conductors, including quantity and size, shall be identified in the plans. Unless otherwise specified, conductors shall be stranded copper, sized in accordance with these standards and the National Electrical Code. All conductors shall be stranded copper, XHHW‐2, #8 AWG minimum. Maximum wire size shall be #6 AWG. Neither aluminum nor direct‐burial cable shall be accepted. All street light system shall be provided with 240V metered service. Wire shall conform to the applicable portion of ASTM B3 and B8. Wire connectors shall be approved by the City Engineer or his designated representative and shall bear the UL seal of approval. The installation procedure, connector size and crimping tools shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Wire from the base of the pole to the luminaire shall be #10. For 120‐volt installations (if approved by city engineer), the wires shall be black and white, with black being the hot wire and fused. For 240‐volt installations, one hot wire shall be black and the other shall be red. Both hot wires shall be fused. Any ground wires shall be green and connected to a clamp attached to an anchor bolt. Service runs parallel to the street shall be installed under the sidewalk where new sidewalk is being constructed or directly behind the existing sidewalk. Street light circuits shall alternate from light to light. Voltage drop shall not exceed five percent (5%). 27 Splicing: Splices shall be permitted in pull boxes and lighting standard bases ONLY. All splices shall be waterproof with penatrox (or approved equal) and shall be used with butt splice and shrink tubing. Fuses and Fuse-Holders Fuses: Fuses shall be slow blow 13/32” x 1 ½” in‐line type in 5-amp size (unless specified otherwise by the City). The fuse shall be installed in the hot leg of the lighting conductor. The circuit shall be fused in the base of the pole and not in the pull box. 240‐volt installations require each leg to be fused using a double fuse holder and two fuses of appropriate size. Fuses shall be Bussmann Series type FNQ or approved equal. Fuseholders: Fuse holders shall be completely waterproof, shall grip the fuse in the load side section when opened, and be able to take a 13/32” x 1 ½” fuse, with crimp‐type tubular terminals of a proper size for the cable in the particular light. Heat shrink both crimp ends. Fuse holders shall be Bussmann Series type HEB or HEX with insulating boots or approved equal. Photoelectrical Control Unit Photo Cell and Receptacle – All Lighting Emitting Diode (LED) luminaires shall have a photocell receptacle. On multiple service systems where a photocell is not utilized on every individual luminaire, a rain tight shorting cap shall be installed on the unused receptacle. Fisher-Pierce # TRS-2 105-305 VAC LED control or approved equal. The photoelectric unit shall consist of a photoelectric cell in a weatherproof housing which plugs into an EEI-NEMA twist-lock receptacle integral with the luminaire and shall be installed with the clear UV stabilized photocell window facing north. The control unit shall contain a uniformly coated cadmium sulfide photoelectric cell suitable for operation with 120 or 240-volt line supply with surge protection to prevent damage and made to fail in the “ON” position. The unit shall have a HID load rating of 1,800 VA with a Tungsten load rating of 1,000 watts. The unit shall have time delay capabilities. The response level of the unit to changing light levels shall remain stable throughout the life of the unit (5,000 operations). The “turn-on” level shall be nominal 1 foot-candle and the “turn-on: turn-off” ratio shall be 1.5. 28 Connection to Service Point Contractor shall contact SCE for a service point. SCE will identify what service is available and where it is located. In rare cases, a new street light can be connected to an existing street light circuit, but not without written permission from the City Engineer. New voltage drop calculations shall be required to verify that existing circuit can handle additional load. The service point shall be in the City’s right‐of‐way; otherwise, the City will require an easement to the service point. Service Cabinet: See Standard Drawing 509 for service cabinet information. All service cabinets shall be single meter service cabinets. City may require dual meter service with unmetered section at discretion of city engineer. Service cabinets shall also meet the following specifications: - All cabinets shall be stainless steel Myers or approved equal. - Single meter service (Meyers Model USP16‐M2200‐112CTB or most applicable model number). - Shall include a photoelectric socket and control unit with time delay capabilities. - Shall include factory installed photocell shield. - Shall include test block switches. - Shall be anodized aluminum or stainless steel. - Shall include branch circuits per project design plans. 29 STREET LIGHT PLAN SUBMITTALS In order to obtain uniformity and allow easier review of street light plans, the following criteria shall apply to all street light plans submitted. The Developer preparing plans and specifications for street lights shall adhere to the following design and plan preparation criteria: The plans shall show and identify all adjacent subdivisions, existing and proposed utilities and driveways, street lights to be installed, all existing lights in the immediate vicinity of the project, all conduits and conductor runs, service points and addresses, trees within 20’ from street lights, and all applicable provisions and details specified in these standards or upon request by City Engineer. Plan Preparation and Requirements: - All sheets must by 24” x 36” overall size, with a ½” margin on all sides except that the left margin to be 1-1/2”. City CAD Title Blocks can be downloaded online via Engineering Department website. - All plans shall be drawn to scale of 1” =40’ or 1” =20’. - North arrows shall point to the top of left of the sheet, if possible - Project boundaries, tract limits, Right of Way lines, Easement and Utility Poles (Proposed vs. Existing must be clearly identifiable). - All stationing shall refer to centerline of the street unless indicated on the plan and shall read from left to right, and shall increase from south to north or west to east. No negative station will be allowed. - Dimensions to street lights from centerline, curb lines, and right of way lines - Lot lines and Lot Numbers - Minimum lettering size is 0.10” - Plans are to be signed and stamped by the applicant professional engineer. - Show existing street lights within the project limits, and 300’ beyond. Show “future” street lights in a reasonable placement format to demonstrate that this design will work both now, and when future development occurs. Label signalized intersections. - If any street light will be installed much later, they need to be shown and called out for assessment only. - Avoid placing street lights on boundary lines, this can create problems for assessment and funding of the maintenance/energy charges if the street light is partially in one property line and partially in another. Title Sheet shall include: - Vicinity Map – showing project location, Major cross streets, City limits, North arrow and scale. - Index Map - Abbreviations - Plan legend and symbols 30 - Quantity Tables – No. of poles, type, height, No. of fixtures, type, wattage, lumens - General and Construction Notes - Basis of bearing – shall be the same as the tract map - Benchmark – number description, date (year of adjustment), and elevation to three (3) decimal places. - Developer name, address and telephone number - Engineering firm name, address, telephone number, date of plan preparation, signature and number of the Registered Applicant Engineer. - Declaration of Responsible Engineer in Charge - Certificate of approval of the City of Lake Elsinore Engineer shall appear on all sheets in the following form: “These plans have been reviewed for compliance with the appropriate conditions of development and/or City and State laws, and have been found acceptable.” _________________________________________________ City Engineer RCE # Expiration Date - Acceptance block for signature and date for all other agencies, as necessary. - Revision block with revision number, date, initial of design engineer, description of plan changes, and spaces for City approval and date. Design and details shall include the following information: - Design submittals not containing full electrical designs signed by applicable professional engineer or SCE will be rejected. - If non-standard street lights and fixtures are proposed by developer, prior approval from City Engineer will be required. Non‐standard street lights will be required to provide structural pole foundation calculations, and photometric analysis along associated roadways. Design calculations shall be prepared by applicable professional engineer and shall be wet‐stamped. - The design plan sheets shall show and identify the complete street light system, including existing and proposed SCE point of services, all meter cabinets, fuses, conduit sizes, runs, wires and trench depths, pull boxes, street light poles and foundation, fixtures and other associated items to complete a street light system. Depending on the SCE LS-1, LS-2 or LS-3 design, developer may not be required to provide for some or most of the above items, certain items above are typically designed as part of the SCE design, and therefore will be not be required in the developer’s design. - Depending on SCE LS design, developer’s design sheets will require information on each street light foundation, pole, fixture type, and information on street station, SCE service point (indicate serving voltage 240v), meter, cabinet and circuit information, 31 - Voltage Drop calculations for wire sizing are required for every circuit run which has more than (2) street lights and whenever the service from the service point is more to the last (furthest) street light exceeds 500’. Street light circuits shall alternate from street light to street light. When laying conduits across a street, they shall be at right angles to the curb line. General Notes 1. Note to Contractors: The existence and location of any underground utility pipes or structures shown on these plans were obtained by a search of available records. Approval of these plans by the City of Lake Elsinore does not constitute a representation as to the accuracy or completeness of the location, nor the existence or non-existence of any underground utility, pipe or structure within the limits of the project. The Contractor is required to take all due precautionary measures for the protection of all utilities, pipes or structures, whether shown on these plans or not. Any utility(ies) damaged during the performance of the work shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the governing agency by the Contractor, at his expense. 2. All work shall conform to the most current requirement of City of Lake Elsinore’s current improvement standards and specification and as indicated in this manual. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to be familiar with these standards and codes at all times. 3. The Contractor shall notify the City Public Works Inspector, forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning any work. Call for inspection at (951) 674-3124, extension 247, between the hours of 9:00 am and 4:00 pm, Monday through Thursday. 4. Contractor shall maintain traffic control in accordance with Caltrans Traffic Manual and Watch Manual at all times during construction, as approved by the City Engineer or his representative. Failure to do so shall require immediate work stoppage. 5. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to have a dependable representative at the job site, at all times during construction. 6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange for the necessary relocation of any utilities. Contractor shall notify all utility companies involved, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work. The Contractor shall also contact Underground Service Alert (U.S.A.) at 1- 800-422-4133, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning work. 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for the clearing of the proposed work area and relocation and cost of all existing utilities. 8. An Encroachment Permit shall be required for all construction work done within Public Rights- of-way. Before issuance of said permit, the Contractor/Developer must provide the City Engineer with Certificate of Insurance and required bonding for public improvements. The encroachment permit must be present at the job site during the total time of the project construction along with an approved set of improvement plans. 9. If an Encroachment Permit is required through the District No. 8 office of Caltrans, please make reference to this fact in the “General Notes” section of the improvement plans. 32 10. The Service point are subject to revision by final SCE plans, it shall be the developer’s responsibility to provide the proper service to the street lights shown on this plan 11. The developer shall be responsible for providing conduit and conductors from the street lights to approved service point furnished by SCE. 12. It shall be the responsibility of the developer or contractor to apply for an encroachment permit for work performed within City right-of-way. - SCE Service planner _______________, Work order number ______________ - Energy charges paid by _____________ (Developer, LMD, OTHER). Other Notices/Precedence These specifications are not complete – it is a supplement to the latest edition of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Green Book” and the City of Lake Elsinore’s Standard Special Provision. In case of conflict with the Green Book or City of Lake Elsinore Standard Special Provisions, these specifications shall take precedence. 33 STREET LIGHT AUTHORIZATION, DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION AND ACCEPTANCE PROCESSES Note: Developer is encouraged to review the beginning of this manual to initially determine if the project is required to provide for street lights. Developer shall obtain authorization from City Engineer via Street light Authorization Form to determine whether the project is required or not required to provide for street lights. If determined via this manual and Street light Authorization Form the project is required to provide for street lights, Developer will be required to utilize the below process and complete the necessary forms and applications. Street light Design Process - Developer completes and submits to Engineering Department Street Light Authorization Form. - City reviews and signs Street light Authorization Form, City determines project specific SCE Schedule type for electrical service LS-1, LS-2 or LS-3. - Engineering Department determines responsible party for design, construction, operation and maintenance and associated fees of the required street lights. - Upon City and Developer agreeing on SCE Schedule the following items will be required during design reviews. - For LS-1 - Developer prepares street light plans for the street light locations only. These street light locations can be part of other plan submittals such as improvement plans, if Engineering Department allows. - Developer submits street light/improvement plans to City for review and approval - Developer completes SCE Street light Authorization (SLA) Form for City review and approval. Developer completes SCE CSD272, if no existing account is provided in the SLA form. - Developer submits the street light/improvement plans, signed SLA form and if required CSD272 to SCE for design and approval of LS-1. This will determine responsible entity for energy, maintenance and operation fees. - Once street light plans and SCE designs are approved, Developer submits Mylars for the City Engineer signature, once the Mylar’s are signed, Developer will make copy for the signed Mylar’s and keep for record and potential As-Built changes. - For LS-2 - If existing street lights are being retro-fitted with new Fixtures, developer will prepare and complete SCE C503 form and submit to City for review and approval. Engineering Department will review for consistency in the LED Fixtures type and other required parameters. This will also initiate the SCE new charge rate. 34 - If new street lights are proposed, developer maybe required to gain prior approval for LS-2 design from SCE. Developer hires professional electrical engineer, and submits 90% street light plans. - Following City comments, Developer submits 100% street light plans for approval - Developer submits to SCE the approved street light plan, and CSD272 form to initiate SCE design - Once street light plans and SCE designs are approved, Developer submits Mylars for the City Engineer signature, once the Mylar’s are signed, Developer will make copy for the signed Mylar’s and keep for record and potential As-Built changes - For LS-3 - Developer submits 90% street light plans signed by a professional electrical engineer. - Concurrently, Developer requests for Meter Cabinet address from building department. - Following City comments, Developer submits 100% street light plans signed and stamped by professional electrical engineer. - Developer submits approved street light plans, meter cabinet address, and CSD272 form to SCE to initiate LS-3 design. Note: the service point and address must be exactly the same in the SCE and Developer street light final design plans. - Once street light plans and SCE designs are approved, Developer submits Mylars for the City Engineer signature, once the Mylar’s are signed, Developer will make copy for the signed Mylar’s and keep for record and potential As-Built changes. Street light Construction Process - Developer Applies for Encroachment Permit and submits 3 copies of the signed street light plans and the associated bond and inspection fees to Engineering Department. - Developer requests for Pre-Job meeting prior to construction with Engineering Inspector. - Once approved by Engineering Inspector, Developer requests for construction inspection on the street light foundation, conduits, pull boxes, and the associated pole, fixture type and other associated materials per approved street light plans. Meter Cabinet and associated material are inspected by City Building Department. - Once Street lights are constructed, Developer requests for walk thru with Engineering Inspector to verify Completion of Street lights per approved street light plan. - Engineering Inspector approves the Street lights and requests for As-Built if changes were made to the approved street light plan, Developer signs and submit the As-Built to City for approval, City Engineer signs and approves the As-Built. 35 Street light Acceptance Process - Developer submits Street Light Acceptance Form, and the associated required documents to Engineering Department for acceptance of street light improvements and requests for initiating associated bond releases. - Engineering, Public Works, Building and Finance reviews and approves Street Light Acceptance Form. Once Street Light Acceptance Form is fully executed, City Council through regular meeting accepts public improvements, following Council Action Engineering initiate associated bond release. - Developer Submits Street Light Transfer of Utility Service Form to initiates transfer of utility service to City, Developer submits the copy of signed SLA, CSD272, Billing account number and current SCE bill for the associated street lights. - Engineering Department works with SCE and requests a transfer of utilities be initiated - SCE contacts the Developer and fills out turn off/turn on form - SCE transfers the Developer’s account to the City account for payment - City transfers street lights to City’s O&M contractor for Street lights - City and City O&M contractor updates street light maintenance inventory - City and City O&M contractor updates GIS and other associated maps and web applications - City updates fixed asset report for street lights - City adds street light assets to the Special Tax Assessment for the subject properties - Upon one year of street lights/street improvements acceptance from City, Developer requests for remaining bond retentions to be released. - Engineering Inspector approves bond retention release after confirming the street lights are in good standing. 36 STREET LIGHTS CONSTRUCTION Quality Assurance: - LED luminaire manufacturer shall provide a 10-year warranty on LED luminaires that includes LEDs, housing, drivers, and finish. - LED luminaire manufacturer shall use IESNA LM-80 data to predict luminaire lifetime and shall demonstrate a suitable testing program incorporating high heat, high humidity and thermal shock test regimens to ensure system reliability and to substantiate lifetime claims. - Electrical and light technical properties shall be recorded for each LED luminaire during manufacture. - This should include lumen output, CCT, and CRI at a minimum. Each luminaire shall utilize a unique serial numbering scheme. Technical properties must be made available for a minimum of 5 years after the date of manufacture. - Luminaires shall be fully assembled and individually electrically tested prior to shipment. Delivery, Storage, and Handling - Deliver luminaires and components carefully to avoid breakage, bending and scoring finishes. - Do not install damaged equipment. - Store luminaires and accessories in original cartons and in a clean, dry space; protect from weather and construction traffic. Pre-Installation - Contractor shall set up a pre‐construction meeting prior to ordering of any materials or any work taking place. - Contactor shall provide material submittal drawings for city review and approval prior to ordering of any material. - Obtain a City R/W permit for any work performed within a City R/W or City easement. Attached to the R/W permit are the construction requirements applicable to all work performed within the City R/W. - Call underground Service Alert at 800‐422‐4133 at least 48 hours before excavating. - Where a street light installation is being installed for the purposes of telecommunication use the following approvals must be obtained: - Right-of-way Permit: For work in the public right of way - Building Permit: For foundation and Service Metering - Administrative Wireless Telecommunication Facility Permit (Planning): For approval of facility. 37 Installation and Inspections - Concrete and/or asphalt removal & replacement shall be per City of Lake Elsinore Standards or as directed by the City Engineer. A sidewalk extension may be required to meet ADA access requirements. - Conduit depth shall be as described in the CONDUIT section. All trenches shall be compacted per the City of Lake Elsinore Standards or as directed by the City Engineer. - Street Lights shall be located per City approved plan or per City of Lake Elsinore Standard, and shall not be relocated without prior City approval. - Minimum Engineering Department Inspections Required: • All work performed within a Public Right‐Of‐Way • All conduit placement • Prior to and during any concrete foundation placement • Pole installation - Construction “As‐Built” drawings shall be submitted prior to final inspection - Engineering inspection is required for final wiring and splicing prior to energizing. - Pedestrian and vehicle traffic control and access shall be maintained per the Plans, Specifications, City Traffic Control Standards, CA MUTCD, and as otherwise required or directed by the City. - Concrete and/or asphalt removal & replacement shall be per City of Lake Elsinore Excavation Ordinance as directed by the City. A sidewalk extension maybe required to meet ADA access requirements. Acceptance and Energizing - Upon completion of all street light construction, the Contractor (on public projects) or Developer (on private development projects) shall submit two (2) sets of professionally drafted street light “As-Built” plans on 11” x 17” size mylar sheets to the Engineering Department, - After “As‐Built” plans have been accepted by the City, the Contractor or Developer shall anticipate a minimum of five (5) working days for the City to contact SCE for street light energizing. Release of a Building Occupancy requires that street lights be energized. - As-Built Plans shall at minimum show the following information: • Layout of curbs, gutter, sidewalks, driveways and other improvements, drawn to scale • Location of street lights, with dimensions from the nearest cross street intersection and between street lights • Location of pull boxes dimensioned from the street lights, curbs or other features • Location of service point (power source) and SCE identification number • Location of conduit service runs dimensioned from face of curb, edge of pavement or back of sidewalk as applicable • Size and type of wire used 38 • Size (wattage and voltage rating) and type (LED) of each lamp and number of lamps used • Contractor’s name, address and telephone number • Identifying project name and number Incomplete Submittals Will Not Be Accepted - For private development projects, the Developer shall submit a one-year Street light Energy fee for each new street light, paid when street light “As-Built” plans are submitted. The fees shall be paid in accordance with the most recent Fee Schedule. All installations shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the City for maintenance. As-Built and Warranties Construction As-Built Drawing Requirements (Street light Installations) Two sets of “As-Built” drawings must be given to the Public Works Inspector before SCE will energize a light. Maximum size of As-Built drawings shall be 11” x 17”. Please provide the following information in addition to As-Built Drawings: POLE - Manufacture’s name - Supplier’s name and contact information - Material - Height - Mast Arm Length - Footing Type FIXTURE - Manufacture’s name - Supplier’s name and contact information - Wattage and Voltage - Fuse size and type - Photocell manufacturer DISTRIBUTION - Conduit type and size - Wire type and gauge 39 - Pull box manufacturer - Service point I.D. number AS-BUILT DRAWINGS MUST INDICATE - North arrow - Streets referenced to nearest cross street - Pole locations, pull box locations, conduit runs, and service point location - Wattage/Lamp at each pole - Pole’s physical location in relation to corners or cul-de-sac 40 STREET LIGHT STANDARD DRAWINGS CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB ‐ ‐‐ ‐DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB DRAFT CITY OF LAKE ELSINORE STANDARD PLAN NO. APPROVED BY: CITY ENGINEER DATE REVISION BY:APPROVED DATE REMON HABIB LINE DRAFT 50 FORM AND APPLICATION 51 STREET LIGHT AUTHORIZATION FORM Engineering Department Date: Developer’s Name: Authorized Contact Person: Mailing Address: Phone No: Email Address: Project Name: Project Location: Tract/Ref No. Number of Street lights Anticipated: Project Description: ______Developer believes the above project is NOT required to provide for street lights ______Developer believes the project is required to provide for street lights per below SCE Schedule _____LS-1 _____LS-2 _____LS-3 I, the undersigned, do verify that all information listed above is current and accurate. Authorize Signature______________________________________ Date: __________ FOR OFFICE USE ONLY ______Developer is NOT required to provide for street lights ______Developer is required to provide for street lights per below SCE Schedule _____LS-1 _____LS-2 _____LS-3 Received By: __________________________________________Date: __________ Approved BY: __________________________________________Date: __________ 52 STREET LIGHT ACCEPTANCE FORM Engineering Department Date: Developer’s Name: Authorized Contact Person: Mailing Address: Phone No: Email Address: Project Name: Project Location: Tract/Ref No. Number of Street lights Constructed: Developer must submit all the below documents to ensure acceptance of the street lights and release of bonds are completed in a speedy manner. If the below items cannot be provided, please provide explanation, use additional sheets if necessary. - Copy of Signed Street Light Authorization Form - Copy(s) of Signed As-Built plans - Copy(s) of Bonds and Checks being requested for release. - Include copies of City receipts and signed bond copies - Copy(s) of SCE Street light Authorization (SLA) - Copy(s) of SCE signed Contract for Electric Service (CSD272) - Cabinet and Metering Addresses I, the undersigned, do verify that all information listed above is current and accurate. Authorize Signature _______________________________________________ Date: __________ FOR OFFICE USE ONLY Received By: _________________________________________________ Date: _________ Engineering Approved By: _____________________________________ _ Date: _________ Public Works Reviewed By: ______________________________________Date: _________ Building Reviewed By: __________________________________________Date: _________ Finance Reviewed By: ____________________________ ______________Date: _________ IT Reviewed By: ______________________________________________ Date: _________ 53 STREET LIGHT TRANSFER OF UTILITY SERVICE FORM Engineering Department Date: Developer’s Name: Authorized Contact Person: Mailing Address: Phone No: Email Address: Project Name: Project Location: Tract/Ref No. Number of Street lights Constructed: Developer must submit all the below documents to ensure transfer of utility service is completed in a speedy manner. If the below items cannot be provided, please provide explanation, use additional sheets if necessary. - Copy of Signed Street Light Acceptance Form - Copy(s) Current SCE Bills - Copy(s) of Turn on/Turn off form from SCE I, the undersigned, do verify that all information listed above is current and accurate. Authorize Signature: _______________________________________Date: _________ FOR OFFICE USE ONLY Received By: __________________________________________Date: __________ Approved BY: __________________________________________Date: __________ 54 DRAFT 55 DRAFT 56 DRAFT 1 SPECIAL PROVISIONS AMENDMENTS TO THE “GREENBOOK” STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS The following SECTIONS supplement the STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION, (“Greenbook”), 2021 edition, regional supplements, and all current supplements, and supersede any conflicting requirements, (A “conflicting requirement” is one that cannot operate by law within the Special Provisions listed herein or both cannot be physically produced). Otherwise, these Special Provisions only supplement the Standard Specifications. If any of the sections or part of sections below contradict or are not in conformance with current California Codes and Regulations at the time of bidding, the Contractor will assume that the current California Codes and Regulations supersedes that item in these specifications. When there are two or more specifications for the same item or work the contractor shall bid the more expensive item or work specified unless the one specified item specifically states that it shall take precedent over other specified items for the same work. SECTION 1 – GENERAL, TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE; AND SYMBOLS 1-1 GENERAL 1-1.1 General Add the following: The work embraced herein shall be done in accordance with the Special Provisions herein which amend, modify, or supplement the Standard Specifications and Sections 1 through 800 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, (Greenbook) current edition and the Standard Specifications, (Greenbook) current edition. 1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS Add or replace the following: Agency City of Lake Elsinore City Council of the City of Lake Elsinore, constituting the awarding authority of the City County County of Riverside Engineer City Engineer of the City of Lake Elsinore or his authorized representative 1-3 ABBREIVATIONS 1-3.2 Common Usage DRAFT 2 Add the following: Abbreviation Word or Words B&P Business and Professions Code Section No. CA California Administration Code Section No. CBC California Building Code, Pacific Coast Building Officials Conference of the International Conference of Building Officials CC Civil Code Section No. CGC California Government Code Section No. CVC California Vehicle Code Section No. DBE Disadvantaged Business Enterprise EDC Educational Code Section No. LC Labor Code Section No. PCC Public Contract Code Section No. RFI Request for Information 1-3.3 Institutions Add the following: Abbreviation Word or Words AAN American Association of Nurserymen AGA American Gas Association AI The Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers AISI American Iron & Steel Institute APHA American Public Health Association ASA American Standards Association (now ANSI) ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSD Community Services District of the City of Lake Elsinore EVMWD Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters OSA Office of State Architect RCTC Riverside County Transportation Commission WRCOG Western Riverside Council of Governments PCA Portland Cement Association RCFC & WCD Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District RDA Community Redevelopment Agency of the City of Lake Elsinore SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council USASI or USAS United States of America Standards Institute (Now ANSI) WMWD Western Municipal Water District DRAFT 3 1-4 UNITS OF MEASURE 1-4.2 Units of Measure and Their Abbreviations Add the following: U.S. Customary Unit Equal To 1 Acre 43,560 S.F. 1-7 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT 1-7.1 General Add the following: Within 10-working days after the date of the AGENCY's Notice of Award, the Contractor shall execute and return the following contract documents to the AGENCY: Contract Agreement Faithful Performance Bond Labor and Materials Bond Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance Certificate Workers' Compensation Insurance Certificate Failure to comply with the above will result in annulment of the award and forfeiture of the proposal guarantee. The Contract Agreement shall not be considered binding upon the AGENCY until executed by the authorized AGENCY officials. A corporation to which an award is made may be required, before the Contract Agreement is executed by the AGENCY, to furnish evidence of its corporate existence, of its right to enter into contracts in the State of California and that the officers signing the contract and bonds for the corporation have the authority to do so. 1-7.2 Contract Bonds Add the following: All bonds shall be submitted on the City’s bond forms included hereinbefore. Each bond shall be signed by both the Bidder and the Surety, with all signatures notarized and all acknowledgments attached thereto. The attorney-in-fact for a corporate Surety shall be registered as such in the State of California and file with each bond an original, notarized, corporately sealed, and effective dated Power of Attorney. Certified copies of the Power of Attorney are acceptable, providing they are contemporaneously signed, notarized, and corporately sealed. DRAFT 4 The cost of all bonds, including premiums and incidentals, shall be included in the Contract lump sum price paid for mobilization, and no additional compensation will be allowed. When the Contract does not include a Contract pay item for mobilization, all bond costs shall be considered to be included in and distributed proportionately through all of the Contract items of work. In the event any Contract pay items are deleted, or reduced in quantity or value, no payment will be made to the Contractor for the cost of any portion of the bonds. The Faithful Performance Bond shall remain in force for a period of 1 year after the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion. The Material and Labor Bond shall not be for less than 100 percent of the contract price and shall remain in force until 75 days after the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion. DRAFT 5 SECTION 2 – SCOPE OF THE WORK 2-1 WORK TO BE DONE Add the following subsection: 2-1.1 Order of the Work Order of work - Order of work shall conform to the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions. 1. Call Dig Alert and perform potholing for existing underground utilities. 2. Prepare traffic control plans and obtain approval from the City. Install project signs 10 days prior to start of construction. Mobilize equipment and materials as necessary. 4. Notify property owners located within project limits. 5. Construct improvements as shown on plans. 2-2 PERMITS In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first sentence to the first paragraph of Subsection 2-2, “Permits”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: No work shall be started until the Contractor has obtained all necessary licenses and permits. Therefore, the Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and give all notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful prosecution of the work and to the preservation of the public health and safety. The Contractor shall pay all cost incurred by the permit requirements. Fees will not be collected on those permits obtained from the City for City-owned projects. 2-2.1 Licenses Subsection 2-2.1 is hereby added to Section 2 of the Standard Specifications as follows: The Contractor and subcontractors shall obtain and incur all costs for licenses necessitated by his or her operations. Prior to starting any work, the Contractor and subcontractors shall be required to have a City of Lake Elsinore business license valid for at least the life of the Contract; subcontractors shall have business licenses valid for the time they are engaged in work under the Contract. 2-3 RIGHT OF ENTRY Add the following: At no time shall the Contractor encroach on Caltrans Right-of-Way without a proper encroachment permit from Caltrans. 2-4 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK Add the following subsection: 2-4.1 Special Considerations The Contractor will be required to closely coordinate all its work affecting private property in advance with the property owner. Any damage to this property due to the construction will be repaired and restored to the satisfaction of the owner. DRAFT 6 Property Owner Coordination – The Contractor shall inspect each property and make his own determination as to the extent of work required to remove existing fences or walls and grading adjacent to screen walls. The Contractor shall prepare a photo log of all existing on-site conditions at each property which shall be used as the basis for determining the adequacy of the Contractor’s on-site restoration work. Special Note: By submitting a Bid, the Contractor acknowledges that he has visited each individual property and investigated the level of effort required to construct the required improvements, including but not limited to removal existing fences and walls. Before any on-site work is initiated, the Contractor shall coordinate with each individual property owner to determine access requirements and verify the general scope of on-site restoration work required. Seventy-eight (48) hours advance notice shall be given to each property owner prior to initiating work. Interruption of access shall be minimized to the greatest degree possible and shall not exceed 6 hours. The Engineer shall review the completion of all on-site restoration work with each property owner prior to final acceptance. Using the Contractor’s photo log of existing on-site improvements, the Engineer shall determine if restoration meets or exceeds the condition prior to construction. The Contractor shall be responsible to obtain the property owner’s acceptance of all on-site restoration work. Utility Coordination – Construction will not require removals and relocation of existing utilities. 2-5 THE CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES 2-5.1 General In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 2-5.1, “General” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: Such equipment and facilities shall meet all requirements of applicable ordinances and laws. In respect to work performed under the contract, the second paragraph of Subsection 2- 5.1, “General”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include as follows: The Contractor shall provide a hand washing facility. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to public health and sanitation. 2-7 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY 2-7.1 General In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 2-7.1, “General,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: The City reserves the right to make changes in the work or eliminate any contract (bid) item of work without impairing the validity of the Contract. Such changes shall be made in accordance with any of the following methods: DRAFT 7 A. By written modification of Contract (Supplemental Agreement or Contract Change Order) ordered by the City Council. B. By written Contract Change Order, signed by the City Manager or City Engineer in the amounts specified by City Policy. C. All Contract modifications shall be signed by the Contractor. Changes in the work made pursuant to this section, “Changes in Work” and extensions of completion time made necessary by reason thereof, shall in no way release any Guarantee given by the Contractor of the Contract let hereunder. The Sureties in excluding the Bonds on the Contract made pursuant to the General Conditions shall be deemed to have expressly agreed to any change increasing the cost of the work and to any extension of time made by reason thereof. Such changes in the work shall not relieve or release the Sureties of Bonds executed for the work. Whenever a change is pending, the Contractor shall notify the City if it is necessary to halt other work in the area of the change that would be affected thereby, until such time as the change is authorized. Any change to the Contract amount shall be in a lump sum mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the City, except that when, in the opinion of the City such basis is not feasible, the change to the Contract amount shall be determined as provided for in Subsection 2-8, “Extra Work,” of the Standard Specifications. Each lump sum quotation from the Contractor shall be accompanied by sufficiently detailed estimates to permit verification of totals in accordance with Subsection 7-3, “PAYMENT,” of the Standard Specifications. When the work is to be done on a cost-plus-percentage basis, the Contractor shall submit daily work reports as required by the City showing all labor, material and equipment costs incurred, and upon completion of the work, a Summary of Costs, including overhead and profit, and in accordance with Subsection 7-3, “Payment,” of the Standard Specifications. The signature of the City’s inspector on the daily reports does not obligate the City to payment of any or all items of work listed on the City issued daily work reports, the inspector’s signature just acknowledges receipt of the City issued daily work report. The Engineer will review the daily report for the applicable items of work related to extra work. 2-8 EXTRA WORK Add the following: The Contractor shall not perform any extra work except upon written authorization from the Engineer. Any change in work shall conform to the original drawings and Specifications insofar as they may apply without conflict to the conditions involved in the change. 2-10 DISPUTED WORK In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 2-10, “Disputed Work” of the Standard Specification shall be deemed revised to read as follows: DRAFT 8 If unable to reach agreement under any of the foregoing procedures, the City may direct the Contractor to proceed with the work. Payment shall be made for such work as is later determined by negotiation between the parties or as is fixed by a court of law. 2-11 FORMAT FOR CHANGES IN WORK Subsection 2-11 is hereby added to Section 2 of the Standard Specifications as follows: 2-11.1 General A Contract Change Order will be issued for all changes in the work unless a supplemental agreement is made between the City and Contractor. The Contract Change Orders will be made on a City form and will contain a summary of all costs as supplied by the Contractor or agreed to by the City and Contractor. The Contractor shall use City Contract Change Order report forms (as follows): 2-11.2 (a) Change Order Summary Report 2-11.2 (d) Material Cost Report 2-11.2 (b) Labor Cost Report 2-11.2 (e) Equipment Cost Report 2-11.2 (c) Labor Rates Report 2-11.2 (f) Special Forces/Services Cost Report DRAFT 9 Date CCO Proposal No. Contractor Item No. Location 2-11.2 (a) CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY REPORT AMOUNT General Contractor 1. Labor Cost:...............................................................................$ 2. Material Cost: ......................................................................$ 3. Equipment Cost:.......................................................................$ 4. Special Forces/Services:...........................................................$ Subtotal Contractor Cost: ....................................................$ 5. Subcontractor/Sub-subcontractor Name a. Labor Cost ................................................................ $ b. Material Cost ........................................................... $ c. Equipment Cost ...................................................... $ Subtotal Subcontractor/Sub-subcontractor Cost ................$ 6. Subcontractor/Sub-subcontractor Name a. Labor Cost ............................................................... $ b. Material Cost .......................................................... $ c. Equipment Cost ...................................................... $ Subtotal Subcontractor/Sub-subcontractor Cost ................$ TOTAL CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER COSTS .........................$ DRAFT 10 Date CCO Proposal No. Contractor or Subcontractor Item No. Location 2-11.2 (b) LABOR COST REPORT CLASSIFICATION AND NAME HOURS HOURLY RATE EXTENDED AMOUNTS Classification: OT $ $ Name: REG $ $ Classification: OT $ $ Name: REG $ $ Classification: OT $ $ Name: REG $ $ Classification: OT $ $ Name: REG $ $ Classification: OT $ $ Name: REG $ $ Classification: OT $ $ Name: REG $ $ Classification: OT $ $ Name: REG $ $ Classification: OT $ $ Name: REG $ $ TOTAL LABOR $ Overhead/profit 33% ....................................................................................$ Total labor/overhead/profit ..........................................................................$ Subcontractor’s mark-up of total sub-subcontractor labor/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5%.................................................$ General contractor’s mark-up of total subcontractor or sub-subcontractor labor/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5% ..............$ Total ...............................................................................................................$ DRAFT 11 Date CCO Proposal No. Contractor or Subcontractor Item No. Location 2-11.2 (c ) LABOR RATES REPORT CLASSIFICATION: TAXABLE BASE: AMOUNT Base Hourly Pay $ Vacation $ TOTAL TAXABLE BASE $ TAXES & INSURANCE PERCENT AMOUNT Social Security Tax $ State Unemployment Tax $ Federal Unemployment Tax $ Workmen’s Compensation $ Liability & Umbrella Insurance $ TOTAL TAXES & INSURANCE $ FRINGE BENEFITS AMOUNT Pension $ Health & Welfare $ Training $ Other Fringe Benefits $ TOTAL FRINGE BENEFITS $ TOTAL LABOR RATE PER CLASSIFICATION $ DRAFT 12 Date CCO Proposal No. Contractor or Subcontractor Item No. Location 2-11.2 (d) MATERIAL COST REPORT INVOICE NO. DESCRIPTION AMOUNT 1. Material $ Sales Tax (Prevailing Tax Rate) 8.75% $ Subtotal $ 2. Material $ Sales Tax (Prevailing Tax Rate) 8.75% $ Subtotal $ 3. Material $ Sales Tax (Prevailing Tax Rate) 8.75% $ Subtotal $ SUBTOTAL MATERIAL COST $ NOTE: An itemized list of materials, manufacturers, serial numbers, invoices and other pertinent date shall be submitted along with the material cost report. Overhead/profit 15% ..............................................................................................$ Total material/overhead/profit ..............................................................................$ Subcontractor’s mark-up of total sub-subcontractor material/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5% ........................................$ General contractor’s mark-up of total subcontractor or sub-subcontractor material/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5% ....$ Total .........................................................................................................................$DRAFT 13 Date CCO Proposal No. Contractor or Subcontractor Item No. Location 2-11.2 (e) EQUIPMENT COST REPORT EQUIPMENT NO. (Description, Type, Size) HOURS HOURLY RATE EXTENDED AMOUNTS SUBTOTAL EQUIPMENT COST $ Overhead/profit 15% ................................................................................................... $ Total equipment/overhead/profit ................................................................................. $ Subcontractor’s mark-up of total sub-subcontractor equipment/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5% .......................................... $ General contractor’s mark-up of total subcontractor or sub-subcontractor equipment/overhead/profit (if applicable) 5% …….. $ Total ................................................................................................................................. $ DRAFT 14 Date CCO Proposal No. Contractor or Subcontractor Item No. Location 2-11.2 (f) SPECIAL FORCES/SERVICES COST REPORT INVOICE NO. DESCRIPTION AMOUNT 1. $ $ Subtotal $ 2. $ $ Subtotal $ 3. $ $ Subtotal $ SUBTOTAL MATERIAL COST $ NOTE: An itemized list of materials, manufacturers, serial numbers, invoices and other pertinent date shall be submitted along with the special forces/services cost report. Overhead/profit 15% ............................................................................................. $ Total Special Forces/Services Overhead/Profit ...................................................... $ DRAFT 15 SECTION 3 – CONTROL OF THE WORK 3-1 ASSIGNMENT Add the following subsection: 3-1.1 Contractor Indebtedness Indebtedness incurred by or on behalf of the Contractor for any cause in connection with this work must be paid by the Contractor. The City of Lake Elsinore has no obligation for any indebtedness or claim other than payments under the terms of the Contract, and the Contractor shall not represent that he or she has any authority to create by such obligation on behalf of the City. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City of Lake Elsinore, its officers, employees and agents from any loss, demand, damages, claims, or actions arising from or in connection with said indebtedness. 3-2 SELF PERFORMANCE Add the following: In respect to the work performed under the Contract, Subsection 3-2, “Self Performance,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: If the Bid submitted by the Contractor fails to meet at least fifty (50) percent of the amount of work required with its own forces, the Bid will be considered non- responsive and will be rejected with no further consideration. If after execution of the agreement the City discovers the Contractor is performing work amounting to less than fifty (50) percent of the Contracted amount, except for “Specialty Items,” the Contractor will be notified that he or she is in violation of the Contract and will have that portion subcontracted for which is less than fifty percent (50%) of the amount of work required to be performed by the Contractor deducted from payment to the Contractor. The deduction shall not exceed fifty (50) percent of the Contracted amount required to be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor will not be penalized by the City resulting from Contract Change Orders that increase subcontract items of work. Subcontracts shall include Provisions that the Contract between the City and the Contractor is part of the subcontract, and that all terms and Provisions of said Contract are incorporated in the subcontract. Subcontracts shall also contain certification by the subcontractor that said subcontractor is experienced in and qualified to do, and knowledgeable about, the subcontracted work. Copies of subcontracts shall be available to the Engineer at the time any litigation against the City concerning the project is filed. 3-3 SUBCONTRACTORS Add the following: In respect to the work performed under the Contract, Subsection 3-3, “Subcontractors” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: a. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of subcontractors and of persons employed by them, as the Contractor is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed upon their work. b. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the trades, subcontractors and material suppliers engaged upon their work. Neither the City nor any representative of the City will undertake to settle any difference DRAFT 16 between the Contractor and subcontractors or between subcontractors. 3-5 INSPECTION In respect to work performed under the contract, Section 3-5, “Inspection,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: Inspection of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations to fulfill the Contract. Defective work shall be made good and unsuitable materials may be rejected, notwithstanding that such defective work and materials have been previously approved by the Engineer or included in the quantities for progress payments. The inspector does not have authority to deviate from the plans and specifications, and to obligate the city financially. If any such work is concealed or performed without the prior inspection notice, then the work shall be subject to such tests or exposure as may be necessary to prove to the Engineer that the materials used and the work done are in conformity with the plans and specifications or may be removed and installed again at the discretion of the City Engineer. All labor, equipment and materials necessary for exposing, testing or complete removal, and installation or replacement shall be furnished by the Contractor at its expense. The Contractor shall replace, at its own expense, any materials or work damaged by exposure or testing. Cost of rework inspection incurred by the City will be deducted from the Contractor’s progress payments. Rework inspection cost is as follows: 1. Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the Contract time stated in the Contract and any previously authorized extensions thereof. 2. Extra inspections required for Contractor’s correction of defective work. 3. Overtime costs for acceleration of work done for Contractor’s convenience. 4. All associated costs including travel. 3-6 THE CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE In respect to work performed under the Contract Subsection 3-6, “The Contractor’s Representative,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to include the following: The Contractor’s representative shall give to the engineer a daily list of all labor, equipment, and materials used on the project for that day. The Contractor’s authorized representative shall be present at the site of the work at all times while work is actually in progress. Work by subcontractors will not be allowed in the absence of the contractor’s authorized representative, unless previous arrangements are agreed to by the Engineer. In the event a subcontractor attempts to perform work in the absence of the contractor’s authorized representative, a STOP WORK NOTICE will be issued to the subcontractor. When work is not in progress and during periods when work is suspended, arrangements acceptable to the Engineer shall be made for any emergency work which may be required. DRAFT 17 3-7 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3-7.1 General Add the following: The Contractor shall maintain a control set of Plans and Specifications on the project site at all times. All final locations determined in the field and any deviations from the Plans and Specifications shall be marked in red on this control set to show the as-built conditions. Upon completion of all work, the Contractor shall return the control set to the Engineer. Final payment will not be made until this requirement is met. 3-7.2 Precedence of Contract Documents Add the following: The Special Provisions shall include the Bid Proposal. 3-8 SUBMITTALS 3-8.1 General In respect to the work performed under the Contract, under Subsection 3-8.1, “General,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: Within fourteen (14) calendar days after the Award of Contract, the Contractor shall, at his or her expense, transmit by letter to the Engineer for review and acceptance, working drawings, shop drawings, supporting information, and/or other available instructive and descriptive information from the manufacturer, when and as required by the Plans or Special Provisions, or requested by the Engineer. Shop drawings will normally not be required for standard items in common use for which adequate manufacturers’ literature is available. The Contractor shall consecutively number, thoroughly check, approve and sign each submittal and transmit the submittals by letter to the Engineer for review. In the event that certain submittals are submitted without the Contractor’s approval signature or are unacceptable to the City, they will be rejected by the Engineer. The Contractor shall thereafter, correct said submittals and resubmit. In the event that in the process of development of the submittals, it is discovered that there are defects and/or errors on the Plans, resulting in conflict between said Plans and the submittals, or if the submittals show variation from the Plans and/or Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall thoroughly describe and explain said defects and/or conflicts in his or her transmittal letter to the Engineer. The Engineer’s review of the submittals will be for general design and arrangement only and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in the submittals or of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the correctness of the submittals, for shop fits and field connections, and for the results obtained by use of such submittals. The Contractor shall verify and be fully responsible for all dimensions and job-site conditions affecting the work and shall be responsible for furnishing and installing the proper materials required by the Contract, whether or not DRAFT 18 indicated on the submittals when reviewed. The Contractor will not be given an extension of contract time due to the failure of the Contractor to provide submittals as required by the Specifications in a timely manner. 3-10 SURVEYING 3-10.1 General In respect to work performed under the contract Subsection 3-10.1, “General,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read: The contractor will provide surveying and construction staking required for the construction of this project, consistent with industry standards and as determined by the Engineer. The Contractor shall establish his own finish elevation control from the offset construction staking. Payment for surveying service and/ or setting additional control shall be considered as included in the price bid for the applicable items of work. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, at least 7 days before starting work. The contractor shall preserve all survey monuments, lot stakes (tagged), and benchmarks. The Contractor shall not disturb survey monuments, lot stakes (tagged), or benchmarks without the consent of the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear the expense of replacing any that may be disturbed without permission. Replacement shall be done only under the direction of the Engineer by a Registered Land Surveyor or a Registered Civil Engineer authorized to practice land surveying within the State of California. The Contractor shall preserve bench marks, survey monuments, survey stakes and points set for lines, grades or measurements of work in their proper places unless removal is authorized by the Engineer. In case of their impending removal or destruction by his/her operations he/she shall be responsible for notifying the City Engineer prior to their removal. Failure to provide such notification will result in in the Contractor being liable for all costs associated with their replacement. The cost of re-staking due to the negligence of the Contractor will be deducted from the Contractor’s progress payment. 3-10.2 Lines and Grade Add the following: Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Special Provisions, all lines and grades will be established by the Contractor. Add the following subsection: 3-10.3 Measurement and Payment The Contract unit price paid for construction survey and staking shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, surveyor, supervision, and incidentals for doing all the work, and no separate or additional compensation will be allowed therefore. 3-12 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE 3-12.1 General DRAFT 19 In respect to work performed under the Contract, the second paragraph of Subsection 3-12.1, “General,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: When and as often as required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and operate self- loading motorized street sweeper equipped with a functional water spray system, to keep paved areas affected by the work clean and dust free. If the sweeper fails to keep the paved areas clean and dust free then the Contractor shall provide the additional sweepers or stop the work until the paved areas are clean and dust free. The use of water resulting in mud on paved areas will be not permitted. In respect to work performed under the contract, Subsection 3-12.1, “General”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include as follows: All cleanup costs shall be included in the various related items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed as a result of suspension of work for failure to comply with clean up orders. 3-12.2 Air Pollution Control Add the following: The contract item Dust Abatement includes the action necessary to prevent, reduce or control dust within the work area as required completing the work. The Contractor shall carry out proper and efficient measures to prevent his operations from producing dust in amounts damaging to property or causing a nuisance or harm to persons living nearby or occupying buildings in the vicinity of the work. The Contractor shall implement appropriate fugitive dust control measures including watering, stabilized construction access to reduce tracking of mud or dirt onto public roads, covering trucks hauling loose dirt offsite and street sweeping of track-out. The Contractor can contact SCAQMD for their Rule 403 and Rule 403.1 implementation handbooks which contain a detailed listing of reasonably available dust control measures. The Contractor shall prepare and implement a dust control plan in accordance with the requirements set forth in the latest version of the SCAQMD Rule 403 and Rule 403.1. The methods to be used for controlling dust in the construction area and along haul roads shall be approved by the Engineer prior to starting any work included in this contract. If the Contractor's operations meet the Rule 403 definition of "Large Operations", the dust control plan shall be submitted to SCAQMD for review and approval prior to start of operations. Construction equipment idling shall not exceed 10 minutes to ensure that the SCAQMD daily thresholds are not exceeded. The contract lump sum price paid for Dust Abatement shall include full compensation for all direct and indirect costs incurred under this section. This payment will be made on a basis of the percentage of work completed on the entire project. DRAFT 20 3-12.6.4 Dewatering In respect to work performed under the contract, the second paragraph of Subsection 3- 12.6.4, “Dewatering”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include as follows: The Contractor shall maintain drainage within and through the work areas. 3-13 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND WARRANTY 3-13.3 Warranty In respect to work performed under the Contract, add to the first paragraph of Subsection 3- 13.3, “Warranty” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: The Contractor shall warranty that all work performed by him/her under this Contract fully meets the requirements thereof as to quality of workmanship and materials furnished. If any defects in materials or workmanship become evident within a period of one year from the date of the acceptance of the work by the City Council, the Contractor shall, at his or her own expense, make any repair or replacement necessary, including repair of settled backfill and resurfacing, pay administrative costs relative to inspection, testing, Contract administration, and attorney fees to restore the work to full compliance with the Plans and Specifications. Such repair and replacement shall be made promptly upon receipt of written notice from the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to make such repair and replacement promptly, the Engineer may cause the work to be done and the costs incurred thereby shall become the liability of the Contractor and his or her Surety. If in the opinion of the Engineer, defective work creates a dangerous condition or requires immediate correction or attention to prevent further loss to the City or to prevent interruption of operations of the City, the City will attempt to give the notice required by this article. If the Contractor cannot be contacted or does not comply with the Engineer’s request for correction within a reasonable time as determined by the Engineer, the City may, notwithstanding the Provisions of this article, proceed to make such correction or provide such attention, and the costs of such correction or attention shall be charged against the Contractor. Such action by the City will not relieve the Contractor of the guarantees provided in this article or elsewhere in this Contract. This article does not in any way limit the warranty on any items for which a longer warranty is specified or on any items for which a manufacturer gives a guarantee for a longer period, nor does it limit other remedies of the City in respect to latent defect, fraud implied warranties, or assigned claims. Warranty does not include items of maintenance with normal ware or items over which the Contractor has no control. Payment for fulfilling the requirements of this section shall be considered to be included in the prices paid for the various Contract items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. DRAFT 21 3-14 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS Section 3-14, “Project Identification Sign” is hereby added to Section 3, of the Standard Specifications as follows: The Contractor shall provide and erect project identification signs at the locations noted in the Plans or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. The signs shall be furnished by the Contractor, and shall be labeled as shown in the Appendix. The project identification signs shall be erected five working days prior to the start of work. The project identification signs shall be 1.22 m x 2.44 m (4’ x 8’) in size, with two (2) 100 mm x 100 mm x 4.88 m (4” x 4” x 16’) posts. The sign posts shall be set 1.5 m (5’) in good, solid ground, and the backfill shall be carefully tamped into place. The Contractor shall revise all misspellings and any other corrections on the sign at no extra cost to the City. If the Contractor is ordered to revise the Mayor's name and council member's name(s) on the sign, after the project identification sign has been approved by the Engineer, a Contract Change Order will be issued in accordance with Subsection 2-7, "Changes Initiated by the Agency," of the Standard Specifications for the cost of changing names. Upon completion of the project, each project identification sign shall be removed from the project limits and disposed of by the Contractor. The cost of project identification sign removal and disposal shall be considered incidental to the other items of work and no separate or additional payment will be allowed therefore. The Contract unit price paid for project identification signs shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment materials and tools required for performing all work necessary to paint, label, assemble, and for erecting project identification signs complete in place, and no separate or additional compensation will be allowed therefore. 3-15 AGENCY PHONE NUMBERS Subsection 3-15 is hereby added to Section 3 of the Standard Specifications as follows: The following list of individuals or entities, that may have facilities in the area to be improved hereunder is merely for the Contractor’s information and may not be accurate or complete: Time Warner Communications 951.549.3977 City of Lake Elsinore, Public Works Division 951.674.3124 City of Lake Elsinore, PW Operations Department 951.674.5170 City of Lake Elsinore Police Department 951.275.3300 City of Lake Elsinore Fire Department 951.674.2161 Elsinore Valley Municipal Water District 951.674.3146 Lake Elsinore Unified School District 951.674.7731 Comcast Cable 951.549.3997 Riverside Transit Agency 951.684.0850 SBC (formerly Pacific Bell) 800.750.2355 DRAFT 22 Southern California Edison Company 951.928.8206 Southern California Gas Company (Distribution) 909.335.7582 Southern California Gas Company (Transmission) 213.244.2268 Trash Collection (CR&R) 800.755.8112 Underground Service Alert 800.227.2600 Verizon 951.929.9493 3-16 SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA EDISON COMPANY TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE CONNECTION FOR CONSTRUCTION POWER Subsection 3-16 is hereby added to Section 3 of the Standard Specifications as follows: The Contractor shall apply for and pay all charges levied by Southern California Edison Company for rendering temporary electrical service to this project. Charges can be obtained by contacting Southern California Edison Company, 26100 Menifee Road, Romoland, California 92585, Phone 951.928.8288. The foregoing address and telephone numbers are for informational assistance only and may not be accurate or complete. DRAFT 23 SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIALS 4-1 GENERAL 4-1.1 Property Rights in Materials Subsection 4-1.1 is hereby added to Section 4 of the Standard Specifications as follows: Nothing in the Contract shall be construed as vesting in the Contractor any right, title or interest in material used in the work after it has been attached or affixed to the work or the soil. All such material shall become the property of the City upon being so attached or affixed. 4-1.2 Foreign Materials. Subsection 4-1.2 is hereby added to Section 4 of the Standard Specifications as follows: Materials which are manufactured, produced or fabricated outside of the United States shall be delivered to a distribution point in California, unless otherwise required in these Specifications or the Special Provisions, where they shall be retained for a sufficient period of time to permit inspection, sampling, and testing. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time for acts or events occurring outside of the United States and it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to deliver materials obtained from outside of the United States to the point of entry into the continental United States in sufficient time to permit timely delivery to the job site. The Contractor, at no cost to the City, shall supply the facilities and arrange for any testing required in California, which the City is not equipped to perform. All testing by the Contractor shall be subject to witnessing by the Engineer. The manufacturer, producer or fabricator of foreign material shall furnish to the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance in accordance with the provisions in Subsection 4-5 “Certificate of Compliance.” In addition, certified mill test reports or actual specimen tests clearly identifiable to the lot of material shall be furnished where required in these Specifications or otherwise required by the Engineer. If the welding of steel for structural steel members or the casting and pre- stressing of precast pre-stressed concrete members is to be performed outside of the United States, the following requirements shall apply: A. The fabrication shall be performed only within the plants and by fabricators who have previously established, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that they have the experience, knowledge, trained manpower, quality controls, equipment and other facilities required to produce the quality and quantity of work required. At the option of the Engineer, prequalification of the plant and fabricator will be established either by the submission of detailed written proof thereof or DRAFT 24 through in-plant inspection by the Engineer or the Engineer’s representative, or both. B. The Contractor shall make written application to the Engineer for approval for the foreign fabrication at the earliest possible time and in no case later than 50 days in advance of the planned start of fabrication. The application shall list the specific units or portion of a work that will be fabricated outside of the United States. C. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer, in writing, at least 20 days in advance of the actual start of any of the foreign fabrication. D. All documents pertaining to the Contractor, including but not limited to, correspondence, Bid documents, working drawings and data shall be written in the English language and all numerical data shall use the International System of Units (SI) for measurement. 4-1.3 State Specification Number Subsection 4-1.3 is hereby added to Section 4 of the Standard Specifications as follows: The State Specification number of material furnished on the Contract shall conform to the number specified in these Specifications or the Special Provisions for the material involved, except that material conforming to a later specification issue will be acceptable. 4-2 PROTECTION In respect to work performed under the contract, Subsection 4-2, “Protection,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: Materials shall not be stored in the right-of-way unless written permission is given by the Engineer. 4-4 TESTING In respect to work performed under the Contract the third sentence of the first paragraph of Subsection 4-4, “Testing” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: Unless otherwise called for hereinafter in these Special Provisions, all testing will be performed by the City in such number and at such locations as deemed necessary by the Engineer to insure compliance with the Plans and Specifications; the cost of all initial testing will be borne by the City; the cost of all retesting will be borne by the Contractor, and the amount due the City for said retesting will be deducted from the Contractor’s progress payments. DRAFT 25 Add the following subsection: 4-4.1 Material Testing All materials shall first be tested and satisfactorily passed in accordance with the requirements of the plans and these specifications, before incorporating said material in the work. Materials placed otherwise shall be considered defective and will be subject to rejection. The cost of testing of materials and workmanship shall be paid by the City. The cost of re-testing of materials and workmanship shall be at the expense of the contractor. The contractor, at his expense, shall deliver materials for testing to the place and at the time designated by the Engineer. All fill, sub-base, base, under pavement, curb, gutter, and sidewalk to be completed in place to 95% relative compaction except where specified otherwise. The earthwork and geotechnical related compaction will be tested for compliance by a Registered Soils Engineer contracted and scheduled by the contractor. The test results will be submitted to the City for approval. The contractor will be paid by the City for tests that pass the minimum compaction requirements. Any testing by the Soils Engineer due to failure to achieve minimum compaction will be paid for by the Contractor. 4-5 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE In respect to work performed under the contract, Subsection 4-5, “Certificate of Compliance,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: A Certification of Compliance shall be furnished prior to the use of any materials for which these Specifications or the Special Provisions require that a certificate be furnished. In addition, when so authorized in these Specifications or in the Special Provisions, the Engineer may permit the use of certain materials or assemblies prior to sampling and testing if accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance. The certificate shall be signed by the manufacturer of the material or the manufacturer of assembled materials and shall state that the materials involved comply in all respects with the requirements of the specifications. A Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished with each lot of material delivered to the work and the lot so certified shall be clearly identified in the certificate. All materials used on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance may be sampled and tested at any time. The fact that material is used on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorporating material in the work which conforms to the requirements of the Plans and Specifications, and any material not conforming to the requirements will be subject to rejections, whether in place or not. The City reserves the right to refuse to permit the use of material on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance. 4-6 TRADE NAMES In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 4-6, “Trade Names” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: DRAFT 26 The words “or equal” shall be interpreted to mean “or approved as equal in the opinion of the Engineer.” Within ten (10) working days from the date of the Award of Contract, the Contractor shall, at his/her expense, submit a written request to the Engineer for each desired substitution, accompanied by complete descriptive information from the manufacturer, samples as requested by the Engineer, complete detailed test results from a licensed independent testing laboratory of the City’s choice if requested by the Engineer, and if requested by the Engineer, an evaluation report from a qualified licensed professional engineer, all for final evaluation by the Engineer. If in the Engineer’s opinion, the requested substitution is of lesser quality or in variance with that specified, or if the information submitted is insufficient or incomplete, the requested substitution will be disallowed, and the specified materials or equipment shall be furnished. No request for substitutions submitted after the 10-day deadline specified hereinabove, will be considered. The City may describe in the “Notice Inviting Bids,” in the Bidder’s Schedule, Specifications, Plans, or Request for Proposals that a particular material, product, thing, or service is designated by specific brand or trade name in accordance with Section 3400 of the Public Contract Code for either of the following purposes: a) In order that a field test or experiment may be made to determine the product’s suitability for future use, b) In order to match other products in use on a particular public improvement, either completed or in the course of completion. DRAFT 27 SECTION 5 – LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 5-4 INSURANCE Liability Insurance shall be in accordance with Section 9 of the Agreement. In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 5-4, “Insurance,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to have been deleted. DRAFT 28 SECTION 6 – PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK In respect to work performed under the Contract of Subsection 6-1, “Construction Schedule and Commencement of Work”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include as follows: The Contractor’s representative and the Contractor’s principal subcontractors shall attend the City’s pre-construction meeting. Other agencies and utilities involved in this project may also have separate pre-construction meetings; the contractor and applicable subcontractors are required to attend the agency/utility meetings. In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first sentence of the first paragraph of Subsection 6-1, “Construction Schedule and Commencement of Work,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: The Contractor shall submit a proposed construction schedule (Gant Chart) for the entire work to the Engineer for review and approval five (5) working days prior to the Pre-Construction Meeting and revised schedules thereafter as required by the Engineer when the Contractor’s activities differ or are expected to differ from the latest existing schedule. If the Contractor has not submitted a Construction Schedule upon the date to start work in the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor will not be allowed to start work and will not be granted additional time. The Contractor shall refer to the PROJECT SPECIFIC SCOPE OF WORK section in the Technical Provisions for any required or preferred sequence of work. In respect to work performed under the Contract, the second paragraph of Subsection 6-1, “Construction Schedule and Commencement of Work,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to have been deleted. 6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK The following sentence is hereby added to Section 6-2: The Contractor shall provide the following: 1. The Contractor must place concrete within 3 working days after the removal of existing concrete. Asphalt Concrete pavement replacement at driveways shall be installed within 3 calendar days of pouring concrete. 2. AC pavement replacement shall be installed the same day as removals are performed. 3. The Contractor shall clean up all rubble/debris piles daily. 4. The Contractor shall not commence any cold milling operation unless the traffic signal camera is in full operation and shall not be performed more than 3 calendar days ahead of paving. DRAFT 29 5. Permanent striping shall be performed within 72 hours of paving on all streets. 6. Manhole frames and covers to be raised shall be raised and patched with within 3 calendar days of final day of overlay paving. FAILURE OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COMPLY WITH THE AFOREMENTIONED WORK SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS, (1)-(6), DUE TO CONDITIONS UNDER HIS CONTROL WILL RESULT IN DAMAGES BEING SUSTAINED BY THE AGENCY. SUCH DAMAGES ARE, AND WILL CONTINUE TO BE, IMPRACTICAL AND EXTREMELY DIFFICULT TO DETERMINE. FOR EACH DAY THE CONTRACTOR FAILS TO CONFORM TO THESE REQUIREMENTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY TO THE AGENCY, OR HAVE WITHHELD MONIES DUE TO HIM THE SUM OF FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($500.00), AS LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR EACH CALENDAR DAY. All costs to the Contractor for protecting, removing, restoring, relocating, repairing, replacing, or reestablishing existing improvements shall be included in the bid. The Contractor shall protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage from any cause whatever, and shall provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work. He or she shall provide for the safety and good condition of all work until final acceptance of the work by the City, and shall replace all damaged or defective work, materials, and equipment before requesting final acceptance. The Contractor is and shall be held responsible for the protection and correction of the work of all trades from smears, splashes, stains, or damages that might occur in the process of the work. The Contractor shall constantly monitor the worksite and all equipment and appurtenances associated with the project for vandalism/graffiti. Equipment, materials, or signs containing graffiti shall not be brought to the project. Any vandalism/graffiti found within the project limits or worksite by the Contractor or the City shall be removed or repaired by the Contractor within 24 hours. Failure to correct the situation to the satisfaction of the City within 24 hours will result in the Agency taking corrective action and deducting the cost from any monies due to the Contractor. Prior to final acceptance of the project the Contractor shall remove all markings including, but not limited to, USA markings from the project area to the satisfaction of the City Engineer. Full compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and tools required for protection of work, including but not limited to graffiti removal, vandalism repair and/or USA marking removal, as ordered by the Engineer, shall be considered as being included in the various Contract items of work and no separate or additional compensation will be allowed therefore. 6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION 6-3.2 Contract Time Accounting In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 6-3.2, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to include the following: DRAFT 30 The Contract time, commencement of work, and completion of work, including corrective items of work, shall be in accordance with Section 3 of the Agreement. Extensions of time, when granted by the Engineer, will be in working days and will otherwise be in accordance with the Standard Specifications and given in writing by Contract Change Order. 6-3.3 Holidays Subsection 6-3.3 is hereby added to Section 6 of the Standard Specifications as follows: The following days have been designated as holidays by the City of Lake Elsinore: New Year’s Day January 1 Martin Luther King, Jr. Day 3rd Monday in January President’s Day 3rd Monday in February Memorial Day Last Monday in May Juneteenth June 19 Independence Day July 4 Labor Day 1st Monday in September Veterans’ Day November 11 Thanksgiving 4th Thursday in November Day after Thanksgiving 4th Friday in November Christmas Day December 25 If a holiday falls upon a Sunday, the following Monday shall be the day the holiday is observed, and if a holiday falls upon a Saturday, the preceding Friday shall be the day the holiday is observed. 6-3.4 Work Outside Regular Hours Subsection 6-3.4 is hereby added to Section 6 of the Standard Specifications as follows: No work shall be allowed outside of regular working hours (in general unless specified, 7:00 a.m. to 3:30 p.m., on weekdays), without the approval of the Engineer, except work items relating to maintenance and cleanup of the work area for the purpose of public safety and convenience. The Contractor shall not fuel, grease, or perform work on the equipment or trucks between the hours of 7:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m., Monday through Friday, and at no time on Saturday, Sunday or holidays. Should work outside of the above hours be approved, inspection, testing and construction engineering costs as a result of the work outside of regular working hours shall be paid by the Contractor at the hourly rate, including fringe benefits, at straight time or time and one-half rates as applicable, or if consultant inspection service is retained by the City, then the Contractor will reimburse the City for the actual cost. Under no circumstances will work outside regular hours be allowed without full-time inspection. 6-4 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME In respect to work performed under the contract, Subsection 6-4, “Delays and Extensions of Time,” DRAFT 31 of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: In accordance with Section 4215, of the California Government Code, if such utilities have not been identified with reasonable accuracy in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall be compensated for the cost of protecting, removing, relocating, and repairing damage to main or trunk line utility facilities located on the job site, where not due to the failure of the Contractor to exercise reasonable care; and for the operating costs for equipment on the project necessarily idled during such work. 6-4.1 General In respect to work performed under the Contract, add to the first paragraph of Subsection 6-4.1, “General” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: Work will not be allowed on days predicted by the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SAQMD) to be “Stage III” smog episode days. Notification will be given to the Contractor’s representative by the Engineer no later than 3:00 p.m. on the day preceding the predicted “Stage III” episode day. The Contractor will be entitled to an extension of time for such delays, but the Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays. Work required to maintain the project site in a safe condition (including but not limited to maintenance of traffic control), shall be allowed on all days. 6-4.2 Extension of Time Add the following: If the Contractor is delayed in completing the work by reasons of any change ordered by the City, the time for completion of work will be extended for a period equal to the number of days by which the entire project has been delayed because of such change. The Contractor will not be liable for liquidated damages for such period of time and shall have no claim for any other compensation for any such delay except as provided herein. 6-6 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK 6-6.2 Archaeological and Paleontological Discoveries In respect to work performed under the contract Subsection 6-6.2 “Archaeological and Paleontological Discoveries,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to include: During construction, if subsurface archaeological resources are encountered, they shall be left in place and a qualified archaeologist shall be called in to examine the findings. Work shall not resume, where discovery was made, until the archaeologist has reviewed the findings, made recommendations for their removal or preservation, and has a reasonable opportunity to carry out the necessary mitigation procedures. An extension of time will be granted only where the Contractor shows that there is no possible way to DRAFT 32 proceed with other work items. 6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES In respect to work performed under the Contract, the last sentence of the first paragraph of Subsection 6-9, “Liquidated Damages” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: Liquidated damages shall be in the amount as specified in the Agreement and shall be for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time allowed under this Contract for the completion of the work, including corrective items of work as adjusted by the Contract Change Order. The amount of the liquidated damages shall be deducted from payments due the Contractor. In respect to work performed under the Contract, the following paragraph is added after the last paragraph of Subsection 6-9, “Liquidated Damages” of the Standard Specifications: The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for delay in completion of the project, when such delay was caused by the failure of the City or the Owner of a utility to provide for removal or relocation of an existing unknown utility facility. DRAFT 33 SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 7-3 PAYMENT 7-3.1 General In respect to work performed under the Contract, the ninth paragraph of Subsection 7-3.1, “General,” of the Standard Specifications, shall be deemed revised to include the following: In the event that one or more Stop Notices are filed with the City, an amount equal to 125% of the total of the amount(s) called for therein will be retained by the City until the demand(s) have been satisfied in accordance with applicable laws. 7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first, second and third paragraphs of Subsection 7-3.2, “Partial and Final Payment,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: Except as otherwise provided for under Subsection 7-2, “Lump Sum Work,” hereinabove for L.S. items, the Contractor will be entitled to no more than one progress payment per month. Thirty days prior and prerequisite to each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed estimate and invoice of the total quantity and value of work completed since the cut-off date for the previous progress payment. The Engineer will make the final determination as to the actual quantity and value of work completed for which payment will be made. Five percent (5%) of the value will be deducted from each progress payment and retained by the City until later released as specified hereinafter. Before he or she shall be entitled to final payment of the retention withheld from the progress payments, the Contractor shall execute and file with the City a conditional or unconditional waiver and release, upon a form which complies with Section 3262, of the Civil Code, and which is acceptable to the City, releasing the City from all claims or liability relating to undisputed Contract amounts for work performed in relation to said amount. If pursuant to a conditional release, such release shall contain or have attached a list of all Contract amounts as to which a dispute exists. The Contractor will be permitted the substitution of securities for any monies withheld by a public agency to ensure performance under the Contract. At the request and expense of the Contractor, securities equivalent to the amount withheld shall be deposited with the City, or with a state or federally chartered bank as the escrow agent, who shall pay such monies to the Contractor upon satisfactory completion of the Contract. Securities eligible for investment shall include those listed in Section 16430 of the Government Code or bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit. The Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of any securities substituted for monies withheld and shall receive any dividend interest thereon. Such substitutions shall be conducted in accordance with Section 22300, of the Public Contract Code. DRAFT 34 The final payment of the five percent (5%) retention withheld from the progress payments shall not be due and payable until the expiration of at least 35 calendar days from the date of recording of the “Notice of Completion” with the County Recorder. In respect to work performed under the Contract, the fourth paragraph of Subsection 7-3.2, “Partial and Final Payment,” of the Standard Specifications, shall be deemed revised to include the following: The amount of liquidated damages will be deducted from earned progress payments due the Contractor. 7-3.3 Delivered Materials Subsection 7-3.3, “Delivered Materials,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: Unless included in the Bid Schedule, or unless otherwise called for in these General Provisions, no payment will be made for materials or equipment delivered but not yet incorporated in the work. 7-3.4 Mobilization In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 7-3.4, “Mobilization,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: Mobilization shall consist of preparatory work and operations, including but not limited to, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site; for the establishment of all offices, buildings, construction yards, sanitary facilities, and any other facilities necessary for work on the project; and for all other work and operations which must be performed or costs incurred prior to beginning work on the various contract items on the project site, as well as the related demobilization costs anticipated at the completion of the project. The cost of all bonds and insurance policies, including premiums and incidentals, shall be included in Mobilization. No additional compensation will be allowed for additional mobilizations required, including but not limited to, delays caused by the relocation of existing utility facilities shown on the plans or discovered during construction operations. The amount credited for Mobilization on each monthly progress payment shall be based upon the percentage of the total of the amounts credited for work on all the other contract items for that monthly progress payment, up to a cumulative limit of eighty (80) percent of the contract item price for Mobilization. The remaining twenty (20) percent of the contract item price for Mobilization shall be paid with the final progress payment. The deletion of work or the addition of extra work as provided for herein shall not affect the price paid for Mobilization. The contract lump sum price paid for mobilization shall include full compensation for furnishing all DRAFT 35 labor, materials, tool, equipment, the cost of all bonds and insurance policies, and incidentals, and for doing the work involved in mobilization as specified herein. 7-3.5.2 Increases of More Than 25 Percent In respect to the work performed under the contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 7-3.5.2 “Increases of More than 25 Percent” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: Should the actual quantity of a major item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications, exceed the Bid quantity by more than 25 percent, a Contract Change Order will be issued and payment for the quantity in excess of 125 percent of the Bid quantity will be made on the basis of the extension of contract with price adjustment in the Contract Unit Price mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Agency, Subsection 7-3.7 “Agreed Prices”, of the Standard Specifications or at the option of the Engineer, on the basis of Subsection 2-8 “Extra Work” of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor will be paid at the contract unit price for minor bid items regardless of if there is an increase in excess of twenty-five percent (25%) in the quantity listed in the bid. 7-3.5.3 Decreases of More Than 25 Percent In respect to the work performed under the contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 7-3.5.3 “Decrease of More than 25 Percent”, of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as following: Should the actual quantity of a major item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price, and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications, be less than 75 percent of the Bid quantity, and adjustment in payment will not be made unless so requested in writing by the Contractor. If the Contractor so requests, a Contract Change Order will be issued and payment will be made on the basis of an adjustment in the Contract Unit Price mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Agency, or at the option of the Engineer, on the basis of Subsection 2-8 “Extra Work” of the Standard Specifications; however, in no case will payment be less than would be made for the actual quantity at the Contract Unit Price. The Contractor will be paid at the Contract Unit Price for minor bid items regardless of if there is a decrease in excess of twenty-five (25%) percent in the quantity listed in the bid. 7-4 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK 7-4.2 Basis for Establishing Costs 7-4.2.1 Labor In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 7-4.2.1, “Labor” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: DRAFT 36 The costs of labor will be the actual cost for wages prevailing locally for each crafter type of worker (including foreman when authorized by the Engineer) performing the extra work at the time the extra work is done, plus, liability insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs, as well as assessments or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements. To the actual wages, as defined above, will be added a labor surcharge set forth in the California Department of Transportation publication entitled “Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates,” which is in effect on the date upon which the work is accomplished, and which is part of the contract. The labor surcharge shall constitute full compensation for all payments imposed by state and federal laws and for all other payments made to, or on behalf of the workers, other than actual wages, subsistence and travel paid to the workers. Labor surcharge includes Workers’ Compensation Insurance, Social Security, Medicare, Federal Unemployment, State Unemployment and State Training Taxes. 7-4.2.2 Materials In respect to the work performed under the contract, Subsection 7-4.2.2 “Materials,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to include the following: If the Contractor does not furnish satisfactory evidence of the cost of the materials from the actual supplier thereof within a specified time period after the date of delivery of material, the Engineer reserves the right to establish the cost of the materials at the lowest current wholesale prices at which the materials were available, in the quantities concerned, delivered to the location of the work, less any discounts. 7-4.2.3 Tool and Equipment Rental In respect to work performed under the Contract, the first paragraph of Subsection 7 -4.2.3, “Tool and Equipment Rental,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed revised to read as follows: Individual pieces of equipment or tools not listed in the Equipment Rental Rates and having a replacement value of $200 or less, whether or not consumed by use, shall be considered to be small tools and no payment will be made therefore. The Contractor will be paid for the use of equipment at the rental rates listed for such equipment in the Department of Transportation publication entitled, “Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates,” which is in effect on the date upon which the work is accomplished. Move in and out, or minimum charges other than the hourly rate, shall not apply to equipment available from the force already on the job site. Equipment which is rented from a local equipment agency, other than Contractor owned, the Contractor will be paid at the hourly rate shown on the rental agency invoice or agreement for the time used on extra work. If a minimum equipment rental amount is required by the local equipment rental agency, the actual amount charged will be paid to the Contractor. DRAFT 37 If it is deemed necessary by the Engineer to use equipment not listed in the Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates publication, a suitable rental rate for that equipment will be established by the Engineer. The Contractor may furnish any cost data that might assist the Engineer in the establishment of the rental rate. If the rental rate established by the Engineer is $10.00 per hour or less, the provisions above concerning rental of equipment from a local equipment agency shall apply. Rental time will not be allowed while equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns. When owner operated equipment is used to perform extra work to be paid for on a force account basis, the Contractor will be paid for the equipment and operator as follows: Payment for the equipment will be made at the rental rates listed for such equipment in the Department of Transportation publication entitled “Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates,” which is in effect on the date upon which the work is accomplished. Payment for the cost of labor will be made in conformance with the provisions in Subsection 7-4.2.1 “Labor” of the Standard Specifications as revised. 7-4.3 Markup In respect to work performed under the Contract Subsection 7-4.3 (.1 & .2), “Markup,” of the Standard Specifications, shall be deemed revised to read as follows: The markup for overhead and profit on work added to the Contract shall be according to the following schedule: 1. For work performed by the Contractor’s force, the added cost for overhead and profit shall be thirty-three percent (33%) to the cost of labor, fifteen percent. (15%) to the cost of materials, and fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of equipment rentals. 2. For work performed by a subcontractor, the added cost for overhead and profit shall be thirty- three percent (33%) to the cost of labor, fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of materials, and fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of equipment rentals, to which the Contractor may add five percent (5%) of the subcontractor’s price of the work. The additional five percent (5%) mark-up shall reimburse the Contractor for additional administrative costs, and no other additional payment will be made by reason of performance of the extra work by a subcontractor. 3. For work performed by a sub-subcontractor, the added cost for overhead and profit shall be thirty-three percent (33%) to the cost of labor, fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of materials, and fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of equipment rentals, to which subcontractor and general Contractor may add an additional five percent (5%) each of the total price from DRAFT 38 the lower tier subcontractor. The additional five percent (5%) mark-up shall reimburse the subcontractor and general Contractor for additional administrative costs, and no other additional payment will be made by reason of performance of the extra work by a subcontractor. 4. For work performed by special force or other special services, the Engineer and the Contractor, by agreement, will determine that a special service or an item of extra work cannot be performed by the forces of the Contractor or those of any of his subcontractors, such service or extra work item may be performed by a specialist. Invoices for such service or item of extra work on the basis of the current market price thereof may be accepted without complete itemization of labor, material, and equipment rental costs when it is impracticable and not in accordance with the established practice of the special service industry to provide such complete itemization. In those instances wherein a Contractor is required to perform extra work necessitating a fabrication or matching process in a fabrication or machine shop facilities away from the job site, the charges for that portion of the extra work performed in such facility may, by Agreement between the Contractor and Engineer, be accepted as a specialist billing. To the specialist invoice price, less a credit to the City for any cash or trade discount offered or available, whether or not such discount may have been taken, will be added fifteen percent (15%) for overhead and profit in lieu of the percentages provided above. 5. The cost of direct supervision, except when provided by working foremen whose time is included above, of Contract Change Order work when done exclusively and not in conjunction or at the same time of other work performed on the job and when approved in advance by the Engineer including only payroll taxes, insurance, pension and direct costs for the labor of supervision, may be charged to the Contract Change Order. The cost of transportation, use of vehicle, and other costs incurred by supervision will not be allowed. 6. For added or deducted work by subcontractors, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, with the subcontractor’s signed detailed estimate of the cost for labor, materials, and equipment, including the markup by such subcontractor for overhead and profit. The same requirement shall apply to subcontractors. 7. For added or deducted work furnished by a vendor or supplier, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a detailed estimate or quotation of the cost to the Contractor for such work, signed by such vendor or supplier. 8. Any change in the work involving both extras and credits shall show a net total cost, including subcontracts. Allowances for overhead and profit, as specified herein, shall be applied if the net total cost is an extra. The estimated cost of deductions shall be based on labor and material prices on the date the Contract was executed. DRAFT 39 7-4.4 Daily Reports In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 7-4.4, “Daily Reports,” of the Standard Specifications shall be deemed to include the following: Material charges shall be substantiated by valid copies of vendor’s invoices. Such invoices shall be submitted with the daily extra work reports, or if not available, they shall be submitted with subsequent daily extra work reports. The Contractor shall maintain Contractor’s records in such a manner as to provide a clear account basis and the costs of other operations. Daily extra reports shall be made on City daily work report forms. The daily extra reports shall describe in detail the work that was performed, location (station, etc.). Separate daily extra reports shall be submitted for work that is being performed for more than one location or for different tasks that occur on the same day. The Engineer will compare the Inspector’s records with the completed daily extra work reports furnished by the Contractor and make any necessary adjustments. When these daily extra work reports are agreed upon and signed by both parties, said reports shall become the basis of payment for the work performed. DRAFT 40 SPECIAL PROVISIONS AMENDMENTS TO THE “GREENBOOK” STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS The following SECTIONS supplement the STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION, (“Greenbook”), 2021 edition, regional supplements, and all current supplements, and supersede any conflicting requirements, (A “conflicting requirement” is one that cannot operate by law within the Special Provisions listed herein or both cannot be physically produced). Otherwise, these Special Provisions only supplement the Standard Specifications. If any of the sections or part of sections below contradict or are not in conformance with current California Codes and Regulations at the time of bidding, the Contractor will assume that the current California Codes and Regulations supersedes that item in these specifications. When there are two or more specifications for the same item or work the contractor shall bid the more expensive item or work specified unless the one specified item specifically states that it shall take precedent over other specified items for the same work. SECTION 200 ROCK MATERIALS 200-2 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS 200-2.1 General Add the following: Aggregate base shall be either crushed miscellaneous base pursuant to Section 200-2.4, or recycled Class 2 Aggregate Base per Caltrans Standard Specification, Section 26: Aggregate Bases, Section 26-1.02B, Class 2 Aggregate Base, latest edition, and as specified herein. Add the following section: 200-2.9 Class 2 Aggregate Base Aggregate for recycled Class 2 aggregate base shall be free from organic matter and other deleterious substances and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base. Aggregate may be composed of a combination of the following: 1. 100% reclaimed asphalt concrete, Portland cement concrete, lean concrete base, or cement treated base 2. Broken stone 3. Crushed gravel 4. Natural rough surface gravel 5. Sand The aggregate shall conform to the grading and quality requirements shown in the following tables. At the option of the Contractor, the grading for either the 11/2-inch maximum or 3/4 DRAFT 41 inch maximum shall be used, except that once a grading is selected it shall not be changed without the Engineer's written approval. AGGREGATE GRADING REQUIREMENTS PERCENTAGE PASSING 1 ½” Maximum ¾” Maximum Sieve Sizes Operating Range Operating Range 2”………………… 100 — 1 ½”……………... 90-100 — 1”………………… — 100 ¾ ”………………. 50-85 90-100 No. 4……………. 25-45 35-60 No. 30…………… 10-25 10-30 No. 200…………. 2-9 2-9 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Property California Test Operating Range Resistance (R-value) 301. 78 Min. Sand Equivalent 217 25 Min. Durability Index 229 35 Min. The aggregate shall not be treated with lime, cement or other chemical material before the Durability Index test is performed. If the results of either or both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent tests do not meet the requirements specified for “Operating Range” but meet the “Contract Compliance” requirements, placement of the aggregate base may be continued for the remainder of that day. However, another day's work may not be started until tests, or other information, indicate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the next material to be used in the work will comply with the requirements specified for “Operating Range.” If the results of either or both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent tests do not meet the requirements specified for “Contract Compliance,” the aggregate base which is represented by these tests shall be removed. However, if requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, the aggregate base may remain in place and the Contractor shall pay to the City $2.25 per ton for such aggregate base left in place. The City may deduct this amount from any moneys due, or that may become due, the Contractor under the contract. If both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent do not conform to the “Contract Compliance” requirements, only one adjustment shall apply. No single aggregate grading or Sand Equivalent test shall represent more than 500 tons or one day's production, whichever is smaller. DRAFT 42 SECTION 201 CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS 201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 201-1.1 General Add the following: The Contractor shall furnish the engineer in the field with a copy of the mix design to be used, and with a legible certified weighmasters certificate for each load of PCC delivered to the project. PCC delivered to the project site having a water content and/or slump greater than that specified in the mix design shall be rejected and removed from the project site. 201-3 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER AND JOINT SEALANTS 201-3.4 Type “A” Sealant (Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant) Add the following: All finished concrete surfaces shall have a ½” continuous expansion joint at locations indicated on the plans and notes and shall be located either parallel or perpendicular to the curb line. When not otherwise indicated, all expansion joints located adjacent to colored concrete shall be sealant Type “A” and colored to match the color of the concrete surface. Contractor shall provide joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. The contractor shall submit product data from the manufacturer of each joint sealant product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. Contractor shall also submit samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer’s standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. Samples shall be submitted to the Engineer. Submit complete schedule of type (and location where type is to be used) of each sealant. The contractor shall engage an experienced installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturers based on testing and field experience. Provide color selections made by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. Sealant color parallel to curb line shall match color of Paving Treatment Type “A” as specified in Section 201-1.2.4(a) of these Special Provisions. DRAFT 43 Joint sealants shall be multi-component polyurethane sealant. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard, non-modified, 2-or-more-part, polyurethane-based, elastomeric sealant; complying with either ASTM-C-920-87, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, or FS TT- S 0227E Class A, non-sag, Type II. Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Plastic foam joint fillers shall be performed, compressible, resilient, non-staining, non-waxing, non-extruding strips of flexible plastic foam either open-cell polyurethane foam or closed-cell polyethylene foam, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold-applied sealants only. Polystyrene foam is not acceptable. DRAFT 44 SECTION 203 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 203-1 PAVING ASPHALT 203-1 GENERAL Add the following: Paving Asphalt shall be PG 64-10 203-3 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT Add the following sub section: 203-3.4.7 Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion (PMRE) for chip and scrub seals At least 14 days prior to use, the Contractor shall submit certifications from the manufacturers of the recycling agent and polymer identifying the types of agents and polymer used. The Contractor shall submit test results on the polymer supplied by the supplier of the polymer and shall submit certifications from the emulsion supplier that the emulsion meets the specification. The engineer may request these specifications weekly during the project. The asphalt emulsion shall be a quick break Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion with a latex polymer, a rejuvenating agent and asphalt and shall meet the following specifications. Test on Emulsion Method Specification Viscosity @122° F (SFS) ASTM D244 50 - 400 Residue, w%, minimum. ASTM D244 65 pH ASTM E70 2.0 - 5.0 Sieve, w%, max. ASTM D244 0.1 Oil distillate, w%, max. ASTM D244 0.5 Test on Residue(1) Viscosity @ 140° F, (P), maximum. ASTM D2171 5000 Penetration @ 39.2°F, minimum. ASTM D5 40-65 Elastic Recovery on residue by distillation, %, minimum. (3) AASHTO T59, T301 (1,2) 60 OR Modified Torsional Recovery, % minimum. (3) California Test 332 (4) 45 Test on Latex (5) Tensile Strength, die C dumbbell, psi, minimum ASTM D412 500 Swelling in rejuvenating agent, % maximum; 48 hours exposure @ 104° F ASTM D471(6) Modified 40% intact film DRAFT 45 Test on Rejuvenating Agent: Viscosity, 104° F, CST ASTM D2170 50-175 Flash point, COC , °F ASTM D92 > 380 Saturate, %, by wt. ASTM D2007 30 Max. Asphaltness ASTM D2007 1.0 Max. Test on Rejuvenating Agent Residue: Weight Change, % ASTM D2872 6.5 Max. Viscosity Ration ASTM D2170 3 Max. (1) Exception to AASHTO T59: Bring the temperature on the lower thermometer slowly to 350o F plus or minus 10o F. Maintain at this temperature for 20 minutes. Complete total distillation in 60 plus or minus 5 minutes from first application of heat. (2) Elastic Recovery @ 10o C (50o F): Hour glass sides, pull 20 cm, hold 5 minutes then cut, let sit 1 hour. (3) Choose either Elastic Recovery or Torsional Recovery as a test. (4) Torsional Recovery shall include the first 30 seconds. (5) Latex films shall be cured at 75° F and 50% relative humidity for 14 days prior to cutting or molding specimens. Suitable substrate for film formation shall be polyethylene boards, silicone rubber sheeting, glass, or any substrate which produces a cured film of uniform cross-section. (6) Report mass increase as a percent by weight of the original latex film mass upon exposure of films to “Rejuvenating Agent” Asphalt rejuvenating agent furnished without a Certificate of Compliance shall not be used in the work until the Engineer has approved the asphalt rejuvenating agent for use. The Engineer shall have 10 days to approve the asphalt rejuvenating agent for use. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor’s controlling operation is delayed to interfered with by reason of the Engineer not completing the evaluation of the asphalt rejuvenating agent within the time specified, the delay will be considered as the Contractors inability to perform the work and no extension of time shall be granted in accordance with section 6-6 Delays and Extension of Time of the Special Provisions. The Contractor shall submit a contingency plan to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to applying the asphalt rejuvenating agent. The contingency plan shall describe in detail the corrective actions the Contractor will take if the coefficient of friction is less than 0.30 or if the asphalt rejuvenating agent does not break within the times specified for lane closures. The plan shall include any additional traffic handling, additional materials on hand, or additional equipment kept available for contingency situations. The engineer must approve the use of a corrective action before it is implemented. 203-4 MICROSURFACING Replace entire section with the following: 203-4.1 Asphalt Emulsion Asphalt emulsion shall conform to 203-3.4.6 of the Standard Specifications. DRAFT 46 203-4.2 Water and Additives Water shall be potable and of such quality that the asphalt will not separate from the emulsion before the micro surfacing is in place on the pavement. If necessary for workability, a set- control agent that will not adversely affect the micro surfacing may be used. 203-4.3 Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall be any recognized brand of non-air entrained Portland cement or hydrated lime that is free of lumps. The type and amount of mineral filler needed shall be determined by the laboratory mix design and will be considered as part of the mineral gradation requirement. An increase or decrease of less than one percent may be permitted when the micro surfacing is being placed if it is found to be necessary for better consistency or set times. 203-4.4 Aggregate The mineral aggregate used shall be of the type and grade specified for the particular use of the micro surfacing. The aggregate shall be manufactured crushed stone such as granite, slag, limestone, or other high-quality aggregate, or combination thereof. The material shall be free from vegetable matter and other deleterious substances. All aggregate shall be free of caked lumps and oversize particles. The aggregate, prior to the addition of emulsion shall conform to the requirements of this section. If aggregates are blended each component aggregate shall meet the sand equivalency and abrasion resistance and shall be 100% crushed as tested in accordance with California Test 205. The definition of a crushed particle in California Test 205 Section D, is amended to read: “Any particle having 2 or more fresh mechanically fractured faces shall be considered a crushed particle.” The percentage composition by mass of the aggregate shall meet the following grading requirements when tested in conformance with California Test 202: Sieve Size Percentage Passing Type II Type III 3/8” 100 100 No. 4 94 - 100 70 - 90 No. 8 65 - 90 45 - 70 DRAFT 47 No. 16 40 - 70 28 – 50 No. 30 25 - 50 19 – 34 No. 200 5 - 15 5 – 15 Aggregate excluding mineral filler shall conform to the following additional quality requirements: Test Method Requirement Sand Equivalent California Test 217 65 minimum Durability Index California Test 229 65 minimum Percentage of crushed particles.* California Test 205 95% minimum Los Angeles Rattler Loss at 500 revolutions** California test 211 35% maximum * Crushed particles must have at least 1 fractured face. **California Test 211 must be performed on the parent aggregate before crushing. 203-4.5 Mix Design At least 7 working days before micro surfacing placement commences, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a laboratory report of tests and a proposed mix design covering the specific materials to be used on the project. The tests and mix design shall be performed by a laboratory capable of performing the applicable International Slurry Surfacing Association (ISSA) tests. The proposed micro surfacing mixture shall conform to the requirements specified when tested in accordance with the following tests: Test ISSA Test Requirement Wet Cohesion TB* 139 @ 30 min. (set) 12 kg-cm minimum DRAFT 48 @ 60 min. (traffic) 20 kg-cm minimum (or near spin) Excess Asphalt TB 109 540 g/m[JF1] 2 maximum Wet Stripping TB 114 Pass (90% minimum) Wet Track Abrasion TB 100 Six day soak 810 g/m2 max loss Displacement TB 147A Lateral 5% max Specific Gravity after 1000 cycles of 56.8 kg 2.10 Classification Compatibility TB 144** (AAA,BAA) 11 grade points minimum Mix Time @ 25°C TB 113 Controllable to 120 seconds minimum * TB = Technical Bulletin The original laboratory report shall be signed by the laboratory that performed the tests and mix design and shall show the results of the test on individual materials, comparing their values to those required by the specifications. The report shall clearly show the proportions of aggregate, filler, water (minimum and maximum), set control additive, and asphalt solids content (minimum and maximum) based on the dry mass of aggregate. The laboratory shall also report the quantitative effects of moisture content on the unit mass of the aggregate (bulking effect). Previous laboratory reports covering the same materials may be accepted provided they are made within the previous 12 months. The mix design will further show recommended changes in cement, water and additive proportions for high temperature weather conditions by reporting proportions of materials required for 60 seconds of mix time with materials heated to 38°C. This 38°C mixing report will not be required for projects requiring nighttime application or application in cool weather conditions. DRAFT 49 All the component materials used in the mix design shall be representative of the materials proposed by the contractor to be used on the project. Once the proportions of materials to be used are approved by the Engineer, no substitution of other materials will be permitted unless the materials proposed for substitution are first tested and a laboratory report is submitted for the substituted design as specified above. Substituted materials shall not be used until the mix design for those materials is approved by the Engineer. 203-4.6 Proportioning Aggregate, mineral filler, asphalt emulsion, water, and additives, including set-control agent if used, shall be proportioned by volume utilizing the mix design approved by the Engineer. If more than one kind of aggregate is used, the correct amount of each kind of aggregate to produce the required grading shall be proportioned separately, prior to adding the other materials of the mixture, in a manner that will result in a uniform and homogeneous aggregate blend. The percentages of each individual material required shall be shown in the laboratory report. Adjustments may be required during the construction, based on field conditions. The component materials shall be within the following limits: Residual Asphalt 5.5% to 10.5% by dry weight of aggregate Mineral Filler 0% to 3% by dry weight of aggregate Additive As needed Water As required to produce proper mix consistency The completed mixture, after addition of water and any set-control agent, shall be such that the micro surfacing mixture has proper workability and (a) will permit a traffic flow without pilot- car- assisted traffic control on the micro surfacing within one hour after placement, and (b) will prevent development of bleeding, raveling, separation or other distress within 15 days after placing the micro surfacing. However, when ambient temperatures are below 25°C traffic may not be permitted on the micro surfacing until it has sufficiently cured. The time for sufficient curing shall be mutually agreed upon between the contractor and the Engineer. DRAFT 50 203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE 203-6.1 General Delete the first two paragraphs and replace with the following: Asphalt concrete shall be the product of mixing mineral asphalt with asphalt binder at a central mixing plant. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) shall be included in the mix per the specifications below: Base course Asphalt shall contain a maximum of 10 percent RAP. There shall be no RAP in the final asphalt cap (1 1-/2” min). 203-6.2 Materials Add the following: Asphalt material shall conform to Section 39 “Asphalt Concrete,” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications 2022 edition. The amount of asphalt binder to be mixed with the aggregate shall be proposed by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit its mix designs for the asphalt concrete pavement specified herein, for review and approval by the Engineer, at the Pre-Construction Conference. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the Engineer with all required technical and material specifications necessary to review the Contractor’s proposed mix designs. Modification of the amount of asphalt binder shall be made to the Contractor’s mix designs as may be required by the Engineer. Commencement of construction of asphalt concrete pavement shall not occur until the Contractor has received the Engineer’s approval of proposed mix designs. All asphalt concrete pavement used on this project shall consist of Type A. Asphalt binder used in the asphalt concrete pavement shall comply with specifications for Performance Graded (PG) 64-10 asphalt binder, in accordance with Section 92 “Asphalt Binders,” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications. Laboratory tests may be performed at the expense of the City, when required by the Engineer, to determine if aggregates at the plant fall within specifications. Sampling of asphalt concrete pavement delivered to the site and placed on a prepared base course shall be performed by the Engineer to ensure the type of asphalt concrete pavement laid conforms to these Special Provisions, and to the proposed mix designs approved by the Engineer. 203-6.4.1 Class and Grade Base course asphalt concrete shall be class B-PG64-10 Final lift asphalt concrete shall be class C2-PG64-10. Leveling course asphalt concrete shall be class D2-PG64-10 203-11 ASPHALT RUBBER HOT MIX (ARHM) 203-11.1 General DRAFT 51 Add the following: Asphalt Rubber Hot Mix shall be Gap Graded (ARHM-GG) with class and grade C-PG 64-16. Contractor and subcontractors shall comply with the following: a. 100% California waste tires must be used in the runner portion of AHRM. b. AHRM to meet ASTM D6114-97 standard. c. Submitting the “Recycled Content Certification” CIWMB 74G-RAC form along with supporting documentation. 203-11.2 Materials Replace with the following: Certificates of Compliance shall conform to section 4.5 and be submitted to the Engineer. Certificates of Compliance for the paving asphalt and asphalt modifier shall be submitted prior to the start of asphalt rubber hot mix production. The Certificate of Compliance for the crumb rubber modifier shall be submitted no later than 1 week following completion of asphalt rubber hot mix production. 203-11.2.3 Crumb Rubber Modifier (CRM) Replace the fourth sentence of the first paragraph with the following: Whole scrap tire CRM shall be derived from whole scrap tires generated within the State of California.DRAFT 52 SECTION 206 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS Add the following section: 206-7 TRAFFIC SIGNS Add the following section: 206-7.1 General All traffic signs shall conform to the California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) except as modified herein. Add the following section: 206-7.2 Sign Posts Traffic signs shall be installed per City of Lake Elsinore Standard Plan No. 407 or as approved by the Engineer. Add the following section: 206-7.3 Street Name Signs Street name signs shall comply with City of Lake Elsinore Plan No. 400B or as approved by the Engineer. DRAFT 53 SECTION 207 GRAVITY PIPE 207-2 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP) 207-2.5 Joints Delete the second paragraph and add the following: Reinforced concrete pipe with ‘O’ ring joints shall conform to the requirements of Section 208-3, Gaskets for Concrete Pipe, except the ‘O’ ring joints shall be as made by Ameron, Precon, Hydro- Conduit, or other approved equal. Pipe designated in the plans as “pressure pipe” or with a 100-year hydraulic grade line at or above the pipe soffit shall be bell and groove spigot joint with “O” rings conforming to ASTM C-443 and C-361 for the limits shown on the plans. Add the following section: 207-26 SUBDRAIN PIPE FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX Add the following section: 207-26.1 General The subdrain pipe, both perforated and non-perforated, shall comply with the following: Material ASTM Specification Polyvinyl Chloride D2729 Polyethylene F405 Pipe of the same material shall be used throughout the entire project. Add the following section: 207-26.2 Pipe Perforations Perforations shall be located in the bottom half of the pipe as laid. Add the following section: 207-26.3 Pipe Joints The joints between sections of perforated pipe shall be of a type that will hold the pipe securely in alignment and maintain the inner surfaces of abutting pipes flush and even. DRAFT 54 SECTION 211 MATERIALS TEST Add the following section: 211-7 AGRONOMIC SOIL TEST Prior to ordering material and delivery to the site, and prior to soil amendment and preparation, Contractor shall obtain soil samples from proposed topsoil material as approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall transmit soil samples to an approved agronomic soil–testing laboratory for analysis. Provide a soil analysis report from the laboratory, with recommendations for soil amendment and preparation. Submit a copy of the report to the Engineer for review. The contractor shall pay for soil sampling and testing. Soil analysis shall indicate following soil properties: (a) organic matter content (%) (b) fertility—nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), potassium (K) (c) pH reaction (acid–neutral–alkaline) (d) ECe (salinity) (e) SAR (sodium absorption ratio) (f) particle size analysis (% sand, % silt, % clay) (g) micronutrients (calcium, magnesium, copper, zinc, manganese, iron) (h) specific toxicities (boron, chloride, fluoride, sodium, etc.) (i) percolation (water infiltration rate) (j) recommendations for amendments DRAFT 55 SECTION 213 ENGINEERING GEOSYNTHETHICS 213-5 GEOTEXTILES AND GEOGRIDS 213-5.1 General Add the following: Geosynthetic types shall be used for the applications listed in Table 213-5.2(F) TABLE 213-5.2(F) GEOTEXTILE APPLICATIONS Application of Geotextile Type Designation Subgrade stabilization Tensar BX1200 Geogrid Separation of Soil and Street Structural Section 90WS Separation of Soil and Subsurface Aggregate Drain 180N Reinforcement of Street Structural Section 200WS Remediation and Separation of Soil 270WS Reinforcement of Soil 270WS Drainage at the Interface of Soil Structures N/A Drainage at the Interface of Soil and Structures N/A Rock Slope Protection Fabric for Rock Sizes Below 225 kg (¼ Ton) 180N Rock Slope Protection Fabric for Rock Sizes Including and Above 225 kg (¼ Ton) 250N Plant Protection Covering 90N Erosion Control Fence with 14 AWG - 150 mm x 150 mm (6”x6”) Wire and 3 m (10’) Post Spacing 90WS Erosion Control Fence with 1.8 m (6’) Post Spacing and No Wire Fencing 200WS Add the following section: 213-6 EROSION CONTROL SPECIALTIES 213-3.1 Gravel bags Gravel bags for the use of temporary erosion control shall be burlap type, filled with no less than 23kg (50 lbs) of 19 mm (3/4“) crushed rock and securely tied closed. Plastic bags are not acceptable. DRAFT 56 SECTION 214 TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS, AND PAVEMENT MARKERS Delete the entire section and replace with the following: 214-1 REMOVALS This work shall consist of the removal and disposal of existing or temporary traffic stripes, pavement markings, pavement markers, etc., on streets, parking lots in preparation for either the application of temporary delineation for public traffic or the application of permanent delineation as specified in the contract documents, and shall conform to the provisions of Section 15, “Existing Facilities,” of the State of California Standard Specifications 2022 edition and these Special Provisions. Where paint, thermoplastic striping or markings exist, traffic stripe and pavement marking removal shall be by wet sandblasting or better. The method of removal of traffic stripes and pavement markings shall result in complete removal to the extent that changing light conditions and/or wet pavement conditions shall not produce an image of the removed device. The Contractor shall extend grinding or sandblasting, beyond the edges of the stripes or markings being removed, sufficiently to eliminate such imaging. Additional work necessary to achieve the foresaid effectiveness of removal shall be considered as compensated by the prices paid (in accordance with the applicable provisions for measurement and payment) for “Traffic Striping, Signage & Markings,” and no additional payment will be made therefore. Removal of temporary traffic delineation shall conform to the procedural provisions of this section, and Section 15, Existing Facilities,” of the State of California Standard Specifications. Where blast cleaning is used for the removal of painted traffic stripes and pavement markings or for removal of objectionable material, and such removal operation is being performed within 10 feet of a lane occupied by public traffic, the residue including dust shall be removed immediately after contact between the sand and the surface being treated. Such removal shall be by vacuum attachment operating concurrently with the blast cleaning operation. Payment for all removal of all required traffic striping and markings shall be considered as included in the lump sum bid for “Install Sign, Thermoplastic Striping, Pavement Marking and Raised Marker,” and no additional payment will be made therefore. 214-2 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS 214-2.1 General All traffic striping shall be thermoplastic. Thermoplastic traffic stripes and pavement markings shall conform to the provisions in Sections 84 of the Standard Specifications of the California Department of Transportation 2022 edition, and as specified in these special provisions. DRAFT 57 214-2.2 Material Thermoplastic striping material shall consist of 3M bonded core all weather reflective elements series 50 (or approved equal) and shall allow for both wet and dry reflectivity. Thermoplastic material for traffic stripes and pavement markings shall be applied at a minimum thickness of 0.100 inch. Thermoplastic traffic stripes and pavement markings with enhanced wet-night visibility shall consist of a single uniform layer of thermoplastic and a layer of bonded core elements and a layer of glass beads as follows: The 1st layer of bonded core elements shall be 3M Bonded Core All Weather Reflective Elements for use in thermoplastic traffic stripes and pavement markings. The color of the bonded core elements shall match the color of the stripe or marking to which they are being applied. The 2nd layer of glass beads shall comply with AASHTO M247 Type 2. Both bonded core elements and glass beads must be surface treated for use with thermoplastic under the manufacturer’s instructions. The bonded core elements (surface-drop) shall contain either clear or yellow tinted microcrystalline ceramic beads bonded to the opacified core. These elements shall not be manufactured using lead, chromate or arsenic. All “dry performing” microcrystalline ceramic beads bonded to the core shall have a minimum index of refraction of 1.8 when tested using the liquid oil immersion method. All “wet performing “microcrystalline ceramic beads bonded to the core shall have a minimum index of refraction of 2.30 when tested using the oil immersion method. Gradations for the Bonded Core Elements Element Gradations Mass Percent Passing (ASTM D1214) US Mesh Micron “S” series 12 1700 85-100 14 1410 70-96 16 1180 50-90 18 1000 5-60 20 850 0-25 30 600 0-7 A sample of bonded core reflective elements supplied by the manufacturer shall show resistance to corrosion of their surface after exposure to a 1 % solution (by weight) of sulfuric acid. The 1 % acid solution shall be made by adding 5.7 cc of concentrated acid into 1000 cc of distilled water. DRAFT 58 The bonded core elements shall be surface treated to optimize embedment and adhesion to the thermoplastic binder. Minimum retroreflectivity values [mcd(ft2)(fc)] metric equivalent [mcd(m2)(lux)] are shown below: Minimum Initial Retroreflectivity Values Test Method White Yellow Dry (ASTM E1710) 700 500 Wet recovery (ASTM E2177) 280 250 Note: Increased element drop may be necessary to compensate for increased surface area characteristic of rough pavement surfaces. 214-2.3 Application Mobile truck mounted applicators shall be capable of traveling at a uniform, predetermined speed over variable road grades to produce uniform application of striping material, following straight lines and making normal curves in a true arc. The equipment shall be capable of air blasting the pavement, applying the stripe and immediately dropping the bonded core elements and glass beads in a single pass at speeds of up to 8 MPH. Walk-behind cart applicators shall be capable of uniform application of striping material at walking speeds, following straight lines and making tight turns symbols and legends. Mobile equipment must be available to air blast the areas immediately prior to hand cart application. The walk-behind cart shall be capable of applying the molten binder and immediately dropping the bonded core elements and glass beads in a single pass at walking speeds. The equipment shall be capable of application of bonded core elements and glass beads to the surface of the pavement marking by double drop application. The element dispenser for the first drop shall be attached to the striping machine in such a manner that the elements are dispensed closely behind the binder application device. The bead dispenser for the second drop shall be attached to the striping machine in such a manner that the beads are dispensed immediately after the first drop (bonded core elements). The applicator for the bonded core elements and glass beads shall be capable of delivering a uniform drop rate at required application speeds. The bonded core elements and glass beads are applied such that they appear uniform on the entire traffic marking. The specified reflective media shall be dropped immediately after binder application. Reflective media consists retroreflective elements followed by glass beads commonly called “Double-Drop” and shall be applied to achieve the application rates shown below. DRAFT 59 Bonded Core Element Application Rates for Thermoplastic Binders Units Minimum for smooth pavement surfaces Lb. per 4 in. ln. ft. 0.022 Lb. per 100 sq. ft. 6.6 Gr. per 4 in. ln. ft. 10 Note: Increased element drop may be necessary to compensate for increased surface area characteristic of rough pavement surfaces Application Rates for Glass Beads Units AASHTO M247 Type 2 Lb. per 4 in. ln. ft. 0.048 Gr. per 4 in. ln. ft. 22 Lb. per 100 sq. ft. 14.4 Note: Increased glass bead may be necessary to compensate for increased surface area characteristic of rough pavement surfaces 214-3 PAINTED PAVEMENT STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS Painted traffic stripes and pavement markings shall conform to the provisions in Section 84-2 “Traffic Striping and Pavement Markings”, of the State of California Standard Specifications 2022 edition and these Special Provisions. The subparagraphs of the first paragraph in Section 84-2.02, "Materials," of the State of California Standard Specifications are amended to read: State Specification No. Rapid Dry Water Base, Traffic Line. —White, Yellow and Black PTWB-01 The second and third paragraphs in Section 84-2.02, "Materials," of the State of California Standard Specifications are amended to read: State Specifications for traffic paint and glass beads may be obtained from the Transportation Laboratory, 5900 Folsom Boulevard, Sacramento, CA 95819-4612, telephone number 916.227.7289. Glass beads shall conform to 1-ACOT type beads or equal. The Contractor shall layout and “cat-track” the alignment of the proposed striping at 15 ft intervals and “spot” the proposed pavement markings as called for on the Plans. Striping shall vary no more than 2” in 50 ft from the specified alignment. The Engineer may waive minor variations. The Contractor shall not proceed with applying thermoplastic pavement markings until the Engineer has checked and approved the cat-tracking and spotting and has authorized the Contractor to proceed. DRAFT 60 Traffic striping shall be applied with airless equipment. All traffic striping shall be performed with a road liner type striping machine. Where the configuration or location of a traffic stripe is such that the use of a road liner type striping machine is unsuitable, traffic paint and glass beads may be applied by other methods and equipment approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine if the road liner type striping machine is unsuitable for a particular use. The first coat of paint shall be applied upon completion of the surfacing. The second coat of paint shall not be applied until seven (7) calendar days after the first coat. Each coat of paint shall be applied at the wet film thickness of 10-12 mils for white and yellow paint and 7 mils for black paint. All paint shall be applied at a relative humidity below seventy-five percent (75%) and an ambient temperature above 13°C (55°F), unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Except for black paint, No. 1 reflective glass beads shall be uniformly incorporated in all coats of paint concurrently with the application of the paint. The glass beads shall be embedded in the coat of traffic paint being applied to a depth of at least one-half their diameters. The reflective glass beads shall be applied to the first coat of paint at the rate of 0.7 kg (1.5 lb) of beads per liter (0.26 Gal) of paint, and to the second coat of paint at the rate of 0.95 kg (2 lb) of beads per liter (0.26 Gal) of paint. Except as otherwise noted on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer, all angle points, as shown on the striping plans, shall be painted as a smooth, tangent curve with a radius and length as approved in the field. Temporary tape or reflective markers utilized for the purposes of interim delineation for centerline, lane lines, and crosswalk lines shall be placed to the side of the final striping pattern in such a way so that it will not interfere with the first coat of paint. All temporary tape and reflective markers applied for the purpose of interim delineation shall be removed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City upon completion of the first coat of striping and prior to the final striping. Stencils used for pavement markings must conform to the latest Caltrans approved Metric Stenciling Standards. Add to Subsection 84-2.01D(1), “General,” of the State of California Standard Specifications 2022 edition the following: Newly painted striping or markings which are damaged as a result of the construction, including wheel markings by public traffic and the construction equipment, shall be replaced, and any associated removals shall be performed as outlined in these Special Provisions at the sole expense of the Contractor and no separate compensation will be allowed therefore. Existing traffic striping and pavement markings that do not conform to the approved Plans shall be removed by wet sandblasting. Other methods may be requested by the Contractor but shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval. Blackout of existing traffic striping or pavement DRAFT 61 markings, which do not conform to the approved Plan, shall not be allowed. 214-4 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS Raised pavement markers shall conform to the provisions in Section 81-3, "Pavement Markers," of the State of California Standard Specifications 2022 edition and these Special Provisions. Certificates of compliance shall be furnished for pavement markers as specified in "Prequalified and Tested Signing and Delineation Materials," elsewhere in these Special Provisions. Reflective pavement markers shall comply with the specific intensity requirements for reflectance after abrading the lens surface in accordance with the retroreflectivity requirements, specified in Section 81-3.02C “Retroreflective Pavement Markers," of the State of California Standard Specifications. The bituminous adhesive used to install the markers shall be a hot melt bituminous adhesive asphaltic material with a homogeneously mixed mineral filler and shall conform with the requirements specified in Section 95-1.02E,” Epoxy Adhesive for Pavement Markers,” of the State of California Standard Specifications. Reflective pavement markers shall be installed per the approved Plan unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The composition of the material shall be such that its properties shall not deteriorate when heated to and applied at temperatures up to 218°C (425°F), using either air or oil jacketed melters. Reflective pavement markers shall be placed at locations as established by the applicable Caltrans striping detail noted on the approved striping Plan which includes but is not limited to temporary painted line(s), new striping, or existing striping. There shall be one marker for each location. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to establish satisfactory locations for markers. The Contractor shall remove existing reflective pavement markers that do not conform to the approved Plan. Reflective pavement markers shall be of the prismatic reflector type (3M model white RP290w and yellow RPM 2912y or equal). Existing pavement markers (blue) designating the location of the fire hydrants shall be replaced “in kind” after the paving is completed. The Contractor shall contact the Engineer 72 hours before any legends are painted on city streets to ensure that the patterns the Contractor is using match the patterns used by the City of Lake Elsinore. No other pattern will be allowed except patterns that match patterns used by the City of Lake Elsinore. DRAFT 62 SPECIAL NOTE: The Contractor is advised that at some local intersections, the “STOP” legend and/or “STOP” bar may be missing. The Contractor shall install new “STOP” legends and/or “STOP” bars at local intersections, whether or not the “STOP” legend and/or “STOP” bar previously existed. Payment for installing new “STOP” legends and “STOP” bars shall be considered as included in the lump sum bid item price for removal and replacement of all existing traffic striping, and no additional compensation will be made therefore. 214-5 PAYMENT The lump sum price paid for “Install Sign, Thermoplastic Striping, Pavement Marking and Raised Marker,” shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved installing traffic striping, markings, raised pavement markers and signs, complete in place, as shown on the Plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions and as approved by the Engineer, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. The lump sum price paid for “Install Sign, Thermoplastic Striping, Pavement Marking and Raised Marker,” shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in relocating or resetting existing signs, salvaging signs to the City Yard, and installing new traffic signs complete in place in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer, and no additional compensation will be allowed. The contractor is required to submit a schedule of values for this lump sum bid item. Submit the schedule of values within 15 days of contract approval. DRAFT 63 SPECIAL PROVISIONS AMENDMENTS TO THE “GREENBOOK” STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS The following SECTIONS supplement the STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION, (“Greenbook”), 2021 edition, regional supplements, and all current supplements, and supersede any conflicting requirements, (A “conflicting requirement” is one that cannot operate by law within the Special Provisions listed herein or both cannot be physically produced). Otherwise, these Special Provisions only supplement the Standard Specifications. If any of the sections or part of sections below contradict or are not in conformance with current California Codes and Regulations at the time of bidding, the Contractor will assume that the current California Codes and Regulations supersedes that item in these specifications. When there are two or more specifications for same item or work the contractor shall bid the more expensive item or work specified unless the one specified item specifically states that it shall take precedent over other specified items for the same work. SECTION 300 EARTHWORK 300-1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 300-1.1 General Add the following to the first paragraph: Clearing and grubbing shall also include the removal, relocation, adjusting, or salvaging of all facilities so indicated on the Plans which are not designated as separate bid items, or which are not included in other bid items. Add the following to the third paragraph: During surface clearing operations, the Contractor shall not cover or bury any plant material or other objectionable materials. If the Contractor cannot successfully separate the plant material from the surface soil and advertently or inadvertently mixes organic or other objectionable materials with the soil, the soil so contaminated shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. All costs associated with removing and disposing of the soil mixed with organic or other objectionable materials and importing soil to replace said contaminated soil shall be borne by the Contractor and no additional payment shall be made therefore. Add the following: Clearing and Grubbing shall also include, but is not limited to, the following items as shown on DRAFT 64 the Plans or specified in these Special Provisions: Clearing for and providing temporary graded driveways and continuing maintenance thereof to provide safe, smooth, stable and continuous all weather access to all residences and businesses within the project area and as directed by the Engineer. Minor grading for swales and drainage control. Dust control throughout the duration of the project conforming to Section 3-12.2 ”Air Pollution Control”, of these Special Provisions. Progressive clean-up and maintenance of project appearance. Control of water and dewatering during construction. Clean-up of project area upon completion of the Work. Capping and removing sprinkler lines and sprinkler heads that are within the project limits and providing same to the property owner. The Contractor shall mark locations of capped lines with lath so that Owner can locate them later. Removing and disposing of interfering portions of, making modifications to, and maintaining existing private sprinkler systems in working order. This includes water supply, water distribution, electrical supply, and electrical control elements of the existing sprinkler system. Removing existing street signs and other miscellaneous signs that are in conflict with roadway construction and replacing/relocating them at new locations per plan or salvaging as directed by the Engineer. Protection of all existing structures and improvements which fall within or are adjacent to the limits of work specified under this Contract in accordance with Sections 4-2 and 402-2 of the Standard Specifications. Removal and salvage/disposal of miscellaneous items such as utility boxes and covers, street signs, posts, poles, interfering portions of water, sewer and storm drain pipes, fences, mail boxes, and retaining walls. Removal and disposal of interfering portions of abandoned utility lines and structures and the filling with blown sand and plugging of abandoned pipes and conduits not removed. Installation, maintenance, and removal of fences, temporary fences, and gates as required in these Special Provisions and/or for the contractor's convenience. DRAFT 65 Removal and disposal of any additional items not specifically mentioned which may be found within the work limits as directed by the Engineer. Removal and disposal of existing A.C. berm, pedestrian ramps, lined ditches, curb inlets and outlets, and mow curbs which may be found within the work limits as directed by the Engineer. Removal of all items necessary to complete the work including items not specifically shown on the demolition plans but discoverable through site visit or other reasonable means at time of bid. The Engineer shall have sole discretion in determining what items were “discoverable” but will generally be defined as items that could be seen, measured, and/or otherwise identified through surface investigation. 300-1.3 Removal and Disposal of Materials 300-1.3.1 General Add the following: The Contractor shall specify the route and the disposal site of the material that is required to be removed and hauled away. The Contractor shall provide this information at the Pre-Construction Conference 300-1.4 Payment Delete the first paragraph and add the following: Payment for clearing, grubbing and miscellaneous removals, relocations or adjustments not specifically identified on the Plans, not specifically designated in these Special Provisions or separately paid for in the Bid Schedule(s), shall be made at the contract lump sum price for Clearing and Grubbing, and no additional compensation shall be allowed therefore. The Contractor shall be required to remove adequately and completely any and all existing improvements within the limits of the Work, as necessary to construct the required improvements. 300-2 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION 300-2.1 General Delete the first paragraph and add the following: Unclassified excavation shall consist of making all cuts and fills to the lines and grades shown on the Plans, stockpiling of suitable material, transport of stockpiled material to its ultimate location, all mixing, moisture conditioning, and compaction of stockpile and fill material, and export of excess material to a legal site. Unclassified excavation shall also include scarification, moisture conditioning, and compaction of the top one foot of subgrade material to 95 percent relative compaction under roadway and other paved areas bearing traffic loads. DRAFT 66 300-2.2 Unsuitable Material 300-2.2.1 General Add the following: Such direction may include, but is not limited to, directing the Contractor to blend, adjust moisture content of, rework, or place unsuitable soils at specific locations or elevations within the Project Site. Add the following section: 300-2.2.3 Removal & Recompaction Compressible soils such as uncontrolled fills, alluvium, and colluvium may exist within the limits of Work. When encountered, these unconsolidated soils shall be removed by the Contractor until a firm and unyielding surface is exposed and approved by the Engineer. If the excavated material has a moisture content greater than optimum moisture content, the Contractor shall blend the wet soil with soils having a lower moisture content and/or spread the excavated material in a manner that enables the material to dry to optimum moisture content. The cost of blending, spreading and/or drying shall be included in the contract unit price for Removal and Recompaction. The excavated material shall be placed and compacted in accordance with Section 300-4, “Unclassified Fill”, except that Sections 300-4.9 and 300-4.10, “Measurement and Payment”, shall not apply. 300-2.5 Slopes Add the following after the first sentence of the first paragraph: A slope shall be defined as any area steeper than three horizontal to one vertical. And add the following to the first paragraph: The hinge points (the top and bottom) of slopes shall be located within 75 mm (0.25’) of the locations shown on the plans. 300-2.6 Surplus Material Add the following: The Contractor shall export all surplus material from the project. The Contractor shall utilize highway legal trucks for the export of material from the Project Site to a legal site secured by the Contractor. No earth moving equipment or special construction equipment, as defined in Section 565 of the California Vehicle Code, will be allowed for hauling material on public streets. 300-2.7 Selected Material The text of Subsection 300-2.7 of the Standard Specifications is hereby deleted and replaced with the following: Selected materials encountered in the excavations within the limits of the Work that conform to DRAFT 67 the Standard Specifications for base material, trench bedding, backfill, topsoil, or other specified materials shall be used as shown on the Plans, in the Special Provisions, or as directed by the Engineer. Topsoil excavated may be considered only for the purpose of backfilling areas to be planted. 300-2.8 Measurement Delete the first and second paragraphs and add the following: Unclassified Excavation payment quantity shall consist of all cut shown on the plans. When paid as a unit price, Unclassified Excavation shall be measured based on the volume it occupies in its original position before excavation. The quantity of Unclassified Excavation shall be the volume of cut occupied between the original ground surface after clearing and grubbing and the design elevations shown on the plans. Materials excavated or otherwise removed as all or part of any other bid item shall not be measured as Unclassified Excavation. Unclassified Fill shall be paid as Unclassified Excavation, and no separate payment will be made. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer three (3) working days prior to completing clearing and grubbing and the removal of all deleterious material from the entire site. It is the intent of the Engineer to schedule and perform field survey and/or aerial photography of the entire site at one time to determine the original ground surface prior to grading for the purpose of Unclassified Excavation quantification. If the Contractor has not removed all deleterious material from the entire site by the day prior to the scheduled field survey and/or photography, the field survey and/or photography will be cancelled and not rescheduled until the Contractor has completed removing all material from the entire site. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation or extensions in time if the field survey and/or aerial photography is cancelled due to the Contractor not completing clearing and grubbing and removal operations as scheduled. If the entire site cannot have field survey performed and/or be photographed because of weather, poor visibility or adverse flight conditions the Contractor will be entitled to a corresponding time extension but shall not entitled to any additional compensation due to the delay. Removal and Recompaction shall be paid at the unit price bid. The quantity of Removal and Recompaction shall be the volume occupied between the original ground surface after clearing and grubbing where the original ground surface is at or beneath the design lines and grades and the bottom contours of the removal and recompaction area. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of 36 hours after completion of the removal of compressible soils in Removal and Recompact areas for the Agency to measure the cut for the quantity of work performed. 300-2.9 Payment Delete this section and add the following: Payment for Unclassified Excavation and Removal & Recompaction will be made at the unit prices DRAFT 68 bid in the proposal unless specified otherwise. Only the quantity of Unclassified Excavation and Removal & Recompaction measured shall be paid for. No excavated material which is re- excavated will be paid for. For progress payments, the quantity of Unclassified Excavation and Removal & Recompaction shall be estimated by the Engineer. The Engineer's calculations shall be considered the definitive determinant for quantities for progress and final payments. All topographic surveying and calculations necessary to quantify Unclassified Excavation and Removal & Recompaction payment quantities shall be performed by the Engineer. Payment for Unclassified Excavation and Removal & Recompaction shall include all costs for salvaging clean and suitable material and filling areas to the required grades and cross sections, transport, placement, compaction, moisture conditioning and water therefore, rework of compressible soils, all work incidental to Section 300-4.8, slope rounding, grading, stockpiling, exporting and disposing of excess material, access roads, temporary detour roads, matching existing grades, construction of transitions, and grading of earthen swales and drainage channels as shown on the drawings or required by the contract documents. When payment for Unclassified Excavation is made as a Final Pay Quantity it shall be made pursuant to Section 7-1.1, “General”, and no additional payment shall be made therefore. When no bid item(s) exist for Unclassified Excavation and/or Removal & Recompaction then costs shall be considered included in other items of work and no additional payment shall be made. Add the following section: 300-2.10 Grading Tolerance The Contractor shall finish excavated areas other than slopes and subgrade below structures, within the roadway and sidewalk areas within 0.1’ of the grades shown on the plans. Subgrade tolerances shall conform to the requirements of Section 301-1.4, “Subgrade Tolerances”. 300-3 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL. 300-3.1 General Add the following: The Contractor shall excavate to the lines and levels required and/or shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, cribbing, pumping, and planking required. The Contractor shall excavate and maintain the bottom of all trenches in a condition that is level, firm, clean and free from all debris or foreign matter. Excavations shall be kept free from water at all times. The Contractor shall remove any unsuitable material encountered below grade as directed by the Engineer. 300-3.6 Payment Add the following: Dewatering shall be considered incidental to structure excavation and no additional compensation shall be made therefore. Except for unsuitable materials removed as part of unclassified excavation, unsuitable material encountered below structural excavation finished DRAFT 69 grade will be paid for at the unit price, lump sum, or if neither are included in the Contract pursuant to Section 2-8, “Extra Work”, of Standard Specifications. 300-4 UNCLASSIFIED FILL 300-4.1 General The following text is hereby added to subsection 300-4.1 of the Standard Specifications: The site shall be graded to the limit lines and elevations shown on the drawings with such allowances as may be required for the construction of walks, and other site improvements. Tolerance for rough grading is 1/10th of a foot, plus or minus, at drainage swales, adjacent property grates, and paved areas. At other areas, appearance shall be the governing factor. Finish grades shall slope to drain without water pockets or irregularities and shall conform to the intent of all plans and sections, after thorough settlement, and compaction of the soil. Finished grades shall meet all existing or established controls of sidewalks, curbs, and walls and shall be of uniform slope and grade between points of fixed elevations or elevation controls from such point to established grades. Tolerance for finish grading is ¼ inch, plus or minus. Delete the second and third paragraphs of subsection 300-4.1 and replace with the following: Rocks, broken concrete, or other solid materials which are larger than 1 inch in greatest dimension shall not be placed in fill areas that are to be planted. Clods or hard lumps of earth 1 inch or more in greatest dimension shall be broken up before compacting the material in fill areas to be planted. Fill material containing large rocks, boulders, or hard lumps (such as hardpan or cemented gravel which cannot be broken readily) over 12 inches in greatest dimension shall not be incorporated in the fill. Such materials shall be removed from the site. Selected material from the site that meets the requirements for Class C topsoil may be used in landscaped areas in the upper 12 inches of fill or as make-up fill material underneath hardscape paving. Make-up fill material in landscaped areas shall be Class A topsoil for the upper 12 inches of fill. 300-4.3 Other Fill Materials Delete this section and add the following: Excess soil remaining on the Project Site from excavations other than Unclassified Excavation may only be used for fill material when rocks, lumps, cobbles, clods, or other solid materials such as broken concrete or asphalt from removal operations are suitable for the particular area to be filled as determined by the Engineer and in conformance with the requirements of the geotechnical investigation. Broken concrete or asphalt pavement materials shall not be allowed within site fill areas or roadway fills less than three feet (3’) in height, within three feet (3’) of final grade in any area, or within five feet (5’) (vertically) of the existing ground water table. DRAFT 70 Concrete or asphalt placement shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Concrete or asphalt pieces shall be less than six inches (6”) in maximum dimension and surrounded by soil particles when used as compacted fill. No nesting shall occur. 300-4.4 Benching Add the following: Benching and keyways shall be constructed as shown in the Contract Documents. Benching and keyways shall be considered as incidental to Unclassified Fill and no separate payment shall be made therefore. 300-4.5 Placement Add the following: The Contractor shall perform grading such that the upper 3’ of fill placed in the roadway right-of- way is composed of properly compacted low expansive soils when available on-site or when specified. The more highly expansive soils shall be placed in the deeper fill areas and/or properly compacted or exported from the site. Low expansive soils are defined as those soils that have an Expansion Index of 50 or less when tested in accordance with 1994 UBC Standard 18-2 as published by the International Conference of Building Officials. Should insufficient soils meeting the requirement of an expansion index of 50 or less be present within the limits of work, soils of the least expansion index that are available within the limits of work shall be incorporated in the upper 3’ of fill placed in the roadway. Delete the third paragraph and add the following: No rock or similar irreducible material with a maximum dimension greater than 6 inches shall be buried or placed in fills closer than 10 feet to the finished grade unless recommendations for such placement have been submitted by the Soils Engineer in advance and approved by the Engineer. Rocks shall not be nested but shall be spread with sufficient room between them so that intervening voids can be adequately filled with fine material to form a dense, compact mass. Oversized material shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. If disposed of within the City of Lake Elsinore, a separate grading permit will be required for disposal of rock. 300-4.6 Application of Water Add the following: The Contractor shall place all fill soil at a moisture content no less than one (1) percent below optimum moisture as determined by ASTM test D-1557-91. 300-4.7 Compaction Add the following: The Contractor shall compact all fill soils placed within the top 1’ of roadway subgrade to a minimum of 95 percent relative compaction. DRAFT 71 300-4.8 Slopes Add the following: Feathering of fill over the tops of slopes will not be permitted. 300-4.10 Payment Delete this section and add the following: Unclassified fill, grading, shaping, compacting or consolidating, moisture conditioning, slope rounding, construction of transitions and all work included in and incidental to Section 300-4, Unclassified Fill, shall be paid for as unclassified excavation, and no additional payment will be made therefore. 300-5 BORROW EXCAVATION 300-5.2 Imported Borrow Add the following section: 300-5.2.1 Imported Borrow Properties The Contractor shall provide imported borrow that is clean well graded soil consisting of material conforming to all of the requirements in Table 300-5.2.1(A) and the following requirements. Rock shall not be a component of imported borrow. TABLE 300-5.2.1(A) IMPORTED BORROW PROPERTIES Tests Test Method No. Requirements R-Value Calif. 301 40 Min. Expansion Index UBC Standard 18-2 30 Max. Plasticity Index ASTM D 424 4 Max. Sieve Analysis ASTM D 422 Percent Passing 75µ (No. 200) 15 Max. DRAFT 72 SECTION 301 SUBGRADE PREPARATION, TREATED MATERIALS, AND PLACEMENT OF BASE MATERIALS 301-1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 301-1.2 Preparation of Subgrade Delete the first sentence of the second paragraph and add the following: After rough grading has been completed, when scarifying and cultivating are required, the roadbed shall be loosened to a depth of at least 12 inches (305 mm). Delete the third paragraph and add the following: Uniform pervious soils, that allow the immediate penetration of water or uniform impervious soils which will allow the penetration of water to a depth of at least 12 inches (305 mm) after the addition of a suitable wetting agent, will not require scarifying and cultivation unless a condition pervious set forth in this section requires such processing. When scarifying and cultivation are not required, the moisture content of the top 12 inches (305 mm) of the subgrade material shall be brought to optimum by the addition of water at the surface, and the material shall be compacted by approved equipment to the specified relative compaction. Water for use in subgrade preparation shall be potable. Water shall be applied to compact soil, subgrade, base, and surfacing material through the use of a watering truck which shall spray water uniformly. No chemical additives shall be used during the water application process. 301-1.3 Relative Compaction Delete the first paragraph and add the following: The Contractor shall compact the upper 12” of subgrade beneath roadways, alleyways, parking lots, other pavement areas under traffic loading, and beneath and including curb to curb to not less than 95 percent maximum dry density as determined by ASTM test D-1557-91, whether pavement is placed directly on subgrade, subbase, or base. The top 12” of all other areas shall be compacted to no less than 90 percent maximum dry density as determined by ASTM test D-1557- 91. DRAFT 73 SECTION 302 ROADWAY SURFACING 302-2 CHIP SEAL 302-2.1 General Add the following: The Contractor shall treat all vegetation within the limits of the paved area to receive chip seal with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be applied at least 5 (five) working days prior to chip sealing the street. Allowance for the five-day period shall be shown in the schedule required per Section 6-1, Construction Schedule and Commencement of the Work. The Contractor shall comply with Section 302-4.7 “Scheduling, Public Convenience and Traffic Control.” 302-2.4 Roadway Surface Preparation Add to the first paragraph: All traces of plastic, residual emulsion and chips shall be removed from all personnel covers, drain inlet covers, monument covers, and all other utility covers as quickly as possible, after the application of the chip seal and/or prior to final acceptance of the project. Add to the second paragraph: When removing the raised pavement markers the Contractor shall remove excessive adhesive left on pavement caused by the removal of raised pavement markers. Removal shall be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Immediately prior to the chip sealing operations, the Contractor shall sweep the entire surface with vacuum assisted power brooms on city streets and kick brooms on county and state highways when approved by the Engineer. Areas that have been patched shall receive a fog seal at the discretion of the Engineer. Add the following sub-section: 302-2.6.6 Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion (PMRE) for chip and scrub seals 302-2.6.6.1 General The work shall consist of but not limited to furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and transportation for the application of the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion. Application of aggregate to conform with 302-2 of the standard specifications and these Special Provisions unless otherwise specified herein. The work shall be done in the following order: Preparing the pavement surface; applying the Polymer Modified Asphalt Surface Sealer and scrubbing the applied emulsion sealer with a scrub broom as specified herein; applying aggregate, brooming the aggregate with a secondary broom when specified, rolling the aggregate; and sweeping up DRAFT 74 and disposing of excess aggregate off from the job site. The Polymer Modified Asphalt Rejuvenating Emulsion shall comply with Section 203-3 of these Special Provisions. The screenings shall conform with section 200-1.2.2 and Section 302-2 of the Standard Specifications 302-2.6.6.2 Pre-Qualification The Contractor shall: a) have had a minimum of three (3) years experience in the application of the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsions as applied to scrub-seal; and b) have successfully completed at least three (3) Scrub Seal projects utilizing the scrub-broom to the satisfaction of their clients. 302-2.6.6.3 Equipment The following equipment to be used for the scrub-seal shall be as follows: A. An asphalt distributor for application of the emulsion sealer shall have a full circulation spray bar that is adjustable to at least sixteen (16) feet wide in two (2) feet increments and capable of heating and circulating the emulsion simultaneously. It must have computerized rate control for adjusting and controlling the application from the cab that is adjusting by .01 gallons per square yard increments. The distributor shall also be equipped with a volume measuring device and a thermometer for measuring the emulsion temperature in the tank. B. A SCRUB BROOM as described herein shall be used to scrub the emulsion sealer after application. C. A self-propelled aggregate spreader with front discharge that can evenly distribute aggregate. D. A minimum of two (2) pneumatic rollers weighing at least five (5) tons each. E. Two (2) mechanically powered kick-brooms or vacuum type brooms. F. A back pack blower for removing excess chips during the sweeping operation. 302-2.6.6.4 Scrub Broom Equipment The scrub broom frame shall be constructed of metal. The scrub broom shall be attached to and pulled by the distributor truck. The scrub broom must be equipped with the means to mechanically raise and lower the scrub broom off and onto the road surface at designated points of completion and start up. It shall be tow able in the elevated position to the next area of construction. The weight of the broom assembly shall be such that it does not squeegee the emulsion sealer off the roadway surface. The main body of the scrub broom shall be a minimum of 6’-9” wide and 8’-0” (ft) deep. The maximum width of the rigid frame at any point shall not exceed 8’-0”. The depth shall not exceed DRAFT 75 10’-0” The nearest and furthest members, paralleling the back of the spreader truck, and diagonal members shall be equipped with street brooms. The leading member and the trailing member shall have broom heads angled at 15 degrees off the centerline of the supporting member. The diagonal members shall have broom heads attached in line with the centerline of the supporting member. Each individual street broom attached to the scrub broom assembly shall be 3 ½” w x 6 ½” h x 16” L and have stiff nylon bristles. Bristle height is to be maintained at a minimum of 5”. The scrub broom shall be equipped with a min. of 2- hinged wing assemblies attached to the main body not to exceed 4’-6” (ft) in total per side, with diagonals and equipped with street brooms. The purpose of the maximum rigid frame width and the hinged wing extensions is not only for maximum width of 16’ (ft) but to maintain the scrubbing process evenly as contours and cross- sections change across the existing road surface. NOTE: The contractor shall supply a scrub broom as described for the purpose of scrubbing the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion. If the Contractor fails to supply the scrub broom specified, the project shall be shut down until the contractor supplies the required equipment in full operation. Shutdowns resulting from the failure to provide this specified scrub broom shall not excuse the Contractor from the provisions of contract working days. DRAFT 76 DRAFT 77 302-2.6.6.5 Application All incidental work such as surfacing of driveway aprons and returns shall be done concurrently with the surfacing of the street proper. The scrub seal shall be applied 0”-4” from the lip of the gutter. Where a curb exists without gutter, the scrub seal shall be applied 0”-4” from the face of curb when receiving a cape. If a cape is not specified, then the scrub seal shall be placed from edge of pavement to edge of pavement. Where no curb or gutter exists, the scrub seal shall be applied from edge of pavement to edge of pavement. The edges of the limits of the scrub seal application on both sides of the street shall be maintained in a neat and uniform line. Scrub seal shall not be applied on concrete gutters or pads unless directed by the Engineer. The application of the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion shall be applied when ambient temperature is above forty (40) degrees Fahrenheit and rising. The polymer modified rejuvenating emulsion shall not be placed if the ambient temperature during the twenty-four curing period (24) hours is expected to be below twenty-five (25) degrees Fahrenheit. The termination time of application shall be determined by the Engineer. The areas to be scrub sealed shall have the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion applied with a distributor truck to the pavement surface at a rate of 0.25 to 0.40 gallons per square yard. For cul-de-sacs, turnout pockets, elbows and curve returns the use of the scrub broom will not be required. The actual emulsion sealer application rate required will be determined by the pavement surface condition and aggregate the aggregate used. Recommended application rate ranges for both aggregate and emulsion are shown in Table 302-2.6.2 and Table 302-2.6.4.2 of the Standard Specifications. The actual application of the emulsion sealer shall be determined by the manufacturer’s representative and/or the Engineer. The Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion temperature when applied shall be at a minimum of 110 degrees Fahrenheit. For smaller areas the emulsion sealer may be applied with a wand. The emulsion sealer shall be immediately broomed to fill cracks and voids. The application of the Polymer Modified Rejuvenating Emulsion and the scrub broom operation shall cease 40’ (ft) prior to the end of the street section or intersection. The remaining emulsion sealer shall be drug out by the scrub broom, and the remaining emulsion sealer required to complete the pass shall be applied only by the spread truck (boot truck), at the specified rate. Immediately following the scrubbing of emulsion sealer, aggregate shall be applied at the rate specified. The rate shall be adjusted up or down so that no “bleed through” occurs during rolling. The aggregate shall be spread evenly by a mechanical spreader. Aggregate ¼”X #10 or less shall be broomed with a SECONDARY AGGREGATE BROOM to fill all cracks and voids, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The SECONDARY AGGREGATE BROOM when used must be equipped with the means to mechanically raise and lower the broom off and onto the road surface at DRAFT 78 designated points of completion and start up. The design shall be similar in design to that of the emulsion broom. The exception would be that the internal diagonal members shall be used for stiffness and shall not have broom heads attached to the cross members. It shall be pulled by a vehicle following the aggregate spreader to ensure even distribution of the aggregate, and penetration of the aggregate into the cracks. The weight of the broom assembly shall be such that it does not roll or turn the aggregate that is set in the emulsion sealer. The use of the SECONDARY AGGREGATE BROOM can be used immediately after the application of the chips or after rolling. The sequence of operation will be determined by the Engineer. 302-2.7 Finishing Finishing shall conform with section 302-2.7 of the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions. A minimum of two self-propelled pneumatic-tired rollers shall be used for the required rolling of the aggregate. The pneumatic-tired rollers shall be in good working condition and actively rolling at all times during the scrub seal operation. The pneumatic-tired rollers shall be a minimum of 5 tons. The pneumatic-tired rollers shall be operated in such a manner to prevent the dislodging of newly applied aggregate. Power sweeping shall be done before the end of the day after scrub seal operation to remove any excess loose aggregate. During the sweeping process the Contractor shall use a backpack blower to clear driveways, gutters and sidewalks of excess aggregate at the end of each day until the street is surfaced. The Contractor shall wait a minimum of one day after the scrub seal application before applying other surface treatments as specified. The Contractor shall exercise care to prevent oil from being deposited on concrete surfaces. Each day the Contractor shall remove oil from the surfaces not designated to caped. No additional streets shall be scrub sealed until this cleanup has been performed. The method of the oil removal shall be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall install temporary raised pavement markers and tabs once the scrub seal is cured until the roadway surface is ready for permanent raised pavement markers and striping. 302-2.11 Payment Add the following: Payment for chip seal shall include post emergent herbicide treatment of the areas to receive chip seal and no additional payment will be made, therefore. DRAFT 79 302-3 MICROSURFACING 302-3.8 Scheduling, Public Convenience and Traffic Control Scheduling for Microsurfacing shall conform to Section 302-3.8 of the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions. The Contractor shall schedule the work so as to prevent damage by all traffic, including but not limited to, mail delivery and trash pickup. The Contractor shall not schedule work so as to conflict with trash pickup. The Contractor shall obtain the trash pickup schedule and provide its schedule and any modifications thereto to the trash pickup entity. At least two weeks prior to work, the Contractor shall send, by first class mail, notification letters to all property addresses on which sealing will occur and all other property addresses within 500 feet thereof. Obtaining the appropriate addresses shall be the contractor’s responsibility. Notification letters shall be in bold type as follows, with the appropriate information specific to the work inserted at the locations indicated in the brackets and italicized. (Date) (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor) (Contractor’s License Number) As a part of the City of Lake Elsinore’s ongoing program to maintain its streets, your street will be sealed with a mixture of asphalt and aggregates, beginning in two or three weeks. This process requires that your street be closed for X day(s) starting at 7:00 a.m. to X:XX p.m. and until the Contractor removes the traffic control devices. You will be notified 72 hours in advance of the day your street will be closed by a brightly colored 3 ½” x 8 ½” card attached to your doorknob. You will also notice temporary no parking signs on your street with a specific no parking date written on it. A successful street maintenance program depends on your cooperation. Please do not drive, walk, play, skate or allow pets on the newly sealed street until all traffic control devices have been removed. Furthermore, please do not wash your car or turn on any sprinklers during the closure period. If you plan to leave your home after 7:00 a.m. on the day your street will be sealed, and you need to use your vehicle later, please park your car on an adjacent street in your neighborhood that is not signed as a no parking zone. When walking to and from your car, remember not to walk on the newly sealed street or you will have black residue on the bottom of your shoes. The residue will damage some surfaces, will mark all surfaces that you track it on, and will be very difficult to remove. (Name of Contractor) is the Contractor that will be performing the resurfacing work for the City and you may call them at (24 hour per day attended telephone number in the 951 area code) for any questions you may have about the project. Sealing of your street will not occur on the day your trash is collected. On the day your street is sealed mail delivery may be delayed until the following day. You will not know DRAFT 80 the exact date your street will be closed until you receive the 3 ½” x 8 ½” card. If you have a moving company scheduled to come to your house within the next two weeks, please call and inform the Contractor of the date. If you have any concerns which are not addressed by the Contractor, please call the City’s Engineering Department at 951-674-3124. They will assist you in resolving the concerns. During sealing operations, the Contractor’s schedule shall be designed to provide residents and business owners whose streets are to be sealed sufficient paved parking within an 800 foot distance from their homes or businesses. 302-4 SLURRY SEAL SURFACING 302-4.1 General Add the following: Slurry Seal shall be emulsion-aggregate slurry (EAS) conforming to 302-4.3, TYPE II, with Carbon Black additive. Add the following subsection: 302-4.1.1 Rout and Seal Random Cracks All cracks will be filled with a rubberized asphalt material that has a minimum softening point temperature of 200° Fahrenheit and a safe heating temperature of 380° Fahrenheit, or otherwise directed by the City representative/inspector. 1. For cracks in size of 1/8 inch to 3/8 inch width, the crack shall be widened using a router to form a sealant reservoir which is a minimum of 1/2 inch wide and ¾ inch to 1 inch deep. The routed crack shall then be cleaned with hot compressed air to remove all dust and moisture, and then sealed to service level. 2. Cracks that are more than 3/8 inch but less than ¾ inch shall be cleaned for the entire crack depth using sandblasting, brushing and hot air blowing techniques, as required to provide a crack free from all debris, dust, loose material, and moisture, The clean crack shall be filled with sealant, from the bottom up to the surface level, in a manner which does not result in sealant bridging or entrapped air pockets. With deep cracks, settlement of sealant may occur, thus requiring application of a second layer of sealant material. For cracks with depressed surfaces on each side of the crack shall be overfilled beyond level with pavement surface and then squeezed to fill in depressed area. No more than 2 inch wide and 1/16” thick strip of material may be applied to the pavement surface. The crack seal for the specified width of 3/8 inch to ¾ inch shall apply to all pavement surfaces receiving slurry seal II treatment with Black Carbon additive. 3. Cracks wider than ¾ inch and potholes shall be cleaned using sandblasting or other cleaning technique approved by the Engineer. The cracks and/or potholes shall then be filled with pea-gravel size hot mix asphalt concrete as directed by the Engineer. Filling cracks and potholes shall apply to all pavement surfaces receiving type II Slurry with Black Carbon DRAFT 81 additive. 4. No Slurry seal material shall be placed until after the crack seal and/or fill material has been in place for a minimum of two (2) calendar days. Payment: The Contract Lump Sum price for Rout and Seal Random Cracks/Fill Potholes shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, including traffic control, required for crack routing, crack cleaning, crack sealing, crack and pothole filling, sweeping and application of herbicide and sealant as directed by the engineer and no additional compensation will be allowed. 302-4.7 Scheduling, Public Convenience and Traffic Control Add the following: The Contractor shall schedule the work so as to prevent damage by all traffic, including but not limited to, mail delivery and trash pickup. The Contractor shall not schedule work so as to conflict with trash pickup. The Contractor shall obtain the trash pickup schedule and provide its schedule and any modifications thereto to the trash pickup entity. At least two weeks prior to work, the Contractor shall send, by first class mail, notification letters to all property addresses on which sealing will occur and all other property addresses within 500 feet thereof. Obtaining the appropriate addresses shall be the contractor’s responsibility. Notification letters shall be in bold type as follows, with the appropriate information specific to the work inserted at the locations indicated in the brackets and italicized. (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor) (Contractor’s License Number) (Date) As a part of the City of Lake Elsinore’s ongoing program to maintain its streets, your street will be sealed with a mixture of asphalt and sand, beginning in two or three weeks. This process requires that your street be closed for X day(s) starting at 7:00 a.m. to X:XX p.m. and until the Contractor removes the traffic control devices. You will be notified 72 hours in advance of the day your street will be closed by a brightly colored 3 ½” x 8 ½” card attached to your doorknob. You will also notice temporary no parking signs on your street with a specific no parking date written on it. A successful street maintenance program depends on your cooperation. Please do not drive, walk, play, skate or allow pets on the newly sealed street until all traffic control devices have been removed. Furthermore, please do not wash your car or turn on any sprinklers during the closure period. If you plan to leave your home after 7:00 a.m. on the day your street will be sealed, and you need to use your vehicle later, please park your car on an adjacent street in your neighborhood that is not signed as a no parking zone. When walking to and from your car, remember not to walk on the newly sealed street or DRAFT 82 you will have black residue on the bottom of your shoes. The residue will damage some surfaces, will mark all surfaces that you track it on, and will be very difficult to remove. (Name of Contractor) is the Contractor that will be performing the resurfacing work for the City and you may call them at (24 hour per day attended telephone number in the 951 area code) for any questions you may have about the project. Sealing of your street will not occur on the day your trash is collected. On the day your street is sealed mail delivery may be delayed until the following day. You will not know the exact date your street will be closed until you receive the 3 ½” x 8 ½” card. If you have a moving company scheduled to come to your house within the next two weeks, please call and inform the Contractor of the date. If you have any concerns which are not addressed by the Contractor, please call the City’s Engineering Department at 951-674-3124. They will assist you in resolving the concerns. During sealing operations, the Contractor’s schedule shall be designed to provide residents and business owners whose streets are to be sealed sufficient paved parking within an 800 foot distance from their homes or businesses. 302-4.8.2 Emulsion Aggregate Slurry (EAS) Add the following section: As part of surface preparation prior to application of emulsion-slurry seal the Contractor shall: 1. Treat the area to receive emulsion-slurry seal with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be applied at least 5 (five) working days prior to sealing of street. Allowance for the five day period shall be shown in the schedule required per Section 6-1, Construction Schedule and Commencement of the Work. 2. Remediate cracks, potholes, and large areas of alligator cracking. Remediation shall be accomplished by: a) Removal of existing asphalt pavement, base material and soil and replacement with full depth asphalt concrete in locations designated by the Engineer. b) Crack cleaning and sealing of all cracks designated by the Engineer. 302-5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 302-5.1 General Add the following: The Contractor shall treat all vegetation within the limits of the paved area to receive asphalt concrete paving with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be applied at least 5 (five) working days prior to paving the area. Allowance for the five day period shall be shown in the schedule required per section 6-1, Construction Schedule and Commencement of the Work. The surface course asphalt concrete shall be installed as a last order of work after all concrete improvements and base course asphalt has been installed. DRAFT 83 302-5.4 Tack Coat Add the following: The Contractor shall place a tack coat between the interface of existing pavement and new pavement and successive courses when, in the opinion of the engineer, the Contractor has failed to maintain or prepare each previously laid course of asphalt receiving the subsequent course of asphalt in a sufficiently clean state and the asphalt receiving the new pavement course is dirty enough to impair bonding between the next lift of asphalt. Tack coat for overlay shall be Thermoplastic Polymer Modified High Performance Seal (TPMS) manufactured by Paramount Petroleum Corporation (562-531-2060), for overlay, or an approval equal. The Engineer shall approve the exact rate and number of applications. The tack coat shall be applied as specified in Subsection 302-5.4 of the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions. The Engineer will determine if the pavement is sufficiently dry for the application of the tack coat. Tack coat shall not be applied when the temperature of the surface to be tacked is below 50° F in the shade. Whenever pavement surface temperatures exceed 120, a small test section shall be applied approximately 30 feet in length to gauge setup time for the tack to not stick to truck tires. The setup time shall be recorded. Paving, material delivery and tack coat placement must be coordinated and scheduled to provide that tack is setup before placing trucks on the tacked area. Pavement surface temperatures shall be monitored, and additional test sections shall be performed to revise the paving operation as conditions change. Upon occurrence of tracking of tack coat, paving shall cease, except remaining material in the hopper shall be used, and the tack shall be allowed time to setup. On all vertical joins of AC patching, apply SS-1H tack coat uniformly in two coats of .20 gallons per square yard each with full “break” in between, or .20 gallons per square yard PG 64-10 uniformly in one coat. Tack coat shall not be applied when the temperature of the surface to be backed is below 60° F in the shade. The TPMS shall be heated slowly to 350-425 F. At no time TPMS shall be heated above 750 F. The product shall be applied through a distributor truck equipped with a heating unit capable of raising temperature at least 3 F per hour, and shall maintain tack coat temperature at or above 350 F. It shall be equipped with a full circulating spreader bar and pumping system capable of applying TPMS material within a +0.01 gallons per square yard tolerance of specified application rate and give uniform covering of the surface to be treated. The distributor shall also include a tachometer, pressure gauge, and volume measuring device and thermometer. The application rates shall be 0.15 gallons per square yard for all ARHM overlay or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Tack coat shall not be applied until preparation of the existing surface has been completed and thoroughly cleaned, and then only so far in advance of placing the overlay as permitted by the Engineer. Tack coat shall not be left exposed overnight. Immediately in advance DRAFT 84 of placing the overlay, additional tack coat shall be applied as directed by the Engineer, to areas where the tack coat has been destroyed or otherwise rendered ineffective, and no additional compensation will be allowed for such work. Paving of overlay shall not proceed until the tack coat has stiffened sufficiently to not stick to truck tires. Existing concrete curb faces and all concrete not to be overlaid shall be protected against disfigurement from the tack coat. Residue of tack coat material shall be removed from curb faces by sandblasting to return the concrete to its original condition unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Excessive tracking of tack coat onto adjacent pavements will require immediate clean-up. If significant amounts of paving asphalt are traced onto existing adjacent pavements, the contractor shall clean it off to the satisfaction of the Engineer or provide a slurry seal to restore the pavement at their own expense. 302-5.5 Distribution and Spreading Modify as follows: Add to the fifth paragraph: Asphalt Concrete pavement sections greater than 4” thick shall be constructed in two lifts or as directed; pavement base course shall be type B-PG64-10 and the final lift (surface layer) shall be C2-PG64-10 with a minimum thickness of 1-1/2 inch and shall not exceed 2-1/2 inch. Spreading, once commenced, shall be placed without interruption. The final or surface layer of asphalt concrete shall not be placed until all on-site improvements have been completed, including all grading. Add the following: Contractor shall provide and install header along longitudinal edge of pavement adjacent to natural earth shoulders. The Contractor shall provide 20-foot long automatic screed control on both sides of the paving machine for all paving with paving machine, as directed by Engineer. Each paving machine used will require a paving foreman for each machine along with a full set of rollers as specified and two rakers and one shoveler laborer at a minimum. 302-5.6 Rolling 302-5.6.1 General After last paragraph, add the following: Unless directed otherwise by the Engineer, the initial breakdown rolling shall be followed by a DRAFT 85 pneumatic-tired roller as described in this section. Rolling along a joint shall be such that the widest part of the roller is on the hot side of the joint. Rubber tire rollers shall be used on any leveling course. Three rollers shall be provided for installation of AC greater than 181 tonne (200 tons) per hour, regardless of thickness. Construction of hot mix asphalt concrete shall conform to Section 302-5 “Asphalt Concrete Pavement” of the Standard Specifications, except as modified herein. Should the methods and equipment furnished by the Contractor fail to produce a layer of asphalt concrete conforming to the requirements, including straightedge tolerance, of Subsection 302- 5.6.2, "Density and Smoothness," of the Standard Specifications, the paving operation shall be discontinued, and the Contractor shall modify his equipment or furnish substitute equipment. A drop-off of more than 0.15 ft will not be allowed at any time between adjacent lanes open to public traffic. The Contractor shall furnish a sufficient number of rollers to obtain the specified compaction and surface finish required by the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions. Pneumatic rollers shall be required on the lower layer only. Initial breakdown compaction shall consist of a minimum of three (3) coverages of a layer of asphalt mixture. A pass shall be a movement of rolling in both directions over the same path. Coverage shall consist of as many passes as are necessary to cover the entire width being paved. Overlap between passes during coverage, made to ensure compaction without displacement of material in accordance with good rolling practice, shall be considered to be part of the coverage being made and not part of a subsequent coverage. Each coverage shall be completed before subsequent coverages are started. 302-5.6.2 Density and Smoothness Add the following to the first paragraph: The completed surfacing shall be thoroughly compacted, smooth and free from ruts, humps, depressions or irregularities. Any ridges, indentations or other objectionable marks left in the surface of the asphalt concrete shall be eliminated by rolling or other means. The use of any equipment that leaves humps, ridges, irregularities, indentations or other objectionable marks in the asphalt concrete shall be discontinued, and acceptable equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. DRAFT 86 The transverse slope of the finished surface shall be uniform to a degree such that no depressions greater than 0.01 ft. are present when tested with a straightedge 10 feet long, laid in a direction transverse to the center line. If the test results for any lot of asphalt concrete indicate that the relative compaction is below 95.0 percent (95%), the Contractor will be advised that he is not attaining the required relative compaction and that his materials, procedures, or both, need adjustment. Asphalt concrete spreading operations shall not continue until the Contractor has notified the Engineer of the adjustment that will be made in order to meet the required compaction. 302-5.7 Joints Add the following: Before placing the top layer adjacent to cold transverse construction joints, the joints shall be trimmed to a vertical face and to a neat line. Longitudinal joints shall be trimmed to a vertical face and to a neat line if the edges of the previously laid surfacing are, in the opinion of the Engineer, in such a condition that the quality of the completed joint will be affected. Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be tested with a 10-foot straightedge and shall be cut back as required to conform to the provisions in Subsection 302-5.6.2, “Density and Smoothness,” for surface smoothness. Connections to existing surfacing shall be feathered to conform to the provisions for smoothness. Longitudinal joints in the top layer shall correspond with the edges of proposed traffic lanes (striping). Longitudinal joints in all other layers shall be offset not less than 0.5 foot alternately each side of the edges of traffic lanes. All feathered joints shall be sealed after rolling. During asphalt concrete paving operations, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to place protective covering over, or to otherwise avoid paving over survey markers, monuments, and benchmarks, and to remove said covering and/or asphalt concrete after paving operations have been completed. Join lines between successive runs shall be within 6 inches of lane lines or center of street or a minimum of 14 feet outside of the outer most lane line or center of street, or 5 to 6 feet from a lane line or center of street and within a lane. The joint pattern for all pavement layers shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for review and approval 2 weeks in advance of the first lift of pavement to be placed. No exceptions to the specified requirements for joints shall be anticipated, and the Engineer’s decision shall be final. 302-5.9 Measurement and Payment Add the following: DRAFT 87 Payment for Asphalt Concrete shall be made at the price bid per ton and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to perform the work. Payment for tack coat shall be included in the price bid for Asphalt Concrete for which tack coat is required and no additional payment shall be allowed therefore. 302-7 PAVEMENT FABRIC 302-7.1 General Add the following: Pavement reinforcing shall be placed to the limits approved by the Engineer. 302-7.2.3 Laydown Add the following: The fabric shall be stretched, aligned, and placed without any wrinkles that lap. The test for lapping shall be made by gathering together the fabric in a wrinkle. If the height of the double portion of extra fabric is 1/2” or more, the fabric shall be cut to remove the wrinkle, and then lapping in the direction of paving. Lap in excess of 2” shall be removed. Delete the second sentence of the eighth paragraph and add the following: If necessary, exposed tack coat on top of fabric shall be covered lightly with sand. 302-9 ASPHALT RUBBER HOT MIX (ARHM) 302-9.1 General Replace the entire subsection with the following: ARHM shall conform to 203-11. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, ARHM shall be Class ARHM-GG-C. The Contractor shall schedule the paving work such that no longitudinal drop-offs on the pavement will remain overnight in the travelled way. Any transverse drop-offs on the pavement over 1 inch in height that will remain overnight shall be ramped with temporary AC pavement. [Include the following if the Work includes full-width cold milling and placement of ARHM directly over the cold milled surface, not on an ARAM:] Roadways to receive full-width cold milling shall be resurfaced within 24 hours of cold milling any portion of the Work. [End inclusion.] [Include the following if the Work includes placement of ARHM over an ARAM:] DRAFT 88 ARHM shall be placed within 48 hours of the completion of placement of the asphalt rubber and aggregate membrane (ARAM). [End inclusion.] 302-9.3 Distribution and Spreading Replace the second sentence with the following: Asphalt rubber hot mix shall not be placed until the atmospheric temperature is a minimum of 55 degrees F and rising, and the surface temperature of the underlying material is a minimum of 55 degrees F, or during unsuitable weather. Add the following: The spreading and finishing machine shall be equipped with a fully automatic screed control system which shall be in operation at all times. The system shall be either a contact (skid) or non- contact (sonic averaging) system. The skid shall be a minimum of 30-feet long, mounted on the side of the spreading and finishing machine which will receive the next mat of material, and be placed in contact with the pavement surface. The sonic averaging system shall have a ski, a minimum of 24 feet long, mounted on the side of the spreading and finishing machine which will receive the next mat of material. A joint maker placed on the side of the spreading and finishing machine to ride on the existing or previously constructed surface or mat of material may be required as directed by the Engineer. 302-9.5 Joints Add the following: Longitudinal joints shall coincide with traffic lane lines unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 302-9.6 Manholes (and Other Structures) Add the following: Survey monuments shall be protected in place. The Contractor shall locate all survey monuments within the project area prior to the start of the Work. During the progress of the Work, cold millings, hot or cold mix asphalt concrete materials, and other debris shall not damage or cover the survey monuments. Damaged survey monuments shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. Should the survey monuments be damaged, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to replacing. DRAFT 89 SECTION 303 CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 303-1 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 303-1.1 General Add the following: Where the Plans refer to the Standard Drawings or Standard Plans for construction details for concrete structures or elements and the primary dimensional requirements (such as chamber length, width, depth, etc.) are not shown in said Standard Drawings or Plans, then the next larger size dimension for that requirement shall be used to establish dependent structure element characteristics (such as wall thickness, reinforcement schedule, etc.). The Contractor may extend or otherwise increase the total length of inlet, basin or cleanout structures by as much as a total of four feet (4'), to meet the uncut ends of pipe. Payment for pipe to the limits shown on the Plans shall be full compensation for extending such structures. Where concrete structures are extended, steel reinforcing shall be extended in the pattern and spacing shown for the standard length structure. Concrete brow ditches, if air-placed, shall be constructed in accordance with Section 303-2, Air Placed Concrete, of the Standard Specifications, and these Special Provisions. Otherwise, brow ditch construction and materials shall conform to the applicable provisions of Section 303-1, Concrete Structures. 303-1.2 Subgrade for Concrete Structures Add the following section: 303-1.2.1 Reinforced Concrete Box Subgrade The design details for the project provide for the placement of six-mil polyethylene sheeting as an underlayer below the RCB culvert and transition structures and over the gravel foundation mattress. The Contractor shall furnish and place six-mil polyethylene sheeting as an underlayer below these reinforced concrete structures. The placing of steel reinforcement and placement of concrete shall be accomplished as soon after the installation of the polyethylene sheeting as possible. Add the following section: 303-1.2.2 Reinforced Concrete Box Gravel Foundation Mattress Gravel foundation mattress under the reinforced concrete box (RCB) culverts and reinforced concrete box (RCB) transition structures shall be constructed to the limits and grades shown on the Plans and in accordance with these Special Provisions. It is the intent of these specifications that a firm, unyielding gravel mattress or layer be constructed to help bridge any earthen subgrade irregularities or minor differential settlements and to act as a stable working surface for the placement of reinforcing steel and concrete forms DRAFT 90 for the construction of RCB culverts and transition structures. Permeable material for use as gravel foundation mattress under RCB and transition structures shall consist of hard, durable, clean sand, gravel, or crushed stone; and shall be free of organic material, clay balls, or other deleterious substances. Permeable material shall conform to the gradation requirements for Class 1, Type B permeable material specified in Section 200-3.2, “Permeable Material”, of these Special Provisions. The Contractor shall place permeable material for foundation mattress within the limits and to the lines and grades shown on the Plan. Permeable material shall be placed directly on prepared subgrade unless filter fabric material is specified or shown on the Plans. The finish subgrade surface of the pervious mattress material shall be held to the closest practicable tolerance, and in no case shall the finish subgrade surface deviate from the indicated slope and grade lines by greater than plus zero inches (0”) above or minus two inches (-2”) below. Permeable mattress material shall be spread uniformly on the prepared subgrade to the neat lines indicated on the drawings in such a manner that the gradation after final placement remains within the limits specified. Placing of material by methods which will tend to segregate particle size within the mattress layer will not be permitted. Permeable material shall be deposited and spread in a manner so as to prevent damage to or displacement of the filter fabric subgrade cover below. Imported permeable material shall be placed on the subgrade as uniform mixtures and each layer shall be spread in one operation. Segregation shall be avoided, and the layer shall be free from pockets of coarse or fine material. Permeable material shall be deposited at a uniform quantity per linear foot, which quantity will provide the required compacted thickness within the tolerances specified herein without resorting to spotting, picking up, or otherwise shifting the gravel material. Where the required thickness is twelve inches (12”) or less, the gravel mattress material may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required thickness is more than twelve inches (12”), the permeable material shall be spread and compacted in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness, and the maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed twelve inches (12”). Each layer shall be spread and compacted in a similar manner. The use of motor graders will be permitted during depositing, spreading, and compacting operations.DRAFT 91 Rolling for compaction shall always be commenced along the edge of the area to be compacted and the roller shall gradually advance toward the center of the area to be compacted. Rollers shall be operated along lines parallel or concentric with the centerline of the road being constructed, and no material variation there from will be permitted. All rollers must be maintained in good mechanical condition. During and after placement and compaction of the permeable mattress material, the surface shall be protected from damage, erosion, or movement by flowing water or mechanical injury. Add the following section: 303-1.2.3 Reinforced Concrete Box Subdrain and Back drain Systems Sidewall back drain systems along reinforced concrete box (RCB) culverts and transition structures shall be constructed to the limits and grades and per the details shown on the Plans and in accordance with these Special Provisions. Each pipe shall be carefully inspected immediately before it is laid, and any that are damaged or defective shall not be used. The pipe shall be placed on the bedding surface that is accurately shaped to conform to the lower ¼ of the outside portion of the pipe. Perforated pipe shall have two rows of perforations of one-half inch diameter (1/2” Φ) holes at five inches (5”) on center, with rows separated by 120 degrees (120°) of arc centered at the pipe bottom. Pipe shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated or as directed. Pipe laying shall proceed upgrade from the lower end of the pipeline. Pipe grade shall be maintained within ¼ inch in 10 feet of that indicated. Upon completion of backfill, the area shall be suitable for placement of concrete invert or fill as applicable. The Contractor shall flush the sidewall back drain system with sufficient water to develop a flow of at least five cubic feet per minute (5 cfm) out of the end of the length of pipe being tested, as measured by approved measuring equipment furnished by the Contractor. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer. Two separate tests to demonstrate the proper functioning of the sidewall back drain collector lines shall be made by the Contractor. The first test of each completed section of the new back drain system shall be made immediately prior to placing concrete invert. Both tests shall conform to the above requirements. Final acceptance will be made only if the discharge is free and of adequate quantity. Any necessary clearing of drain lines shall be performed at no additional cost to the Agency. Add the following section: 303-1.2.4 Reinforced Concrete Box Subdrain and Back Drain Pipe Materials Pipe for weep holes and back drain collector pipes shall be smooth-wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC). DRAFT 92 Perforated pipe materials specified above for the back drain system shall conform to the requirements of Sections 68-1.02 and 68-2.02 of the State Standard Specifications and as specified herein. Standard for pipe diameter requirement shall be deleted from Section 68-2.02 of the State Standard Specifications and as specified herein. PVC pipe shall be smooth-wall type; no corrugated pipe shall be allowed. Cast iron pipe and fittings for back drain outlet shall be service weight and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A74. Add the following section: 303-1.2.5 Reinforced Concrete Box Back Drain Permeable Material Permeable material for sidewall back drains shall be Class 2 permeable material per Section 200- 3.3, Permeable Material, of these Special Provisions. Add the following section: 303-1.2.6 Reinforced Concrete Box Filter Fabric/Composite Drain Filter fabric shall be in accordance with Section 213-5, “Geosynthetics and Geogrids”, of these Special Provisions. Composite drain material on the sidewalls of the culverts shall be installed at the locations indicated on the project plans. Drain material shall be Miradrain G100N, J-Drain 300, or approved equivalent drainage system installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. The composite drain material shall have a minimum compressive strength of 20,000 pounds per square foot (20,000 psf), a minimum flow rate of seven gallons per minute per foot (7 gpmpf), and the filter fabric shall have a minimum grab tensile strength of 90 pounds. The fabric side of the composite drain shall be placed toward the soil. Add the following section: 303-1.2.7 Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Foundation Foundation soil shall be excavated as required to the depths and locations shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The exposed foundation soil shall be observed by the geotechnical engineer prior to construction to verify that the exposed material is suitable for the design bearing pressure and that the base of the excavation is free of loose soil, uncompacted fill, or water. The Contractor shall undercut any unsuitable soil when directed by the Engineer. Undercut areas shall be filled with crushed gravel or granular native soil when required by the DRAFT 93 geotechnical engineer and compacted to at least 90% of the material’s maximum dry density (per ASTM D1557). Add the following section: 303-1.2.8 Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Backfill Wall backfill material shall be placed in maximum eight inch (8”) loose lifts and compacted to at least 90% of the material’s maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Backfill shall be placed, spread, and compacted in such a manner that minimizes disturbance to the wall backdrain and drainpipe. The soil shall be sloped during construction in such a manner to drain all water away from the wall. Construction equipment shall be operated in such a way so as not to damage the wall drain and drainpipe system. Wall backfill soil shall have the following properties: • Soil friction angle shall be greater than or equal to 33 degrees. • Expansion index less than or equal to 50 (per UBC Standard 18-2). • Maximum particle size = 2 inches. On-site soils meeting the above criteria may have to be processed or selectively graded, or soils may need to be imported onto the site to meet this specification. 303-1.3 Forms Add the following: Forms shall be braced to withstand the pressures developed and shall be tight to prevent loss of mortar. Tangent sections for formed wall surfaces shall result in concrete surface free of any unevenness greater than quarter-inch (1/4”) when checked with a ten-foot (10’) straightedge. Forms for covered conduit or open channel curved sections shall be constructed along the arc of the curve. The finished surface shall follow the arc of the curve. If permitted by the Engineer, covered conduit curved section may use chord panel length not to exceed eight feet (8’). Ends of the chord panel shall be on the arc of the curve. Reinforcing steel shall be billet steel conforming to ASTM A615 and of the grade shown. 303-1.6 Falsework 303-1.6.2 Falsework Design Add the following: The Contractor shall provide all temporary bracing necessary to withstand all imposed loads DRAFT 94 during erection, construction, and removal of any falsework. The Contractor shall provide falsework drawings and calculations prepared by a registered professional engineer, civil or structural, that show provisions for resolution of all loads that may be imposed upon the falsework. Such plans and calculations shall include: 1. Resolution of all live, dead, wind, construction and impact loads that may be imposed on the falsework. 2. Temporary bracing or methods to be used during each phase of erection and removal of the falsework. 3. Concrete placement sequence. 4. Erection and removal sequence. 5. Deflection values for the falsework that include recommended methods to compensate for falsework deflections, vertical alignment, and anticipated falsework deflection. 303-1.7 Placing Reinforcement 303-1.7.1 General Add the following: Aluminum and plastic support for reinforcement shall not be used. Bars shall be accurately spaced as shown on the Plans and spacing of the first bar immediately adjacent to a transverse construction joint shall be one-half the required spacing shown on the Plans. In no case shall the clear distance between parallel bars be less than 2 ½ diameters of the bar or a minimum of two inches (2”). Unless otherwise shown on the plans, embedment of reinforcing steel (other than stirrups and spacers) shall be 1 ½ inches clear depth for #8 bars and smaller and shall be 2 inches clear for #9 bars and larger. Where placement of reinforcing steel requires alternate bars of different size, embedment requirements shall be governed by the larger bar. Stirrups and spacers shall be embedded not less than one-inch clear depth. Measurement of embedment shall be from the outside of the bar to the nearest concrete face. Tack welding on reinforcing bars will not be permitted. 303-1.7.2 Splicing Add the following: Splicing of reinforcing bars shall be either by lapping, butt welding, or by mechanical butt splicing, at the option of the Contractor. Reinforcing bars may be continuous at locations where splices are shown on the Plans, at the option of the Contractor. The location of splices, except where shown on the Plans, shall be determined by the Contractor as approved by the Engineer, based upon using available commercial lengths where practicable. DRAFT 95 Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer, splices in adjacent reinforcing bars shall be staggered. The minimum distance between staggered splices for reinforcing bars No. 11 or small shall be the length required for a lapped splice in the bar. Completed welded butt splices and mechanical butt splices shall develop not less than ninety percent (90 %) of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of the un-spliced reinforcing bar. The deviation in alignment of reinforcing bars at a welded or mechanical splice shall not be more than ¼-inch over a 3 ½ foot length of bar. Prior to use in the work, welded butt splices and mechanical butt splices shall be qualified by tests made on sample splices. During the progress of the work, in addition to inspection and non-destructive testing performed by the Engineer on all types of butt splices, job control tests shall be made on sample splices representing each lot of mechanical butt splices. Sample splices for qualification and job control tests shall be tested for compliance with all specified requirements for splices. All such sample splices shall be fabricated and tested by the Contractor at its cost and a copy of the test results furnished to the Engineer. Splices shall consist of placing the reinforcing bars in contact and wiring them together in such a manner as to maintain the alignment of the bars and to provide minimum clearances. No lapped splices will be permitted at locations where the concrete section is not sufficient to provide a minimum clear distance of two inches (2”) between the splice and the nearest adjacent bar. The clearance to the surface of the concrete shall not be reduced. The length of lapped splices shall be as follows: Reinforcing bars No. 8, or smaller, shall be lapped at least 45 diameters of the smaller bar joined, and reinforcing bars Nos. 9, 10, and 11 shall be lapped at least 60 diameters of the smaller bar joined, except when otherwise shown on the Plans. Splices of tensile reinforcement at points of maximum stress shall be avoided; however, any deviation from splices shown on the Plans shall be approved by the Engineer. Splices in longitudinal steel shall be staggered at least the length of the splice. 303-1.8 Placing Concrete Add the following: When concrete is to be deposited in a member less than 16 inches in width, the use of double belting to prevent segregation of the concrete shall be permitted, in lieu of pipes or tremies. Each belt shall extend equidistant into the forms to a point where concrete shall not fall more than six feet (6’). When placed in the forms, the belts shall be aligned directly opposite each other. DRAFT 96 303-1.8.6 Joints Add the following: Unless otherwise specified, transverse construction joints shall be placed in all reinforced sections at intervals of not less than ten feet (10’) or more than fifty feet (50’). The joints shall be in the same plane for the entire structure, and for concrete thickness greater than six inches (6”) shall be keyed as directed by the Engineer. Construction of all reinforced concrete sections (including inverts) shall be by the alternate panel method, and no continuous placement through joints will be permitted. After placement of all concrete in a panel or section on one side of the joint has been completed, placement of concrete on the other side of the joint shall be delayed as directed by the Engineer; but in no event shall the delay be less than eight (8) hours. 303-1.9 Surface Finishes 303-1.9.1 General Add the following: The longitudinal and transverse channel invert elevation shall not vary from true line and grade more than ½ inch. The unevenness shall not be more than ¼ inch when checked with a ten-foot (10’) straightedge. Top of channel wall and channel side slope elevation shall not vary from true line and grade more than ½ inch. Unevenness shall not be more than ½ inch when checked with a ten-foot (10’) straightedge. Any surfaces which fail to conform to the above tolerances shall be ground in accordance with the best standard practice until the tolerances are met. Grinding shall not reduce the concrete cover on reinforcing steel to less than 1-1/2 inches. Portions of inverts which cannot be corrected satisfactorily by grinding shall be removed and replaced. Except as specified above, vertical or horizontal position of structures as shown on the Plans or as specified in these specifications, shall not vary more than ½ inch from true position. Elevation at inlet lips shall not vary more than ¼ inch from elevations shown on the Plans. The ten-foot (10’) straightedge or template shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be readily available prior to placing of concrete. 303-1.9.2 Ordinary Surface Finish Add the following: Ordinary surface finish shall not apply to rock pockets which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are of such an extent or character as to affect the strength of the structure materially or to endanger the life of the steel reinforcement. In such cases, the Engineer may declare the concrete DRAFT 97 defective and require the removal and replacement of the portions of the structure affected. Add the following section: 303-1.9.5 Surface Finish for Concrete Spillway The Contractor shall provide a surface finish for concrete spillway to prevent the use of rollerblades, skateboards, and other rolling devices. Surface finish shall be a rough finish approved by the Engineer. 303-1.10 Curing Add the following: Where the curing compound method is used on concrete surfaces exposed after construction, the invert surface shall be sealed with a Type 1 chlorinated rubber base compound, and the wall surfaces shall be sealed with a Type 1 wax base compound. 303-1.12 Payment Add the following: Full compensation for this work shall be paid at the lump sum or unit prices bid for various concrete construction and appurtenant items or shall be considered as included in the Contract price for other items of work. The unit or lump sum price paid for the various concrete structures shall be considered as including the furnishing and installation of all concrete, reinforcing steel, forming, finishing, form removal, miscellaneous metal, gratings, frames and covers, excavating, backfilling, compaction, making connection of pipes, chain, access steps, ladders, plates, hardware, concrete bases, supporting utilities, weep holes and back drains, and providing all labor, equipment, materials, and tools necessary to provide the structure complete in place. Payment for curb inlets, curb outlets, catch basins, clean-outs, pipe collars and manholes shall be at the contract unit price per each. Payment for concrete brow ditch shall be at the contract unit price per lineal foot complete in place. Payment for concrete encasement or backfill of structures shall be considered as included in the contract price(s) paid for various types of pipe as specified elsewhere in these Special Provisions. Add the following section: 303-1.12.1 Reinforced Concrete Box Payment Payment for reinforced concrete box (RCB) culvert and transition structures shall be at the Contract lump sum or unit price bid. Such payment shall be considered as full compensation for the furnishing of all labor, material, tools, equipment, and for performing of all work necessary for the construction of RCB culverts, complete, and in place including, but not limited to, DRAFT 98 structural excavation, removal of portions of existing culverts and connecting thereto, forming, joints, joint material, finishing, Portland cement concrete, reinforcing steel; weepholes, permeable mattress and backdrain material, subdrain & backdrain systems, inlet pipe connections, access manholes, flab gates, variable-width common walls, interior wall hydraulic window openings, parapet walls, cut-off walls, wing walls, polyethylene subgrade cover; temporary utility support; phased construction requirements, integral utility crossing structures or sleeves, and backfill. All costs involved in the construction of windows for box conduits shall be included in the price bid for the applicable RCB item. For purposes of payment, no additions or deductions in box quantities will be made for windows. Add the following section: 303-1.12.2 Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall Payment Payment for reinforced concrete retaining walls shall be made at the lump sum or unit prices bid. Such payment shall be considered as full compensation for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment and for performing all work necessary for the construction of the Project Site retaining walls, complete, and in place including, but not limited to, structural excavation, forming, joints, joint material, reinforcing steel, weep holes, Portland cement concrete, finishing, waterproofing, installation of wall back drain system and connections to the storm drain system, backfill, and spoils disposal. 303-4 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 303-4.1 Concrete Block Masonry 303-4.1.2 Construction Add the following section: 303-4.1.2.1 Masonry Retaining Wall Foundation Foundation soil shall be excavated as required to the depths and locations shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The exposed foundation soil shall be observed by the geotechnical engineer prior to construction to verify that the exposed material is suitable for the design bearing pressure and that the base of the excavation is free of loose soil, uncompacted fill, or water. The Contractor shall undercut any unsuitable soil when directed by the Engineer. Undercut areas shall be filled with crushed gravel or granular native soil when required by the geotechnical engineer and compacted to at least 90% of the material’s maximum dry density (per ASTM D1557). Add the following section: 303-4.1.2.2 Masonry Retaining Wall Backfill Wall backfill material shall be placed in maximum eight inch (8”) loose lifts and compacted to at least 90% of the material’s maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Backfill shall be placed, spread, and compacted in such a manner that minimizes disturbance to the wall DRAFT 99 back drain and drainpipe. The soil shall be sloped during construction in such a manner to drain all water away from the wall. Construction equipment shall be operated in such a way so as not to damage the wall drain and drainpipe system. Wall backfill soil shall have the following properties: • The soil friction angle shall be greater than or equal to 33 degrees. • Expansion index less than or equal to 50 (per UBC Standard 18-2). • Maximum particle size = 2 inches. On-site soils meeting the above criteria may have to be processed or selectively graded, or soils may need to be imported onto the site to meet this specification. 303-4.1.5 Measurement and Payment Add the following section: 303-4.1.5.1 Masonry Retaining Wall Measurement and Payment Payment for masonry retaining walls shall be made at the lump sum or unit prices bid. Such payment shall be considered as full compensation for the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment and for performing all work necessary for the construction of the Project Site retaining walls, complete, and in place including, but not limited to, structural excavation, joints, joint material, reinforcing steel, weep holes, Portland cement concrete, finishing, waterproofing, installation of wall back drain system and connections to the storm drain system, backfill, and spoils disposal. When paid by the square foot the quantity measurement shall be the length of the wall by the height of the wall from top of footing to top of wall. 303-5 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, GUTTERS, CROSS GUTTERS, ALLEY INTERSECTIONS, ACCESS RAMPS, AND DRIVEWAYS 303-5.1 Requirements 303-5.1.1 General After the second sentence of the first paragraph, add the following: Delete the Class “B” mortar coat should curb be placed by extrusion machine and concrete mix is approved by the Engineer. All concrete shall be class 560-C-3250 unless otherwise specified on the plans. Delete the first sentence of the second paragraph and add the following: Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, and except as otherwise prescribed in 303-5.1.3, Driveway Entrances, the minimum thickness of walks shall be 4 inches (101.6 mm). Prior to DRAFT 100 placing concrete on subgrade, the existing grade shall be in a moistened condition to obtain optimum moisture content, and recompacted as determined by ASTM D1557-78. Add the following: When removals of curb and/or sidewalk are located at curb return, the Contractor shall install access ramps. The Contractor is to construct all access ramps in accordance with American Disability Act (ADA) Standards/California Code of Regulations Title 24 – Accessibility Regulations. If the ramps constructed by the Contractor are found to be in non-compliance with ADA Standards, the Contractor will be required to remove and replace the ramps to ADA Standards at the Contractor's expense. All removed curb and gutter, cross gutters, spandrels, driveway approaches, and sidewalks shall be replaced within three (3) calendar days, unless the Contractor provides reasonable documentation to exceed the three (3) day limit five (5) working days before removal and approved in writing by the Engineer. The Asphalt Concrete patch shall be placed within five (5) working days after the curb and gutters are replaced, and seven (7) days after the cross gutter and spandrels are replaced. No PCC shall be ordered and/or placed until the forms and subgrade have been inspected and approved by the Engineer in the field. All pull boxes, water meter boxes, and water valve covers shall be adjusted to the proposed finish grade and approved by the Engineer in the field prior to placement of the PCC. 303-5.1.2 Drainage Outlets Through Curb Add to the first paragraph with the following: Coring shall be required for all drains through existing curbs. 303-5.4.3 Weakened Plane Joints Add the following: All weakened plane joints shall be spaced at a maximum of 10 feet for curbs, gutters, and sidewalks. Scoring lines shall conform to those prevailing in the area and be uniform in spacing. 303-5.5 Finishing 303-5.5.2 Curb Add the following: The Contractor shall stamp the curb face with 3” high block letters directly above the point that it is crossed by underground facilities with the marking specified in Table 303-5.5.2(A) DRAFT 101 TABLE 303-5.5.2(A) CURB FACE MARKINGS Type of underground facilities Marking Water Service Lateral W Sewer Service Lateral S Irrigation/Reclaimed Water Lateral or Sleeve RW Gas Service Lateral G Delete the last sentence of second paragraph and add the following: The name of the Contractor and the year in which the improvement is constructed shall not be stamped in the completed work. Delete the first sentence in Paragraph 1 and add the following: The curb and gutter surface shall not vary more than 0.01 ft. from 10 ft. straightedge except at the grade changes. Prior to the removal of the forms, the surface shall be finished true to grade by means of a straightedge float of not less than 10 ft. in length and operated longitudinally over the surface of the concrete. Form clamps shall be constructed as not to interfere with the operation of the float. The form on the front of the curbs shall not be removed less than one (1) hour, or more than six (6) hours after the concrete has been placed. In no event shall forms be removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump. The top and face of the finished curb shall be true and straight and top surface of curbs shall be of uniform width, free from humps, sags, blemishes or other irregularities. 303-5.5.3 Walk Add the following: The sidewalk surface shall not vary more than 0.02' from the 10' straightedge except at grade changes, and the finished surface shall be free from humps, sags, blemishes or other irregularities. All sidewalks shall be a minimum of 4" thick, except at driveways where the sidewalks shall be a minimum of 6" thick for single family residential areas and 8" thick for all other areas. Construction of concrete sidewalk shall conform to City of Lake Elsinore Standard Drawing No. 210 for Standard Curb Sidewalk and No. 211 for Non-contiguous Sidewalk. Sidewalk shall be constructed to the dimensions as specified in the City’s Standard Drawing and as shown on the Plans, but application details and other specifications not explicitly stated or shown in the City’s Standard Drawing shall conform to Section 303-5 of the Standard Specifications. Portland cement concrete material shall be Portland Cement Concrete of type 560-C-3250. Certain segments of existing concrete curb may have broken or are out of alignment. Where any segment of existing concrete curb is broken and/or misaligned by more than one inch (1”), the broken or misaligned curb shall be removed and replaced with new concrete curb. A concrete sidewalk shall be constructed adjacent to curb that makes for a smooth flush surface. DRAFT 102 The Contractor is responsible for protecting all new Portland cement concrete construction from vandalism. All construction of Portland cement concrete shall be conducted under direct supervision of the Contractor’s staff and shall be monitored until the work has adequately cured and is not susceptible to damage from vandalism. Any vandalism identified on new concrete construction shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor, as required and directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the City. 303-5.6 Curing Delete first paragraph and add the following: Immediately after finishing operations are completed, Type 2 concrete curing compound shall be applied at a rate of one gallon per 150 square feet. 303-5.9 Measurement and Payment Add the following: Payment for concrete Curb and Gutter or Curb only shall be made at the price bid per linear foot, including transition sections where the curb face height varies (such as at pedestrian ramps, curb inlets, cross gutters and other depressions). Payment for concrete Sidewalk, Driveway, and Cross Gutter shall be at the unit prices bid per square foot, including transition sections where the concrete thickness varies (such as at the wings of driveways). Payment for curb inlet transitions on each side of curb inlets shall be made at the unit price bid for Curb and Gutter and no additional payment shall be made therefore. DRAFT 103 SECTION 304 METAL FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION 304-3 CHAIN LINK FENCE 304-3.1 General Add the following: The work includes installation of new chain link fencing and gates and the removal and relocation of existing chain link fencing as shown on the Plans. 304-3.2 Fence Construction Add the following: New fence construction includes both hole-dug ground surface installations and embedded-pole, structure-mounted installations (such as on parapets, wing walls, headwalls, retaining walls, and channel lining stiffening beams). Unless otherwise specified, materials and construction of chain link fencing and gates shall conform to Sections 206-6, Chain Link Fence, and 304-3, Chain Link Fence, of the Standard Specifications, the Plans, the Standard Drawings, and as provided herein. Where so specified or shown on the Plans, chain link fence materials and construction shall conform to Section 80-3, Chain Link Fence, of the State Standard Specifications, the Standard Plans, and as provided herein. 304-3.3 Installation of Gates Add the following: Where existing chain link fencing and/or gate improvements are shown on the Plans to be relocated, or where new fencing is required to remodel Caltrans right-of-way fencing, new fabric and support posts or framework materials shall match those to be joined or extended. Where existing fence is shown to be removed and relocated, and the Contractor does not undertake the installation in the new location immediately after removal, then the Contractor shall make provision to install temporary fencing or other type of perimeter enclosure or security during the interim period. The use and type of temporary, interim fencing, if proposed, shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the removal of the original fencing. The needs and wishes of the affected property owner shall be considered when selecting the type of temporary fence material for, and the timing of, interim fence installation. 304-3.4 Measurement and Payment Add the following: Payment for the installation of new chain link fence shall conform to this section or alternatively, when applicable, to Section 80-3.04, “Payment”, of the State Standard Specifications, and the following: DRAFT 104 Payment for a new chain link fence, regardless of type, shall be at the contract unit price per lineal foot. Payment for the removal and relocation of existing chain link fencing shall be at the contract unit price per lineal foot when a unit price bid item is provided or shall be included in clear and grub if no specific bid item is provided. DRAFT 105 SECTION 306 OPEN TRENCH CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION 306-3 TRENCH EXCAVATION Add the following: The work covers trench excavation, installation and backfill of reinforced concrete pipe (RCP), polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, corrugated high density polyethylene (N-12 HDPE) pipe, vitrified clay pipe (VCP), ductile iron pipe (DIP), cement mortar lined and coated (CMLC) steel pipe, cement mortar lined and epoxy painted steel pipe, Southern California Edison conduit, Gas Company, ATT/ Verizon conduit, Cox Communications/ Time Warner/ Mediacom Communications cable television conduit, irrigation conduit, other conduits of any type, and other appurtenant work. Open excavations on the Project Site shall be either backfilled by the end of each workday or secured with steel plates or temporary 6’ chain link fence as approved by the Engineer. 306-3.1 General Add the following to the first paragraph: No trenching operations requiring a permit shall be allowed until proof of a valid permit is submitted and approved to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractors inability or delay in obtaining the permit shall not be cause for delay, additional contract days, and/or additional compensation. 306-3.3 Removal and Abandonment of Existing Conduits and Structures Replace the third paragraph with the following: Structures shown on the Plans to be removed shall be removed to the full depth of the structure, including its foundation. Voids resulting from removed structures that are located in the pavement area and subject to traffic loads shall be filled with material approved by the Engineer and shall follow City Standards 602A and 602B for compaction requirements. Voids resulting from abandoned or removed structures not subject to traffic loads shall be filled with material approved by the Engineer and compacted to a relative compaction of 90%. Add the following: Contractor is responsible to coordinate necessary inspections with the appropriate utility owner prior to abandoning and/or removing existing facilities. 306-3.4 Minimum and Maximum Pipe Zone Trench Width. Add the following: There shall be no additional payments or deductions for variations in the trench excavation width. DRAFT 106 There shall be no direct payment for trench temporary and/or permanent pavement resurfacing. 306-4 SHORING AND BRACING Add the following: The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials required to design, install, and remove shoring, sheeting, bracing, lagging, cribbing, piling, tiebacks, soil anchors, shields, temporary retaining structures or wall, or other types of support for the walls of all open excavations required for construction of this Project. Add the following section: 306-4.1 Steel Plates All open trenches within the traveled way shall be backfilled and patched by the end of each workday or covered with steel plates set flush with adjacent pavement. Plates shall be adequate to support traffic loadings without noticeable deflection and shall be required at all times. Trench plate installation shall follow City Standard 602D. Add the following section: 306-4.2 Measurement and Payment Unless a separate bid item is provided for sheeting, shoring, and bracing, the cost of sheeting, shoring and bracing shall be included with related items of work including furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in providing trench safety, shoring or sloping of excavations; including, but not limited to, constructing trench shoring, design of the shoring system, removal and disposal of the shoring materials, obtaining all necessary permits from the Division of Occupational Safety and Health; all as shown on the Plans, as specified in the General conditions, Standard specifications, and these Special Provisions. No additional payment will be made for sheeting, shoring, and bracing as a result of required revisions in the trench support details due to a type of soil encountered which requires a method of trench support different from that approved. Steel plate bridging including, but not limited to, cold milling, plate installation, temporary cold mix asphalt, and subsequent plate removal shall be paid for as an incidental to the work for which the bridging is required and no separate payment shall be made therefore. 306-5 DEWATERING Replace the entire subsection with the following: The work shall include furnishing, installing, and operating a dewatering system capable of dewatering any excavation for any work in progress or planned, and subsequent removal of such equipment from the DRAFT 107 site. The Contractor shall limit the area to be excavated at any one time to that area which can be properly dewatered by the equipment in use. The equipment in use shall be both capable of removing any water that accumulates in the excavation and maintaining the excavation in a dry condition while construction is in progress. The surface of the ground adjacent to the trench shall be sloped away from the excavation or temporary dikes or pipe culverts shall be provided to prevent surface water from entering the excavation. Disposal of the water from the dewatering system shall be done in such a way as not to damage, contaminate, or overload the existing drainage facilities in the area. The Contractor shall protect from injury any portion of the work completed or in progress such as street surfaces, lawns, or private property. No water shall be directed across a public street outside of the Work limits. All water encountered during trench excavation shall be disposed of by the Contractor in such a manner as to not damage public or private property, create a nuisance, or health menace. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and operate pumps, pipes, appliances, and equipment of sufficient capacity to keep all excavations free from water until the excavation is backfilled, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all means or facilities necessary to conduct water to the pumps. Discharge of pumped groundwater shall be in conformance with the requirements of the Regional Water Quality Control Board, the County of Riverside Department of Environmental Health, the City of Lake Elsinore, and other agencies having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits before pumped water from naturally occurring groundwater or from rainfall is discharged to any storm drain or sewer. A means shall be provided for desilting the water before discharging it where required by the Engineer or by the terms of the discharge permits. Add the following section: 306-5.1 Measurement and Payment Dewatering shall be paid at the unit price or lump sum price bid when such an item is provided or as incidental to the work for which the dewatering is required and no separate payment shall be made therefore. 306-6 BEDDING 306-1 General Replace the first sentence of the first paragraph with the following: Bedding material shall consist of clean sand or gravel and shall conform to section 217. Sand shall meet the gradation for Table 200-1.5.5. 306-7 PERFABRICATED GRAVITY PIPE 306-7.8 Gravity Pipeline Testing DRAFT 108 306-7.8.1 General Add the following: All storm drain lines less than 48 inches in diameter shall be inspected by closed circuit television paid for by the Contractor after installation of the pipe and prior to installation of permanent surface improvements. The video inspection shall be performed by an entity with the demonstrated experience to perform the inspection as approved by the Agency. 306-15 PAYMENT Add the following: Payment for underground conduit construction shall also include removal and disposal of excavated material not suitable for use as trench backfill. 306-15.9 Temporary Resurfacing Replace entire subsection with the following: Temporary bituminous resurfacing materials which are placed by the Contractor are for its convenience and shall be at no cost to the Agency. Temporary bituminous resurfacing materials shall be used in lieu of permanent resurfacing only when approved by the Engineer. When temporary bituminous resurfacing materials are used in lieu of permanent resurfacing it shall be removed and replaced with permanent resurfacing within 7 days of placement or as approved by the Engineer. No additional payment will be made for temporary bituminous resurfacing materials. The price bid for the associated conduit or structure shall include full compensation for furnishing, placing, maintaining, removing, and disposing of such temporary resurfacing materials. In the event the Contractor does not place temporary resurfacing by end of workday of placing backfill, the Agency may furnish and place temporary resurfacing at the sole expense of the Contractor. The Agency shall deduct such expense from payments due to the Contractor. DRAFT 109 Add the following section: SECTION 313 TRAFFIC SIGNING Add the following section: 313-1 GENERAL The Contractor shall provide and install all permanent traffic control signs as shown on plans and as specified herein. Traffic signs shall comply with Section 206-7, Traffic Signs. This work shall include the furnishing and installation of new signs and posts, relocating, and resetting existing signs as indicated on the Plans with new post(s), and salvaging signs to the City Yard. All work and materials shall conform to the provisions set forth in Section 56 of the latest issue as currently available of the State of California, Department of Transportation Standard Specifications entitled "Signs," except as noted otherwise in the following Technical Provisions. All sign panels shall be 2 mm (0.080 in) gauge 6061-T76 or 5052-H38 aluminum alloy certified as meeting all California Specifications and treated with an alodine 1200 conversion coating. The reflectivity of all stop and warning signs shall be DG3 grade and all other signs shall be engineering grade unless specified by the Resident Engineer. Any chipping or bending of sign panels shall be considered as sufficient cause to require replacement of panels at the Contractor’s expense. The sign post assembly shall consist of a 50 mm (2 in) square perforated steel tube. The anchor assembly will consist of a 56 mm (2 ¼ in) square perforated steel tube which measures 750 mm (2' 6") or 915 mm (3 ft) long. The steel tubes shall be 12 gage and fully galvanized inside and outside. All sign installations shall have a minimum vertical clearance of 2.1 m (7 ft) from the bottom of the sign to grade and a minimum horizontal clearance of 0.6 m (2 ft) from face of curb to edge of signpost. There must be a minimum 1.2 m (4 ft) clearance from sign post to the back edge of the sidewalk for wheelchair access or as specified by the resident engineer. When there is no sidewalk, curb and gutter, the horizontal clearance shall be 1.8 to 2.4 m (6 - 8 ft) from edge of pavement. The Contractor shall replace existing sign post if the minimum vertical clearance of the signs cannot be achieved. All signs not mounted on streetlights or traffic signal standards shall be attached to a 50 mm (2 in) square perforated fully galvanized (inside and outside) 12-gauge steel tube post. The post shall be anchored in the ground by a two piece, perforated, fully galvanized anchor and sleeve assembly in all cases. The anchor shall be 900 mm (36 in) in length if being installed in soil and may be 750 m (30 in) in length if being installed through asphalt concrete or through Portland cement concrete. The anchor and sleeve assembly shall be power driven into the ground simultaneously until 100 mm (4 in) of the anchor and sleeve assembly is above the grade. The square sign post shall then DRAFT 110 be installed into the anchor and sleeve assembly to a minimum of 150 mm (6 in) and secured in place with a minimum of two 3/8 inches drive rivets installed in the on-coming traffic side and curb side to pull the post into one corner of the anchor. All signs shall be installed with washers larger than the head of the drive rivet or bolt (Fender washers preferred). Installation according to these requirements is essential to maintain the break-away characteristics of the post system. Under no circumstances shall the anchor assembly be secured in concrete footings. Any sign measuring 1 m (36 in) or larger, except stop signs and street name signs must have approved strapping or back braces installed. Any deviation shall be approved by the Engineer. All signs shall be installed before the roadway is open to traffic. However, those signs that are not applicable at the time of opening shall be covered until such time when they become valid. Existing traffic signs and posts that do not conform to the approved Plans shall be removed by the Contractor. All signs and posts removed shall be delivered to the City Yard. Any holes left in the existing sidewalk as a result of post removal shall be filled by the Contractor with a concrete mix or equal to a point flush with the existing sidewalk. All signs and posts shall be new unless specified to be reused. Any damaged existing signs or signposts that are denoted as being relocated on the Plans shall be replaced with new materials, as directed by the Engineer. Add the following section: 313-2 SIGN POSTS Sign locations shall be approved by the Agency prior to installation. Sign posts shall be located such that they maintain a minimum of forty-eight (48) inches of clearance between the post and the back of sidewalk for ADA compliance. Signs shall have 7’ vertical clearance from bottom of sign to finished surface for one sign and 6’ vertical clearance for a two-sign installation. Each post shall be new and have a maximum of two signs (with different meanings) on each side of a post (maximum number of signs on both sides shall not exceed four). Sign posts shall be installed per City of Lake Elsinore Standard Plan No. 407. Sign posts located in the median shall be set in an eight (8) inch diameter by twenty-four (24) inch deep PVC sleeve and backfilled with sand to top of sleeve. DRAFT 111 Wood posts for Class II & III barricades shall be painted white. Add the following section: 313-3 SIGNS All traffic signs shall conform to the California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) except as modified herein. Signs shall be a minimum of twelve (12) inches clear (horizontal) from curb face. Signs that are forty-eight (48) inches wide shall be installed utilizing sign strap hardware on the back. Signs greater than forty-eight (48) inches wide shall be installed utilizing two posts. Signs shall be installed on existing or new street light poles utilizing ¾” “band it” stainless steel strapping with fasteners. Single signs mounted on aluminum posts shall include 2 7/8” post caps and double signs shall include 2 7/8” cross saddle. Signs shall not be installed on utility company poles. Existing signs shall be salvaged and delivered to the Public Works Department. Add the following section: 313-4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Permanent signing and appurtenances thereto shown on the plans or required in the specifications shall be paid as part of the lump-sum price bid for Traffic Signing & Striping and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all work involved in supplying and installing permanent signing, striping, and appurtenances, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specification and these Special Provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. DRAFT 112 SECTION 314 TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND PAVEMENT MARKERS 314-4 APPLICATION OF TRAFFIC STRIPING AND CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS Delete the entire section and replace with the following: Pavement striping and pavement markings (legend) application shall conform to Section 84 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications 2022 edition and the Caltrans Standard Plans. 314-5 PAVEMENT MARKERS Raised pavement markers construction shall conform to Section 81-3 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications 2022 edition and the Caltrans Standard Plans. Adhesive for raised pavement markers shall be epoxy in conformance to Section 95 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications 2022 edition. Markers shall be applied using rapid-set epoxy conforming to Section 95-1.02E of the Caltrans Standard Specifications 2022 edition. DRAFT 113 SPECIAL PROVISIONS AMENDMENTS TO THE “GREENBOOK” STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 4 EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 400 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION 400-1 GENERAL Add the following: The Contractor shall protect utility facilities relocated prior to or during construction of the Work. The Contractor shall not do any work that would affect any oil, gas, sewer, or water pipeline; any telephone, television, telegraph, or electric transmission line or cable; any fence; or any other structure, nor shall the Contractor enter upon the rights-of-way involved until notified by the Engineer that the City has secured authority therefore from the proper party. After authority has been obtained, the Contractor shall give said party due notice of its intention to begin work, and shall give said party convenient access and every facility for removing, shoring, supporting, or otherwise protecting such improvements and for replacing same. Maintaining in Service: All oil and gasoline pipelines, power, and telephone television, or other communication cable ducts, gas and water mains, irrigation lines, sewer lines, storm drain lines, poles, and overhead power and communication wires and cables encountered along the line of the Work shall remain continuously in service during all the operations under the Contract, unless other arrangements satisfactory to the Engineer are made with the owner of said pipelines, duct, main, irrigation line, sewer, storm drain, pole, or wire or cable. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair all damage due to its operations, and the provisions of this Section shall not be abated even in the event such damage occurs after backfilling or is not discovered until after completion of the backfilling. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage done to existing property and adjacent properties during all construction work under this contract, and the Contractor, at its expense, shall make any repairs that result from its operations to the approval of the Engineer and the subject property owner. Damaged or removed traffic striping shall be replaced by the Contractor with permanent striping within 24 hours of damage or removal or replaced with temporary striping at the discretion of the Engineer. DRAFT 114 SECTION 401 REMOVAL 401-1 GENERAL Add the following: All materials removed shall be disposed of at a legal site outside of the Project Site. 401-2 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Add the following: 401-2.1 Payment Asphalt Concrete Excavation covers the header cut, removal of asphalt concrete pavement and aggregate base to the depths and dimensions as specified and as shown on the drawings and the disposal of all surplus material. Included in this contract item is the re-compaction of the existing Aggregate Base to 95% relative compaction after removal and disposal of existing asphalt concrete. 401-3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY IMPROVEMENTS Replace the entire subsection with the following: All Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) removals, including, but not limited to, cross gutters, curbs, driveway approaches, gutters, sidewalks and spandrels shall be made by removing and replacing the entire section between joints. If any utility cuts are made in PCC improvements, the entire section shall be removed and replaced. Sidewalk removal in front of driveway approaches shall be no less than two squares. All existing or newly broken, cracked, chipped or damaged PCC within the project limits shall be removed and replaced. Removal of improvements covered by this section shall include sawcutting and removal of a twenty-four inch (24") wide section of the adjacent bituminous pavement or as approved by the Engineer. Replacement of said pavement shall be full depth in-kind. Concrete sidewalk, including access (handicap) ramps, concrete curb returns, spandrels and cross gutters, driveway approaches, and other concrete surfacing shall be removed at locations as indicated on the plans, to neatly sawed edges with saw-cuts made to a minimum depth of one-half the thickness of the concrete. Concrete surfaces to be removed shall be neatly sawed such that construction joints to new concrete improvements are clean and straight. Existing curb or curb and gutter where indicated on the plans shall be completely removed and disposed. The depth of the removal shall be at least to the section subgrade surface, plus necessary scarification depth for achieving the necessary 90% or 95% relative compaction as specified by the project specification and standard plan. DRAFT 115 401-5 OTHER IMPROVEMENTS Add the following: Existing wood fence, chain Link fence, low block wall and pilaster where indicated on the plans to be removed shall be completely removed and disposed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Existing roadside signs where indicated on the plans shall be completely removed or relocated to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Do not remove roadside signs until the replacement signs are installed or until the existing signs are no longer required for public traffic. Existing tree where indicated on the plans shall be completely removed and grind the stump. Tree roots larger than 1 inch in diameter shall be completely removed. The depth of the removal shall be at least to the pavement structural section subgrade surface, plus necessary scarification depth for achieving the necessary 90% or 95% relative compaction as specified by the project specification and plan. The tree holes after tree removal shall be backfilled with soils from the surrounding area the same day the trees are removed and compacted to a minimum of 90% relative compaction. Add the following section: 401-8 REMOVE AND SALVAGE/REMOVE AND RELOCATE The work covers the Remove and Salvage and/or Remove and Relocate of all objectionable or interfering material, natural or man-made, within the public right-of-way and adjoining land within the project limits as shown on the Plans. The work of Remove and Salvage/Relocate of existing improvements shall conform to the provisions of applicable portions of Sections 401, “Removal”, and 306-3.3, “Abandonment of Conduits and Structures”, of the Standard Specifications; referenced sections of other utility standard specifications; referenced sections of the Standard Specifications; as shown on the Plans; as specified in these Special Provisions; and as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor, unless noted or shown otherwise, shall demolish and remove from the site all existing surface and subsurface improvements adversely affecting or adversely affected by the proposed work. All known existing improvements are identified on the Plans. These improvements include, but are not limited to, the following: asphalt pavement, water mains, sewer mains, pipe storm drains, gas mains, concrete headwall structures, curb inlets, poles, fencing, lighting, utility appurtenances, etc. DRAFT 116 The terminal post of any fence removed shall be reinforced by bracing or other appropriate means to maintain the structural integrity of the fence. Relocation and reconnection of existing fences shown on the plans shall include all posts, hardware, and all incidentals necessary to complete the Work. 401-8.1 Remove and Salvage All removed and Salvage Items shall require the Contractor to deliver all salvageable materials, including traffic signs and streetlights, to the City of Lake Elsinore at time and location to be determined at the preconstruction meeting. Terminations for street or parking lot lights to be removed and salvaged shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code. To avoid any live wires remaining in service, the entire length of wire extending to street light or street lights being removed shall be disconnected at the power supply and removed from the site. Complete restoration of affected surface improvements shall be required. The Contractor shall remove existing street signs and miscellaneous signs in conflict with roadway construction and place same at new locations as directed by the Engineer. 401-8.2 Remove and Relocate The Contractor shall remove and relocate all existing improvements shown on the Plans to be relocated. All existing water services shall be relocated per EVMWD standards and requirements. The Contractor shall inspect and verify that the existing service, including the connection at the main, meets current EVMWD standards. Where existing services meet EVMWD standards, extension of the service will be allowed at the price bid for water meter relocations. 401-8.3 Abandon In Place All existing sewer or water facilities to be abandoned within the proposed project limits shall be terminated at the mainline in accordance with EVMWD requirements. This shall include removal of sewer and water services back to the main. Sewer laterals shall be capped with concrete at the wye connection. Water services shall be terminated at the corporation stop and the stop closed. DRAFT 117 SECTION 402- UTILITIES 402-1 LOCATION 402-1.1 General In respect to work performed under the Contract, Subsection 402-1.1, “General” of the Standard Specifications shall deemed revised to include the following: When work is to be conducted in an area which is known, or reasonably known, to contain underground utilities or subsurface improvements, the Contractor shall contact Underground Service Alert of Southern California at least 2 working days, but not more than 14 calendar days in advance of any construction activity, which will or could damage or affect any underground utility or subsurface improvement and obtain an inquiry identification number (CGC 4216). The Contractor shall delineate with white paint or other suitable markings the area to be excavated. The Contractor shall notify Underground Service Alert in the event of change in the project limits or change in original work previously shown on the Plans or indicated in the Specifications. When all work is completed, the Contractor shall remove all markings for underground utilities. Subsurface installations are considered within 24 inches (600mm) horizontally on either side of the exterior surface of the subsurface installation (CGC 4216). When the subsurface installation markings are no longer reasonably visible, the Contractor shall notify Underground Service Alert to remark those subsurface installations which may be affected by excavation to the extent necessary (CGC 4216.3©). Add the following subsection: 402-6 WATER VALVE ADJUSTMENT Existing water valves and / or water meters where indicated on the plans or within the street overlay areas shall be adjusted to grade. Adjustment of valves and meter boxes shall conform to the EVMWD standards. DRAFT 118 SECTION 403 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT AND RECONSTRUCTION 403-3 MANHOLES IN ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Add the following: Existing manholes within the street overlay areas shall be adjusted to grade. Adjustment of manholes shall conform to Section 301-1 of the Standard Specifications and EVMWD standards. DRAFT 119 SECTION 404 COLD MILLING 404.1 General Add the following: Additional widths of cold milling may be required at various locations as determined by the Engineer. 404.9 Traffic Signal Loop Detectors Delete section and add the following. Before cold milling pavement within 90 m (300 feet) of a traffic signal, the Contractor shall notify the Agency at least 3 working days prior to commencing work within said area. Upon notification, the Agency will mark the location of all existing loop detectors unless shown on plans. The Contractor shall not mill within 12 inches (300mm) of any existing loop detectors that are shown to be protected in place on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. Traffic signal loop detectors that were shown to be protected in place but are damaged or removed shall be replaced in their entirety in conformance with section 400-1 “General”, of Standard Specifications. Damage to the existing loops caused by the Contractor operation will require replacement of the loops in their entirety at the Contractor’s expense. DRAFT 120 SPECIAL PROVISIONS AMENDMENTS TO THE “GREENBOOK” STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 6 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL SECTION 600 ACCESS 600-1 GENERAL Add the following: All streets shall remain open to through traffic at all times except when street closure is approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make provisions to allow local traffic access to the closed streets. The local traffic consists of, but is not limited to, residences, church congregations, farmers, post offices, fire stations, meter readers, trash pickup, school buses, and emergency vehicles. The Contractor shall provide a smooth travel way and either a flagger and/or signing to direct traffic. 600-4 NOTIFICATION Add the following section: The Contractor shall notify in person and with printed notification (in English and Spanish language), at least ten (10) working days prior to commencing work, to all agencies, firms, institutions, postal service, residents, hospital, transit authorities, schools, stores, utilities and waste disposal service fronting or affected by the work. Additional printed notification (in English and Spanish language) shall be given not less than seventy- eight (48) hours prior to performing any work which will restrict property access, close or partially close the street, or which will restrict or disallow street parking. All schools and churches shall receive seven (7) working days notification prior to performing any work which will restrict property access. As applicable, the Contractor shall coordinate with the school district for pick-up and drop-off of school children, transit authority for the pick-up and drop off of riders, waste disposal collection, the postal service to ensure delivery of mail, and churches for weekly or special activities. The printed notices shall contain a general description of the work to be done and the date that the work is to be done. The notices shall also include a statement that parking will be restricted as called for on the "NO PARKING" signs to be posted along the street. All public notices must be reviewed and approved by the City Engineer prior to its distribution. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for review and approval of public notices. The Contractor shall also post printed "NO PARKING-TOW AWAY" signs at one- hundred-foot DRAFT 121 (100') (thirty meters (30m)) maximum spacing along each side of the affected street for seventy- eight (48) hours prior to the commencement of the street improvement work. The Contractor shall document the day, date and time the "NO PARKING" signs were posted. Posting of signs on trees and utility poles will not be allowed. The signs shall contain the day, date, hours and vehicle code, that parking will be prohibited on that particular street, CVC 22651L and CVC 22654D. The signs shall be removed immediately upon completion of work that will prohibit parking. The printed notices and the "NO PARKING" signs shall be furnished by the Contractor. No Separate Payment will be made for Public Notification. DRAFT 122 SECTION 601 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE WORK ZONES 601-1 GENERAL Add the following: The Contractor shall supply and install temporary traffic pavement markers, channelizers, signing, railing (type K), crash cushions and appurtenances at the locations shown on the plans and as required in the specifications, complete in place prior to opening the traveled way served by said final and temporary traffic pavement markers, signing, railing (type K) and appurtenances to public traffic. The Engineer retains the authority to initiate field changes in traffic control to ensure public safety and minimize traffic disruptions. The Contractor shall maintain all traffic control devices in proper working condition 24 hours a day, 7 days a week for the duration of the Work, regardless of whether the subject traffic control devices were originally included in the Contract or were added at the discretion of the Engineer. All traffic control devices shall be removed from view and non-operational when not in use. Construction signing, lighting, concrete barriers, and barricading shall be provided on all projects as required by City Standards or as directed by the City Engineer. As a minimum, all construction signing, lighting and barricading shall be in accordance with Part 6 “Temporary Traffic Control” of the California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA-MUTCD) for Streets and Highways, or subsequent editions in force at the time of construction. Part 6 of the California MUTCD is available online at: http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/traffops/signtech/mutcdsupp/pdf/camutcd2012/Part6.pdf All signs, barricades and other temporary traffic control devices required for the work shall be indicated on and be an integral part of the Traffic Control Plan submitted to and approved by the Engineer. For all road closures, road detours, lane closures, and all-night operations, the Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Engineer a minimum of 2 working days prior to the commencement of the Work. All warning signs shall be manufactured with high intensity faces and legends and shall be placed at least 7 calendar days prior to the commencement of construction. Any of the Contractor's work that may disrupt normal traffic shall be coordinated with the Engineer a minimum of 2 working days prior to the commencement of the Work. In public streets, during working hours, the Contractor shall maintain not less than one lane of traffic open in each direction at all times. At night and during non-working hours, the Contractor shall leave the work site in a safe condition and allow for the full use of two lanes of traffic or provide the minimum lane requirements for lane closure as approved by the City. DRAFT 123 Flaggers shall be utilized to ensure the safe flow of traffic at intersections and businesses that may be affected. This work shall be included in the lump sum bid item price for “Traffic control,” in the Bid Schedule(s), and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. Payment for traffic control shall be made at the lump sum bid item price for “Traffic Control”, and no additional compensation shall be allowed therefore. 601-2 TEMPORARY TRAFIC CONTROL PLAN (TCP) 601-2.1 General Add the following: The Contractor shall be required to submit Traffic Control Plans for review and approval by the City Engineer. The Traffic Control Plans shall be submitted to the Engineer and approved prior to the Pre-Construction Conference. All traffic control used for this project shall be in accordance with the approved Contractor prepared traffic control plans as well as the Caltrans Traffic Control Plans. The Contractor shall provide, install, and remove any detours for the routing of vehicular and pedestrian traffic as shown on the approved Traffic Control Plans, as specified in the Special Provisions, or as directed by the Engineer. Payment for such work shall be included in the lump sum bid item price for “Traffic Control,” in the Bid Schedule, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. 601-3 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL (TTC) 601-3.4 Operation & Maintenance 601-3.4.1 General Add the following: The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary traffic control to protect and guide traffic around all work in the construction zone. All traffic controls shall be clearly posted with signs prior to the commencement of the Work. All traffic restrictions listed herein shall supplement any other traffic control requirements of the City and are not intended to replace any part of these requirements. Local access shall be maintained to all properties fronting the Work at all times. Access shall be maintained to all driveways within the construction zone, unless other prior arrangements have been made with the Engineer and the affected property owner. The Contractor shall erect signs and barricades to direct pedestrians through or around the construction zone. Payment for installation of pedestrian signs and barricades shall be included in the lump sum bid item price for “Traffic Control,” in the Bid Schedule(s), and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. DRAFT 124 Notwithstanding the Contractor's primary responsibility for safety at the site of the Work when the Contractor is not present, the Engineer, at his option, after attempting to contact the Contractor, may direct City forces to perform any functions he may deem necessary to ensure public safety at or in the vicinity of the site of the Work. If such procedures are implemented, the Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses incurred by the City. 601-3.5 SIGN AND SIGNAGE 601-3.5.1 General Add the following: Temporary No Parking signs shall be posted at least 24 hours, but no more than 48 hours in advance of the work. The signs shall be placed no more than 100 feet apart on each side of the street and at shorter intervals if conditions warrant. The Contractor shall provide the signs and will be responsible for adding the dates and hours of closure to the signs. Removal of signs and furnishing and placing of barricades, if necessary, posts of signs shall be provided by the Contractor. All signs shall be removed within 24 hours after the effective date. The Contractor shall coordinate with the waste disposal collection and the postal service to ensure delivery of mail. The printed notices shall contain a general description of the work to be done and the date that the work is to be done. The notices shall also include a statement that parking will be restricted as called for on the "NO PARKING" signs to be posted along the street. All public notices must be reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior to its distribution. The Contractor shall also post printed "NO PARKING-TOW AWAY" signs at one-hundred-foot (100') maximum spacing along each side of the affected street for seventy-eight (48) hours prior to the commencement of the street improvement work. The Contractor shall document the day, date and time the "NO PARKING" signs were posted. Posting of signs on trees and utility poles will not be allowed. The NO PARKING signs shall contain the day, date, hours and vehicle code, that parking will be prohibited on that particular street and a statement that parked vehicles will be towed away at the owner’s expense per California Vehicle Codes CVC 22651L and CVC 22654D. The signs shall be removed immediately upon completion of work that will prohibit parking. The printed notices and the "NO PARKING" signs shall be furnished by the Contractor. Full compensation for compliance with the preceding requirements shall be considered as being included in the lump sum price for “Traffic Control” in the bid schedule and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. DRAFT 125 Add the following sections: 601-7 TEMPORARY RAILING (TYPE K) AND CRASH CUSHIONS Add the following subsection: 601-7.1 General Temporary railing (Type K) shall consist of interconnected new or undamaged used precast concrete barrier units as shown on the plans. Temporary sand-filled crash cushions shall consist of new or undamaged used temporary sand-filled crash cushions units as shown on the plans. Add the following subsection: 601-7.2 Appearance Exposed surfaces of new and used units of Temporary railing (Type K) shall be freshly coated with a white color paint prior to their first use on the project. The paint shall conform to the provisions in Sections 210-1.5, “Paint Systems”, and 310, “Painting”. The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal and cleanup or painting over the graffiti from the K-Rails within 48 hours. The Contractor Shall replace or repaint units of Temporary railing (Type K) or shall remove graffiti, tire or vehicle marks, dirt or any and all materials such that said marks or discoloration mar the appearance of said units when ordered by the Engineer after the units are in place. Add the following subsection: 601-7.3 Manufacture of Temporary Railing In addition to the requirements herein the temporary railing (Type K) shall be manufactured per CALTRANS Standard Drawing T3A Concrete used to manufacture Temporary railing (Type K) shall conform to the provisions in Sections 201-1, “Portland Cement Concrete”, and 303-1, “Concrete Structures”. Load tickets and a Certificate of Compliance will not be required. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the provisions in Sections 201-1, “Portland Cement Concrete”, and 303-1, “Concrete Structures”. Steel bars to receive bolts at ends of concrete panels shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 36/A 36M. The bolts shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 307. A round bar of the same diameter may be substituted for the end-connecting bolt shown on the plans. The bar shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 36/A 36M, shall have a minimum length of 660 mm and shall have a 75 mm (3”) diameter by 9 mm (3/8”) thick plate welded on the upper end with a 5-mm (3/16”) fillet weld. The final surface finish of temporary railings (Type K) shall conform to the provisions in section 303-1.9.2 “Ordinary Surface Finish.” Exposed surfaces of concrete elements shall be cured by the water method, the forms-in-place method, or the pigmented curing compound method. The pigmented curing compound shall be type 2 curing compound. Temporary railing (Type K) may have the Contractor’s name or logo on each panel. The name or logo shall not be more than 100 mm in height and shall be located not more than 300 mm above the bottom of the rail panel. Add the following sections: 601-7.4 Installation of Temporary Railing In addition to the requirements herein the temporary railing (Type K) shall be installed per CALTRANS Standard Drawing T3A. Temporary railing (Type K) shall be set on firm, stable DRAFT 126 foundation. The foundation shall be graded to provide a uniform bearing throughout the entire length of the railing. Abutting ends of precast concrete units shall be placed and maintained in alignment without substantial offset to each other. The precast concrete units shall be positioned straight on tangent alignment and on a true arc on curved alignment each rail unit placed within 3 m (10’) of a traffic lane shall have a reflector installed on top of the rail as directed by the Engineer. Reflectors and adhesive will be furnished by the Contractor. A Type P marker panel conforming to the requirements of the CALTRANS Traffic Manual shall also be installed at each end of railing installed adjacent to a two-lane, two-way highway and at the end facing traffic of railing installed adjacent to a one-way roadbed. If the railing is placed on a skew, the marker shall be installed at the end of the skew nearest the traveled way. Type P marker panels shall conform to the provisions of section 206-7.2, “Sign Posts”. Where shown on the plans, threaded rods or dowels shall be bonded in holes drilled in existing concrete. When temporary railings (Type K) are removed, any area where temporary excavation or embankment was used to accommodate the temporary railing shall be restored to its previous condition, or constructed to its planned condition. Add the following subsection: 601-7.5 Temporary Sand-Filled Crash Cushions Temporary sand-filled crash cushion units shall be “Energite III” manufactured by Energy Absorption Systems, “Fitch Inertial Barrier System Modules” manufactured by Roadway Safety Service, or equal. Features required to determine equivalence of any other temporary sand-filled crash cushion units shall be approval of the system by CALTRANS and that the temporary sand- filled crash cushion units meet NCHRP 350 standards. Other features will be suitability to application, operational characteristics, durability and other such characteristics that the Engineer shall determine. Temporary sand-filled crash cushions (TSFCC) shall be of the type and array configurations shown on plans, and installed at every end of, or gap in, the temporary railing (Type K) whenever the closest point of approach of traffic, regardless of direction, is 4.6 m (15’) or less to the end of the temporary railing (Type K) being considered. The TSFCC shall be installed per CALTRANS Standard Drawings T1 and T2 for approach speeds no less than the posted speed of the street prior to construction or 55 kilometers per hour (35 mph), whichever is the greater. The TSFCC array shall be appropriate to the application as shown on said standard drawings. A Type J and/or P marker panel conforming to the requirements of the CALTRANS Traffic Manual shall also be installed at each TSFCC array as shown in CALTRANS Standard Drawings T1 and T2. Particular care shall be taken to assure that crash cushions are installed with the soil supporting them and the adjacent soil leveled to match the elevation of the bottom of the temporary railing immediately adjacent to the crash cushion. All routes of approach to the TSCFF array shall be graded such that any vehicle diverging from the traveled way to strike the TSCFF will travel on a vertical alignment parallel to the segment of the travel lane that it departed from. Add the following subsection: 601-7.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Temporary railing (type K), temporary crash cushions and temporary appurtenances thereto shown on the plans or required in the specifications are a part of the lump-sum item for traffic DRAFT 127 control and payment therefore shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in applying, installing, maintaining, and removing temporary traffic pavement markers, channelizers, signing, railing (type K), crash cushions and appurtenances, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specification and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. Payment for temporary crash cushions, concrete barriers and the signs and reflectors marking them shall include the installation, grading for installation, grading for the approach path, maintenance, painting and re-painting, replacement of damaged units and removal and shall also be included in the lump-sum price bid for traffic control. Payment for installation and/or relocation of K-rails and crash cushions when not shown on the plans and requested by the Engineer shall be made per Section 2-8, “Extra Work,” of Standard Specifications. DRAFT 128 SPECIAL PROVISIONS AMENDMENTS TO THE “GREENBOOK” STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 7 STREET LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEM MATERIALS SECTION 700 MATERIALS Delete entire section and replace with the following: 700-1 GENERAL The following specifies the requirements for materials to be installed in the street lighting and traffic signal systems. The Contractor shall submit, prior to acceptance of the contract, the manufacture’s warranties, guaranties, instruction sheet and parts lists supplied for the material used in the work. 700-2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS a) State of California Department of Transportation Standard Specifications – referred to herein as State Standard Specifications. b) State of California Department of Transportation Standard Plans – referred to herein as State Standard Plans. c) City of Lake Elsinore Street Light Manual -Design Criteria and Standards. d) City of Lake Elsinore Traffic Signal Specification and Installation Manual. 700-3 STREET LIGHTING SYSTEM MATERIALS New or relocated streetlights located within City R/W or City easements are required to include light emitting diode (LED) luminaries. Refer to City of Lake Elsinore Street Light Manual -Design Criteria and Standards. 700-4 TRAFFIC SIGNAL MATERIALS Refer to City of Lake Elsinore Traffic Signal Specification and Installation Manual for special traffic signal equipment and installation requirements. DRAFT 1 7/29/24 TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION GUIDELINES 1.0 SPECIAL PROVISIONS, INSTALLATION, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS The following sections provide special traffic signal equipment and installation requirements as required by the City of Lake Elsinore. The City adheres to the latest editions of the Caltrans Standard Plans and Standard Specifications in addition to the following provisions below: 1.1 POLES AND MAST ARMS 1.1.1 POLES 1) Standards shall be placed on opposite sides of the pedestrian ramp (see ES-4C of the State of California Standard Plans for the typical location of signal standard placement). All traffic signal plans shall indicate required traffic signal pole locations as referenced from BCR, ECR, and curb face. 2) All Poles must meet the standard wind load specified in the latest revision of the State of California Standard Plans. 3) No poles or pull boxes are allowed within the limits of pedestrian ramps including the ramp slopes. 4) Pole anchor bolts shall be cut and finished one-half inch (1/2") above the nut. Base plate bolt covers shall be installed for all standards. 5) Where modifications will leave holes in existing poles, the holes shall be repaired pursuant to State of California Standard Specifications, Section 86-1.02B(1). 6) Poles shall not be installed within center medians unless approved by the City Engineer. 1.1.2 MAST ARMS 1) Mast arms shall be provided for all approaches unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. 2) All traffic signal mast arms shall present a uniform and level appearance when complete. 3) If fully protected left turn phasing is provided, the mast arm shall be long enough to align the left-turn signal head as close as possible to the center of the left-turn lane where there is one left-turn lane, or to the lane line between the left-turn lanes if there are two left-turn lanes. 4) Avoid signal standards in center medians (use only on very wide streets where signal mast arms are not long enough to reach to left-turn lanes). 5) Street light mast arms shall be 15 feet long or as determined by the Engineer. 6) Empty tenons shall be provided on mast arms where lane geometrics are expected to change in the future. 1.2 PULL BOXES 1) All pull boxes (box, lid, extension) shall be concrete and size No. 6 unless otherwise indicated. Pull box covers shall be stamped "Traffic Signal" or “Signal Communication” as needed. 2) The approved manufacturer is Christy and the approved models are in Table 1 below. Use of other non-Christy pull boxes shall be approved by City Engineer. Table 1: Pull Box Product Numbers Pull box Manufacturer and Model #5 Box N30 Box #5 Lid N30R Lid #6 Box N36 Box DRAFT 2 7/29/24 #6 Lid N36R Lid #6 Box Fiberlyte Lid N36 Box with FL36T Lid 3) Pull box lids shall be composite with UV inhibitor. Concrete lids shall not be used. 4) Pull boxes shall not be placed: In raised or painted medians, in paved shoulder, in traveled way, in driveways, within one foot of a sidewalk access ramp or flares unless approved by the City Engineer. 5) When retrofitting pedestrian ramps and relocating existing boxes is cost prohibitive, existing pull boxes must be replaced with traffic rated models and non-skid steel lids. 6) Pull boxes placed in dirt shall have utilize white paddle markers for easy location of pull box. 7) Pull boxes shall be spaced at intervals of 300 feet or less. 8) A No. 5 pull box may be used for advance loops. 9) Electrical power pull box shall be No. 5 with extension and shall be placed no more than 20 feet from the service cabinet. 10) Where the sump of an existing pull box is disturbed by the CONTRACTOR’s operations, the sump shall be reconstructed and, if the sump was grouted, the old grout shall be removed and replaced with new grout. 11) Pull boxes shall be tamper resistant and utilize a special key tool for opening. 12) See City of Lake Elsinore Standard Plan #504 for additional information. 1.3 CONDUIT 1) All traffic signal conduit street crossings or any conduit located within the roadway travelled way (including driveways) shall be schedule 80 rigid PVC. Exceptions to this requirement shall be determined by the City Engineer. 2) All conduits shall be three inches (3") minimum. All conduits crossing streets shall be 4” minimum. All legs of the intersection shall have a conduit crossing installed (one spare with mule tape). All conduits shall contain “detectable mule tape” mule tape per State of California Standard Specification 86-1.02B and a No. 8 XHHW-2 stranded insulated green trace wire. 3) As much as practical, conduit shall be laid out perpendicular to the curb line of the street crossing under the center of the crosswalk. 4) Conduit fill shall not exceed the 26% for new construction and allow exception up to 40% for conduits with three or more conductors. For traffic signal modifications, max percent conduit fill shall be approved by the City Engineer. 5) Install two, four-inch (2-4") and one, three-inch (1-3”) conduits from controller cabinet base to the adjacent home run pull box with signal cable in one conduit and the balance of conductors in the other. Install signal cable in the first conduit, and interconnect conductors in the second and the balance of conductors in the third. 6) All conduits entering pull boxes, vaults and cabinets shall be protected with duct seal. No open holes are allowed. The ends of all conduits shall have Carlon or approved equal bell fittings. 7) Install conduit to a depth of not less than 30 inches below finished grade, except in sidewalk and curbed paved median areas, where it must be at least 18 inches below grade. See City of Lake Elsinore Standard Plan #508 for additional information. 1.4 CONDUCTORS AND WIRING 1) #14 gauge/3 conductor and #14 gauge/12 conductor per Caltrans-Standard Specification 86- 1.02F(2) shall be continuous from the signal cabinet to the terminal block on the signal standard it services. No splicing of signal cable shall be permitted unless otherwise directed by the City Engineer. 2) The signal cables shall be labeled (permanently affixed printed labels) in each pull box per State DRAFT 3 7/29/24 of California Standard Specifications Section 86-1.02(F)(a) and at the signal cabinet, indicating the cable/wire type and signal standard to which it is connected. Labels are required for loops, signal conductors, SIC, fiber, and any other conductors within cabinet and pull box. 3) All traffic signal field conductors shall have a 6-foot coil of extra wire in each pull box to allow for servicing. The signal conductors shall be organized in a bundle to allow for easy identification of wires and cables. 4) Multi conductor video cable shall be 6 conductor 2 elements: 18 AWG 5 conductors 7/26 bare copper, 20 AWG 1 conductor, solid bare copper (McCain part number KG-995P or approved equivalent). 5) Loop detector lead-in cable shall be Type B Caltrans Standard 16 AWG. 6) Loop detector wire shall be Type 2. All lead-in DLCs shall be labeled in the cabinet with lane number and phase assignment. 7) Cable or video radar, or communications purposes shall be Cat6 outdoor rated Ethernet unless otherwise specified by the equipment manufacturer. 8) Conductors for Safety Lighting (SL) shall be No. 10 XHHW-2. The conductors shall be black and white. 9) The Street Light conductors may be spliced to branch the Street Light circuit as it progresses around the intersection. 10) Fused splice connectors shall be installed in the pole hand hole for each luminaire. 11) All field installed wiring shall be Megger-Ohm tested. The CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation showing results that the wiring has passed the test. 1.5. DETECTION 1) For new construction or intersection upgrade, video detention shall be installed. The use of radar detection is allowed where applicable. 2) Loop detection is not required on streets and approaches unless special conditions exist that preclude the installation of video detection or at the discretion of the City Engineer. 3) Loop detection shall be installed on all limit line, advance detection, left turn lanes, and bike lanes. Loops shall be circular Type E (6' diameter). Limit line detectors shall be Modified Type E loops (for bike detection). Loops shall be installed flush with the limit line. 4) All bicycle lane detector loops shall be Type Q. 5) Advance detection is required on all approaches with an 85th percentile speed or posted speed limit greater than 25 mph (if not available, use design speed). Install a single loop per lane with one DLC for all loops. Setbacks from the limit line shall be per CAMUTCD Table 4D-101. 6) If a minor street approach has advance detection, install two loops per lane spaced 10 feet apart starting at the crosswalk or limit line. 7) Install four loops spaced 10 feet apart in advance of the crosswalk or limit line in left-turn lanes and for approach lanes without advance detection. 8) Minor street right-turn only lanes will have 2 loops spaced 10 feet apart. Provide separate DLC to controller cabinet. 9) On a minor street, if there is no right-turn only lane, install one loop at the limit line, adjacent to the curb for sneak-by traffic. 10) All detection cables and cards shall be labeled in the cabinet with lane number and phase assignment. 1.5.1 BICYCLE DETECTION 1) If the approach has a bike lane, install a six-foot-long Type Q loop, 44 feet in advance of and one at the crosswalk or limit line in the bike lane (or where the bike lane drop transition occurs if further back). DRAFT 4 7/29/24 2) On streets classified as local, residential or other minor streets with bike lanes, install a six-foot long Type Q loop at the limit line and at 44 feet in advance of the crosswalk/limit line. 3) Width of Type Q loop varies: 6" to 12" inside bike lane line and 6" to 12" outside gutter or other channelization line, providing a 3-foot wide to 4-foot wide loop. 1.5.2 LOOP DETECTION INSTALLATION 1) Prior to installation, the City Engineer or designated representative shall verify all loop detector locations. All necessary striping shall be in place prior to position of detectors. 2) Loop detectors in asphalt shall use rubberized hot melt type sealant (Brewer/Flex or approved equal). 3) Loop detector splices shall be soldered and sealed with heat-shrink containing waterproof sealant. 4) The number of sensor units and lead-in cables required to achieve the specified detection shall be installed. 5) Four (4)-channel sensor units shall not be used. 6) Sensor unit for Vehicles shall be Reno Model C-1100 SS Vehicle Detector or approved equal. Sensor unit for Bicycles shall be Reno Model C-1100 SS-B Bicycle Detector or approved equal. 1.5.3 VIDEO DETECTION INSTALLATION When special conditions exist that preclude the installation of in-pavement detection, video detection shall be used. The video detection system shall be Iteris Vantage Vector camera system (or City approved equivalent). All installation shall include necessary components to run the system including but not limited to: Iteris Vantage Apex video processor(s), flat panel monitor (17” TFT LCD video monitor or City approved equal), Ethernet modules, and camera(s). Detection units shall be installed on signal mast arm per manufacturer specifications. Detection units without radar functionality or other advance detection shall be mounted on a 6’ pole extension above the mast arm. 1.6 CABINET AND EQUIPMENT The model 2070 ATC controller and 322L cabinet shall be manufactured and furnished by the same manufacturer. 1.6.1 CONFLICT MONITOR The conflict monitor shall meet all the requirements of the latest edition of the Caltrans Standard Specifications and shall also meet the following specifications: 1) The conflict monitor shall be a model 2010ECLip by EDI (or City-approved equivalent). 2) The base design shall be tested by an independent lab for transient and environmental requirements. 3) The conflict monitor shall have 16 channel capability with a 10/100 Ethernet port. 4) A portable laptop computer shall not be required to program or verify monitor setting (only used for log events). 5) The conflict monitor shall be capable of monitoring 5 section heads. 6) The conflict monitor shall display active colors independently during operation. 7) The conflict monitor shall display active colors independently at time of fault. 8) Shall be compatible with McCain Omni eX intersection control software. 1.6.2 CONTROLLER 1) The Controller shall conform to Caltrans "Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications DRAFT 5 7/29/24 (TEES)" (latest edition) and be on the latest Caltrans qualified products list. 2) The controller unit shall be a 2070 LX running McCain Omni eX firmware. 3) The 2070 LX controller shall be delivered pre-loaded with the latest version of McCain Omni eX controller firmware. The controllers shall be delivered at least two weeks prior to scheduled signal turn on. 4) The CONTRACTOR shall schedule the controller manufacturer to be present at the time of signal turn on in the field. 5) The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a Transparity intersection user license with each controller furnished. 6) The controller manufacturer shall submit a notarized Certificate of Compliance with the State testing specifications prior to or at the time the controller is delivered to the jobsite. The controller shall not be installed until the Certificate is received and approved by the Traffic Engineer /Inspector/City Electrician or their assigned representative. Testing of control equipment and cabinet wiring shall be accomplished by the controller manufacturer in accordance with the State Standard Specifications (all references to State testing facilities or laboratories shall be interpreted as the controller manufacturer’s testing facility; however, State testing procedures referred to shall remain in effect). All testing costs for the complete control system shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. 7) The CONTRACTOR shall furnish one (1) maintenance and operation manual for all new controller units, auxiliary equipment, vehicle detector sensor units, ITS and communication equipment, and interactive plug-ins to the City's Maintenance Division. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted upon equipment delivery. The O&M manual(s) shall include, but need not be limited to, the following items: a) Specifications. b) Design characteristics. c) General operation theory. d) Function of all controls. e) Troubleshooting procedure (diagnostic routine). f) Block circuit diagram. g) Geographical layout of components. h) Schematic diagrams. i) List of replaceable component parts with stock numbers. j) As-built drawings. k) Detector assignment table. 1.6.3 Controller Cabinet The controller cabinet shall be model 332L with an anodized aluminum finish and include front and back door switches per Section 86-1.02Q(2) of the latest edition of the Caltrans Standard Specifications and Caltrans "Transportation Electrical equipment Specifications (TEES)" (latest edition). 1) The preferred location for cabinets shall be on the approach-side corner of the minor arterial. Where sufficient right of way exists, a minimum of 48-inches of concrete sidewalk and clearance shall be provided at the front and rear of the cabinet(s) and a minimum of 36- inches of sidewalk and clearance on the sides of the cabinet(s). Clearances shall be unobstructed by any above ground facilities. The City Traffic Engineer must approve any variance from the preferred location. 2) The front side of traffic signal controller cabinet shall be oriented such that the technician faces DRAFT 6 7/29/24 the intersection when viewing the controller front panel and the front door handle should be on the right and the door shall open toward the street. 3) The controller cabinet shall be equipped with an interior light (Dialight Part # CL2-CF-TC4 or approved equal). 4) The controller cabinet shall be caulked at the bottom. 5) The controller cabinet shall be wired for red monitoring. 6) The controller cabinet shall be wired for door alarm monitoring. 7) The controller cabinet shall include emergency vehicle preemption equipment as required. 8) The controller cabinet shall be wired for full 8 phase capability. 9) The controller cabinet shall have vehicle loop detector cards on the Qualified Product List, Model C-1100 SS preferred. 10) The controller cabinet shall include an integral rack mounted document drawer assembly for the purpose of document storage and writing surface. The document drawer shall have an interior depth of approximately 1.5 inches, have drawer guides made of anodized aluminum, have drawer mounting brackets made of stainless steel, and have a hinged lift top writing area with a textured powder coat surface. 11) The controller cabinet output files shall be equipped with UL rated multi-conductor terminal lug. 12) The controller cabinet shall include an "AS-BUILT" blueprint of the signal and timing plan inside the cabinet. If the controller cabinet design deviates in any way from the details in this manual, such deviation shall be submitted to the Traffic Engineer or their assigned representative for review before fabrication of the contract cabinets. If deemed necessary by the Traffic Engineer or their assigned representative, one complete prototype cabinet shall be delivered to him for review at least 30 days before fabrication of the contract fixtures. The prototype cabinet will be returned to the CONTRACTOR and if permitted by the Traffic Engineer or their assigned representative, the cabinet may be installed. 1.7 SERVICE AND ELECTRIC SERVICE CABINET Except for false work lighting, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for applying for and arranging with the serving utility to complete service connections for both temporary and permanent installations and the CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs and fees required by the utility. The City will provide the SCE service address for the meters. The electrical service cabinet shall: 1) Be fabricated with an anodized aluminum finish. 2) Provide Type III-C dual meter electrical service for all new signal installation. Deviations shall be approved by City Engineer. See City of Lake Elsinore Std. Plan #501 for additional information. 3) Meet the SCE Service Guide service requirements and the Caltrans Standard Plan Drawing ES- 2F cabinet specifications. 4) Have separate main disconnect circuit breakers for metered and unmetered sections. 5) Have plug-in type circuit breakers. Cable bussing is not allowed. 6) Have 2 time delay control contactors. 7) Be caulked at the bottom. 8) Be a model, part, class or type number as approved by City. DRAFT 7 7/29/24 1.8 BATTERY BACK-UP SYSTEM The battery back-up system (BBS) cabinet shall conform to the following items: 1) Be housed in a cabinet attached to the side of the controller cabinet. Stand-alone cabinet may be requested by City for special circumstances. 2) The BBS cabinet shall be contain a thermostatically controlled cooling fan and 12x16 air filter. 3) The battery back-up system shall be an Alpha FXM 1100 or other as approved by the City Engineer. 4) The BBS must be Ethernet/IP compatible and wired for communication to the TMC and for an alarm output to the controller unit. The wiring shall consist of a CAT5 cable and 2 pair #20 cable. The alarm output shall provide Railroad 1 flashing operation upon 40% batter power remaining. 5) Install a 2 pair communication cable between the BBS and 332 cabinet and wire up to provide an alarm when batteries are in service. 6) The BBS shall have a manual bypass switch with automatic transfer. 7) The BBS cabinet shall have an auxiliary generator plug installed and include any necessary generator kits. 8) The BBS cabinet shall be outfitted with a minimum of four (4) battery backup batteries. 1.9 SIGNAL INDICATION HARDWARE FINISH SPECIFICATIONS Except for anodized components, all exposed metal signal housings, doors, visors, backplates and framework parts shall have a powder coated finish and be a City approved process. The minimum requirements are as follows: 1) A 3-5 stage pretreatment consisting of: Degrease, Rinse, Iron Phosphate, Rinse, and Seal. Note: Degrease and Iron Phosphate can be combined, thereby eliminating Rinse, making this a 3-stage process. 2) A dry off cycle for at least 10 minutes at 300° to 400° F. 3) Electrostatically applied powder at 75-90KV. 4) Thermal setting cycle for 20 minutes at 400° F. 5) All parts shall be coated with an ultraviolet resistant polyester powder. The only exception is for items of flat black, which can be coated with a self-cleaning flat black epoxy. 6) All threaded fitting hardware to be assembled with anti-seize compound. 7) All terminal boxes are to be made of bronze. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the manufacturer’s certificate of compliance with City approved powder coating process prior to installation of equipment. 1.10 FOUNDATIONS 1) Portland cement concrete shall conform to Section 90-20, Minor Concrete, of the State Standard Specifications and shall contain not less than 590 pounds of cement per cubic yard. Foundation shall be installed per Standard Plan ES-3C. 1.11 GROUNDING AND BONDING 1) The grounding jumper shall be attached by a 3/16 inch or larger brass bolt in the signal standard or controller pedestal and shall be run to the conduit, ground rod, or bonding wire in the adjacent pull box. 2) The grounding jumper shall be visible after the cap has been poured on the foundation. DRAFT 8 7/29/24 3) Equipment grounding conductor #8 AWG is required in all conduits. 1.12 REFLECTORIZED STREET NAME SIGNS (RSNS) 1) The street name sign panel shall include the City of Lake Elsinore logo and shall have blue background per City of Lake Elsinore specifications and Standard Plan #404A. 2) Steet names signs shall be manufactured with Diamond Grade DG3 material reflective sheeting. 3) Street names signs shall include street and road name suffixes (Ave, St, etc.), no block numbers. 4) Font and lettering size shall be per City Standard Plan #404A. 5) Street name signs shall be 6’, 8’ or 10’ in length (City Engineer determines based on street name) and 1.5’ in height. 6) Street name sign mounting bracket shall be Tapco Mast Arm Swing Bracket or approved equal. 7) RSNS shall be mounted on separate arm per City of Lake Elsinore Standard #404B. 1.13 EMERGENCY VEHICLE PREEMPTION 1) Provide emergency vehicle preemption (EVPE) for all approaches (except minor driveways). 2) The emergency vehicle preemption (EVPE) system shall include infrared detectors (Opticom Model no. 721 or approved equal) and Opticom GPS system. GPS antenna shall be mounted on nearest 30’ arm to the controller cabinet unless otherwise specified by the City Engineer or manufacturer. 3) The EVPE discriminator module shall be an Opticom Model no. 764 (or approved equal. 4) The detector shall be mounted on the mast arm using an astro bracket with threaded nipples and lock washers. 5) EVPE detectors shall not be mounted on the signal head, unless exception made by the City Engineer. 1.14 SIGNAL HEADS 1) All traffic signal modules shall be LED. Approved manufacturers are GE and Dialight. 2) All LED traffic signal modules shall be fully compliant with the latest Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) specifications and circular supplements. 3) Each LED product bid must be certified in the Intertek LED Traffic Signal Module Certification Program. Proof of certification must be documented and approved by the Engineering Division Inspector prior to installation. 1.14.1 VEHICULAR SIGNAL HEADS 1) Signal heads should be located as follows: a) Provide a minimum of two vehicular signal heads for all phases. b) Provide a minimum of 50 feet from the limit line to the far side indications c) Provide a maximum of 150 feet from the limit line to the far side indications, unless a near side indication is installed. d) There should be two signal heads for the through movement visible within a 40 degree cone measured at the center of the approach at a point 10 ft behind the limit line (20 degrees to the right and 20 degrees to the left of the center of the approach extended, see CAMUTCD, Figure 4D-4) 2) Signal section housing shall be aluminum per 86-1.02R(4)(b)(iii) "Signal Housings" of the latest edition of the Caltrans Standard Specifications. 3) All (red, yellow, and green) LED (light-emitting diode) signal modules shall be Type 1 and meet DRAFT 9 7/29/24 the following specifications: a) LED signal modules for all balls and arrows shall be twelve-inch diameter (12"). b) LED signal modules shall be complete, and factory installed in aluminum signal sections c) LED signal modules shall be mounted and soldered onto a printed circuit board. 4) The normal failure of one LED signal module shall not deactivate any other LED signal module 5) LED signal module shall have a minimum 5-year warranty beginning after traffic signal system has been accepted by the City. 6) All signal faces shall have one-piece backplates and tunnel visors. 7) Left turn signal modules shall be all arrows. 8) Plastic signal heads, plastic visors, or plastic backplates are not acceptable. 9) Terminal blocks shall be mounted in red section on the MAS/MAT signal heads. There shall be a drip loop for the field installed signal wires. 10) Red and yellow ball and arrow indictor lenses shall be tinted. Green ball and arrow indicator lenses shall be clear. 11) Backplates shall be outfitted with 2” retroreflective yellow borders. Yellow borders shall be installed at the factory. Installation of yellow borders outside of the factory or retrofit backplates shall not be accepted. 1.14.2 PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS 1) All pedestrian indications shall be of the LED type. 2) All new traffic signals and traffic signal modifications with pedestrian phasing shall use pedestrian indications of the “Countdown” type. For traffic signal modifications, new pedestrian housings may be necessary to accommodate the “Countdown” type pedestrian indications. 3) Plastic pedestrian heads are not acceptable. 4) All pedestrian heads shall be side mounted with appropriate housing and bracketry. 5) Provide curb ramps and truncated domes at every corner that has a pedestrian crossing. Curb ramps and truncated domes shall meet the latest ADA/PROWAG requirements. 1.15 PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON ASSEMBLY 1) Pedestrian push button locations shall meet latest edition of CA MUTCD and ADA standards. 2) If the signal standard is more than 10 feet from the landing area of the curb ramp, then install the push button(s) on a push-button pole adjacent to the curb ramp. 3) Pedestrian push buttons shall be 2-inch minimum in diameter complying with all Federal ADA requirements. Push buttons shall be vibratory. 4) The pedestrian push button assembly shall be Accessible Pedestrian Signal (APS) with a nine inch (9”) by fifteen inch (15”) international symbol push button plate per the latest edition of the Caltrans Standard Specifications. 5) The push button frame shall include adjustable mounting brackets to accommodate most standard Caltrans traffic signal poles. 6) The pedestrian push button housing shall be: a. Made of die cast aluminum. b. A telescoping, vandal-proof design. c. Painted a Federal Standard color (yellow) as specified by the Traffic Engineer. 7) Plastic push buttons housings are not acceptable. 8) Accessible Pedestrian Signal (APS) push buttons shall be Polara INS3-3-T-N-O-Y or approved equal APS. 9) Accessible Pedestrian Signal (APS) push buttons are to be installed at all locations possible. DRAFT 10 7/29/24 1.16 LED BLANKOUT SIGNS 1) LED Blank-out signs may be used at specific locations (upon approval by City Engineer) to minimize undesirable vehicular movements. 2) The signs shall be compliant with the latest CA MUTCD requirement. 3) The window dimensions shall be 30”x30” for near side sign, and 36”x36” for far side sign. 1.17 LIGHTING STANDARDS 1) Safety lighting luminaires above the traffic signals shall conform to the City of Lake Elsinore Street Light Manual – Design criteria and Standards. Current safety lights used by the City are GE model ERL-1-0-13-D5-40-A-GRAY-L. 2) Safety Lighting shall be: a. Completely assembled. b. 120 volt. c. Have photoelectric control unit and switches (Type IV). The photoelectric control unit shall have a shorting cap and capable of being controlled from the meter pedestal. d. Full cutoff type. e. Have fifteen feet (15’) mast arms (maximum) unless otherwise directed by the City Engineer. 3) Optical Requirements for street lighting luminaires are as follows: Certified luminaire performance data shall be furnished with “Equipment List and Drawings,” conforming to State Standard Specifications. This data shall include complete photometric test data in the form of isolux charts at a scale of one-inch equals twenty feet (1” = 20’) for the luminaire and lamp sizes indicated on the plans. Alternate data may be in the form of horizontal foot-candle values recorded on a fifteen foot x fifteen foot (15’ x 15’) gird, extending one hundred fifty feet (150’) longitudinally from the light source and fifteen feet (15’) behind and one hundred twenty feet (120’) in front of the light source for the luminaire and lamp sizes indicated on the plan. The horizontal foot-candle levels in the data submitted shall provide a minimum horizontal foot-candle level of at least 0.9 fc average maintained in the intersection with minimum of 0.60 at centerline and 0.5 at the furthest crosswalk. Failure to satisfactorily meet the referenced values will be justification for refusal of equipment by the City of Lake Elsinore. The test shall be performed by an independent and recognized testing laboratory or by the manufacturer’s laboratory. When the tests are performed by the manufacturer’s laboratory, the test data shall be certified. Subsequent to the CONTRACTOR’s installation of any street light luminaires, field checks may be performed at random by the Traffic Engineer or City Electrician or their assigned representative and calculated according to the “I.E.S. Guide for Photometric Measurement of Roadway Lighting Installations (LM-50),” approved in July 1974. Failure to satisfactorily meet or exceed the referenced values during field check will be justification for replacement by the CONTRACTOR at the sole option of the City. 1.18 SALVAGED EQUIPMENT 1) The CONTRACTOR shall deliver all salvaged equipment to a location as determined by City Inspector. 2) Obtain a receipt for all salvaged equipment. 2.0 TRAFFIC SIGNAL INTERCONNECT DRAFT 11 7/29/24 1) Traffic signal interconnect shall be provided on all new traffic signals and existing traffic signal modifications to all adjacent traffic signals determined by the City Engineer. 2) All traffic signal interconnect designs shall be fiber optic unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer and shall be designed and installed per the latest edition of the Caltrans “Fiber Optic Design Guidelines.” 3) Under special conditions wireless or other methods of interconnect may be used when approved by the City Engineer. 4) The existing SIC system shall be maintained at all times during construction. In the event of damage, the CONTRACTOR or responsible party, as determined by the project inspector, shall commence repairs immediately. Repairs shall be completed within 10 working days or the City shall have the option to complete necessary repairs and charge the responsible CONTRACTOR(s) for any associated repair costs. 2.1 INTERCONNECT CONDUIT 1) All interconnect conduits shall be three inches (3") minimum. All conduits shall have mule tape. 2) All new intersections shall include separate conduits for SIC and signal wiring (including DLC). Sharing of the DLC and CCTV wiring in the same conduits with SIC will be allowed on intersection modifications, as long as conduit fill is less than 40% and as approved by the City Engineer. 3) All interconnect conduits shall contain a No. 8 green insulated stranded copper trace wire. 4) All conduits entering pull boxes, vaults and cabinets shall be protected with duct seal. No open holes are allowed. 5) Install conduit to a depth of not less than 30 inches below finished grade, except in sidewalk and curbed paved median areas, where it must be at least 18 inches below grade. See City of Lake Elsinore Standard Plan #421 for additional information. 6) See Section 1.3 of this Specification for additional conduit information. 2.2 INTERCONNECT PULL BOXES AND VAULTS 1) All interconnect pull boxes shall be #6 concrete with extension and installed per Caltrans Standard Plans ES-8A except as approved by the City Engineer for existing facilities. 2) Interconnect pull box lids shall be stamped “SIGNAL COMMUNICATION”. 3) Boxes shall be installed between 300 feet (minimum) and 600 feet (maximum) apart unless geographical or site conditions necessitate a shorter run. 4) SIC conduit shall be installed in pull boxes using 45-degree, UL approved elbows. These elbows shall be placed as far apart in the pull box as possible, oriented in the direction of the cable, and offset to one side to facilitate cable pulling and coiling. 5) Approximately 100-feet of SIC slack shall be coiled inside of each splice box (12 and 72 SMFOC). Approximately 100-feet of SIC slack shall be coiled on either side of the splice enclosure where present. 6) Approximately 20-feet of SIC slack shall be coiled inside of each pull box. 7) Approximately 20-feet of SIC slack shall be coiled inside each controller cabinet. 8) See Section 1.2 of this Specification for additional pull box information. 2.3 TRACER WIRE 1) All interconnect conduits shall contain a No. 8 green insulated stranded copper trace wire. 2) No splices are permitted between pull boxes. 3) Proper operation of the tracer wire shall be demonstrated prior to acceptance. DRAFT 12 7/29/24 2.4 INTERCONNECT CABLE 1) All fiber optic cable shall be single mode. Approved cable is Altos Loose Tube All Dielectric Gel Free Cables with FastAccess Technology or approved equal. Trunk fiber optic cable shall be minimum 72 fiber count. Product code is 072-E-U4-T47-01-D20, or approved equal. 2) Cable installed in runs between splice enclosures and cabinet termination equipment shall be minimum 12 fiber count. Product code is 012-E-U4-T47-01-D20, or approved equal. 3) Splices are to be made in splice enclosures in fiber optic vault only. SIC shall be continuous and unspliced between cabinets. Exceptions must be approved by City Engineer. 4) The design engineer shall perform a site survey to determine slack availability on existing SIC runs, or require cable replacement when sufficient slack is not available. 5) A patch panel shall be installed to terminate the 12 SMFOC. In instances where there is insufficient rack capacity, a spider fan out kit shall be installed upon approval of City Engineer. 6) New SIC shall be connected to the City network and a revised assignment table shall be submitted as part of the final design. 7) Where existing copper SIC (CuSIC) is to be retained, CuSIC shall be a minimum of six (6) twisted pair 20 AWG conductor communication cable with standard color code and water resistant as required by Caltrans specifications. CuSIC (Must be approved by the City). 2.5 FIBER OPTIC INTERCONNECT EQUIPMENT Termination components for vaults and signal cabinets are listed in Table 3 below. The fiber optic cables shall be terminated and/or spliced with these components per the fiber assignment provided by Traffic Engineering during project design or before signal turn-on. A minimum of 5 working days- notice will be required for Traffic Engineering to produce this documentation. Table 3: Cabinet and Vault Fiber Termination Components Description Manufacturer Model Splice Closures Corning SCF-4C18-01 Splice Closure Splice Tray Corning SCF-ST-099 Splice Housing Corning Splice Trays Corning M67-048 Cabinet Termination Corning CCH-01U 72 Port Patch Panel with MTP Adapter Corning CCHE-CP72-89 12 Port Panel Corning CCH-CP12-A9 Fiber Distribution Unit Corning CCH-01U Splice Cassette Corning CCH-CS12-A9-P00RE Jumpers Generic Connectors Generic LC 2.6 COMMUNICATION DATA NETWORK The communication protocol shall be Ethernet. New or modified signals shall receive the communication standard components in Table 4. Table 4: Data Communication Standards DRAFT 13 7/29/24 Description Manufacturer Model Ethernet Switch Cisco- Fiber IE-4000- 4GS8GP4G-E Actelis- Copper ML688 Power Supply Cisco Cat 6 Patch Cable RJ45 Generic Power Connection Generic Gigabit Fiber SFP Transceivers Cisco 2.7 ETHERNET SWITCHES Ethernet switches shall provide the following functionality: 1) All switches shall be managed and support advanced features including: a. Port based VLAN segregation. b. DHCP snooping and/or IGMP snooping c. MAC address filtering d. Quality of Service e. SNMP f. Remote Management 2) Fiber uplinks shall be single mode and support 10/100/1000 Duplex Ethernet ports and provide long haul capacity. 3) In addition to the above requirements, local switches (located at intersections) shall meet the following requirements: a. Shall be environmentally hardened (-40 to 160 degrees F) and NEMA TS-2 rated. b. Provide a minimum eight ports with a minimum of six 10/100 Base TX copper ports and two duplex fiber uplink ports. c. The fiber uplink ports shall be SC, LX, or LC type connectors. Connectors shall be compatible with Gigabit speed. d. Power supply shall support 120 VAC and/or 24 VDC. e. The switch shall support standard 332 rack mount, DIN rail or 19” rack mountable. 4) All switches shall provide a minimum 2 year warranty on parts and 1 year “live” technical support (either in person or over the phone) during business hours (either in person or over the phone) during business hours (Pacific time) 9AM to 5PM Monday through Friday, from the date of installation Warranty parts replacement shall be within three business days. A warranty certificate meeting these requirements shall be provided on the date of installation. 5) Fiber SFP Transceivers shall be Corning brand. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, install and configure all Ethernet switches at the local intersections and test the communication between the field switch and the TMC. The switches shall be configured with IP address provided by Traffic Engineering during project design or before operational tests. A minimum of 5 working days notice will be required for Traffic Engineering to produce this documentation. The testing of the Ethernet switches shall provide for the necessary operation of all devices connected to the Ethernet System. Approved manufacturers of Ethernet communications shall include Cisco. Non-listed manufacturers shall be approved by the City Engineer. DRAFT 14 7/29/24 2.8 BROADBAND WIRELESS ETHERNET COMMUNICATION The Broadband Wireless Ethernet Communication System shall provide traffic signal and CCTV video and control communication. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install such other items or details not mentioned below, that are required to construct a complete and operational system including: antennas, radios, mounting equipment, hardware, cabling, and incidental materials shall be performed, placed, constructed or installed. The CONTRACTOR shall follow the manufacturer recommendations and instructions for installation. Wireless communication shall provide the following functionality: 1) Support Ethernet communications. 2) Support mesh network topology and point-to-point and point-to-multipoint configuration. 3) 802.11 Compliant and operate on a license free band. 4) Provide a minimum of 300 Mbps data rate. 5) Provide a minimum of 10 miles range. 6) Provide security encryption (WPA, WPA2, MAC, and Radius) 7) Be compatible with Ethernet switching and routing protocols including: a. VLAN b. VPN c. DHCP snooping d. Quality of Service e. SNMP f. Remote Management 8) Be a NEMA rated enclosure. 9) Power supply support 120 VAC and/or 24 VDC. 10) All wireless equipment shall provide a minimum 2-year warranty on parts and 1 year “live” technical support (either in person or over the phone) during business hours (either in person or over the phone) during business hours (Pacific time) 9AM to 5PM Monday through Friday, from the date of installation Warranty parts replacement shall be within three business days. A warranty certificate meeting these requirements shall be provided on the date of installation. 11) Radio shall come with management software with no licensing fees. The CONTRACTOR shall perform a wireless site survey to determine the exact radio path and signal strength values to each wireless site. The results of the survey (path quality, data integrity, and spectrum analysis) shall be provided to the Engineer to determine optimized system configuration and performance. The CONTRACTOR shall test the completed system and ensure the proper functioning of all wireless components and connected devices to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Approved manufacturers of Wireless Ethernet communication solutions include Proxim Wireless or Approved Equal. Non-listed manufacturers shall be approved by the Engineer. 2.9 CCTV VIDEO NETWORK All new traffic signal installations shall include, as part of the standard safety systems, the installation of CCTV camera equipment and transmission equipment and any additional wiring or hardware required to support an operational CCTV system. This requirement shall apply unless otherwise specified by the City Traffic Engineer. Table 5 provides the camera equipment. DRAFT 15 7/29/24 1) The CCTV communication protocol shall be Ethernet. Ethernet requirements are provided in Section 2.7. 2) A License Key shall be provided for each CCTV camera. 3) The approved location for new CCTV camera installations shall be specified by the City Traffic Engineer. 4) Installation: The CCTV system shall be installed per manufacturer’s installation recommendations. 5) Power for CCTV systems at new intersections shall consist of a power cord plugged into a power strip mounted on the rail of the 332 cabinet plugged into Equipment Receptacle 2. The next alternative locations in order of preference are the ECB and least used signal breaker (auxiliary). The power cord shall be routed through the pole and terminated in the CCTV housing per the manufacturer’s instructions. 6) The CCTV transmission equipment shall be installed and tested for operation by the CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of the City Engineer before acceptance of the system. CCTV Camera and Transmission components required to accommodate a typical CCTV installation are shown in Table 5 below. Table 5: CCTV Camera and Transmission Equipment Description Manufacturer Model Dome Camera Bosch MIC IP dynamic 7000 HD Coaxial cable Generic RG6A/U Data cable Generic Pole Mount Bracket Bosch MIC-PMB Wall Mount Bracket Bosch MIC-WMB-WD Shallow Conduit Adaptor Bosch MIC-SCA-WD POE+ Power Supply Bosch NPD-6001A 2.10 TESTING 1) The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for ensuring the operability and quality of SIC delivered from the manufacturer before installation. SIC shall not be removed from the reel or installed until it has been successfully tested by the CONTRACTOR. The pre-installation test results shall be documented and provided to the Engineering Division Inspector for approval. SIC found to be defective or damaged shall be returned to the source for replacement by the CONTRACTOR. 2) Fiber optic SIC shall be installed, spliced, terminated, and tested in accordance with NECA/FOA 301-2009 standards. This includes pre-installation and post installation testing of the cable. 3) Pre-installation testing shall be performed on all fibers using an Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) to preclude manufacturing and shipping damage. The CONTRACTOR shall perform such testing either on-site or at a holding facility prior to installing the cable into conduit. 4) Post-installation testing of all terminated fibers shall be performed using launch cables at both ends as specified in NECA/FOA 301-2009 Annex B.3. The CONTRACTOR shall perform such testing on-site after all termination and splicing work is completed. DRAFT 16 7/29/24 5) Test results, in the form of pre-installation test data and post installation OTDR traces, shall be provided to the Engineering Division Inspector in a bound hard copy format along with the electronic file and appropriate viewing software, for review and approval after installation and splicing/termination work are completed. 6) The pre-installation test results shall be in the form of a spreadsheet detailing the length and loss/km for each fiber as well as the parameters used for testing. The post-installation OTDR traces shall clearly show each continuous fiber, the connectors on each end, and the loss for each event. 7) The Engineering Division Inspector shall approve the test results before final acceptance. 2.11 GPS UTB MODULES A Global Positioning System Universal Time Base (GPS UTB) module shall be furnished and installed within the cabinet for all new traffic signals and modified traffic signals that do not have a GPS UTB module. The module shall incorporate a microprocessor unit and utilize an external antenna to retrieve time signals from the atomic clocks of the United States National Institute of Standards broadcast on the GPS satellite network. Modules for 2070 controllers shall be in rack mount form factor. All other controller types shall utilize a stand-alone module. Modules shall be McCain model 2070-7G unless otherwise directed by the City Engineer or required by the controller manufacturer. 3.0 TRAFFIC CALMING DEVICES 3.1 SPEED RADAR SIGNS 1) Speed radar signs shall be Traffic Logix SafePace evolution 15 or as approved by the City Engineer. 2) Speed radar shall be solar powered unless otherwise approved by City Engineer. 3) Speed radar shall have Bluetooth and ethernet communications capabilities. 4) Speed radar device shall have remote monitor and management capabilities. 5) Speed radar signs shall be mounted on Type 15-FBS pole (16’ high), or existing street light. 3.2 SCHOOL FLASHER SIGNS 1) School flasher signs shall be determined by City Engineer. 2) School flasher shall be solar powered unless otherwise approved by City Engineer. 3) School flasher shall have Bluetooth and ethernet communications capabilities. 4) School flasher device shall have remote monitor and management capabilities. 5) School flasher signs shall be mounted on Type 15-FBS pole (16’ high), or existing street light. 3.3 RECTANGULAR RAPID FLASHING BEACON (RRFB) SIGNS 1) RRFB signs shall be W11-2 (30” x 30”) and W16-7P (24” x 12”) at a minimum. 2) RRFB shall be solar powered unless otherwise approved by City Engineer. 3) RRFB signs shall be mounted on 2” solid quick punch telespar pole, Type 15-FBS pole (16’ high), or existing street light. DRAFT 17 7/29/24 4) APS buttons shall be installed on every RRFB sign.. 4.0 TRAFFIC SIGNAL GENERAL NOTES For City of Lake Elsinore Traffic Signal General Notes, see Improvement General Notes section of the City website. DRAFT